Mimaki JV5 160S Service ID4589 PDF

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Revision 2.00
MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.

TKB Gotenyama Building, 5-9-41, Kitashinagawa, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-0001, Japan
Phone : +81-3-5420-8671 Fax : +81-3-5420-8687
URL : http://www.mimaki.co.jp/
D500306
Color Inkjet Printer JV5-130S/160S
About this Maintenance Manual

This manual covers the instructions and useful information to be given to the service personnel on
maintenance of the color inkjet printer JV5-130S/160S. Perform maintenance work according to the
instructions given in this manual and the related documents listed below.
Constitution
This manual consists of the following chapters:
CHAPTER 1 Outline of Maintenance
Describes the specifications and other information of the printer, including precautions
to be taken in maintenance work.
CHAPTER 2 Operation Principle and Functions
Explaines the operation of each unit, and describes the functions and setting items of the
printer.
CHAPTER 3 Overhaul / Adjustment
Describes procedures for removal and reinstallation of major parts.
Adjusting or testing methods, or mechanical adjusting methods using jigs and tools are
also described.
CHAPTER 4 Troubleshooting
Describes how to determine the cause of trouble and how to repair the printer.
CHAPTER 5 Explanation of Electrical Parts
Describes information about PCBs and electrical parts.
Related Documents
The following documents relate to JV5-130S/160S. Refer to them whenever necessary.
• OPERATION MANUAL (Packed with main unit)
• MECHANICAL DRAWING
• SETUP GUIDE (for Service Engineers)
ii
Safety Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are used in this manual. Understand the symbols, and be sure to observe the
instructions.
In text Name of symbol Meaning
“WARNING” mark Failure to observe the instructions given with this symbol can result in
death or serious injuries to personnel.
“CAUTION” mark Failure to observe the instructions given with this symbol can result in
injuries to personnel or damage to property.
“IMPORTANT” Important notes on maintenance work are given with this symbol.
mark Understand the instructions thoroughly, and perform maintenance work
properly.
“Tips” mark Useful information for maintenance work is given with this symbol.
(P.1-10) Reference page Related description is given on the page shown by this symbol. Be sure to
refer to the specified page.
iii
Caution Label
A caution label is stuck on the printer as shown below. Check the label before work. If it is illegible due
to stains or coming off, replace it with a new one after getting user's consent.
Locations of labels
~ Front ~
(Reorder: M903239)
(Reorder: M903405)
(Reorder: M903330)
(Reorder: M901549)
~ Rear ~
(Reorder: M903239)
(Reorder: M903968)
(Reorder: M904130)
iv
Contents
Outline of Maintenance
1-1. Precautions in Maintenance ....................................................................... 1-2
1-1-1. Notes on repair ................................................................................. 1-2
1-1-2. Preliminary checks ........................................................................... 1-3
1-2. Tools required for maintenance work ........................................................ 1-4
1-2-1. Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly ............................. 1-4
1-2-2. Adjustment tools .............................................................................. 1-4
1-3. Specifications of the main unit ................................................................... 1-5
Operation Principle and Functions

2-1. Operation Principle ..................................................................................... 2-2
2-1-1. Sequence at Power-on ...................................................................... 2-2
2-1-2. Origin Point Detection ..................................................................... 2-3
2-1-3. Set Up ............................................................................................... 2-3
2-1-4. Media Detection ............................................................................... 2-4
2-1-5. Sequence of Maintenance Function ................................................. 2-5
2-1-6. Ink System ....................................................................................... 2-9
2-1-7. Nozzle Missing Detection (NCU) Function .................................. 2-20
2-2. Functions .................................................................................................... 2-26
2-2-1. ADJUST Function ......................................................................... 2-26
2-2-2. TEST Function ............................................................................... 2-33
2-2-3. Special Key Function ..................................................................... 2-48
2-2-4. PARAMETER Function ................................................................ 2-49
2-3. Operation Flow .......................................................................................... 2-50
2-3-1. Outline ............................................................................................ 2-50
2-3-2. SETUP ........................................................................................... 2-51
2-3-3. MACHINE SET ............................................................................. 2-52
2-3-4. NCU ............................................................................................... 2-54
2-3-5. ADJUST ......................................................................................... 2-57
2-3-6. TEST .............................................................................................. 2-61
2-3-7. PARAMETER ................................................................................ 2-68
Overhaul / Adjustment
3-1. Outline .......................................................................................................... 3-2
3-1-1. Precautions for disassembly and reassembly ................................... 3-2
3-1-2. Tools and jigs ................................................................................... 3-3
3-1-3. Disassembly and Reassembly Procedure ......................................... 3-4
3-2. Overhaul of Ink-related Parts .................................................................... 3-6
3-2-1. Head Unit ......................................................................................... 3-7
3-2-2. S Pump Assembly .......................................................................... 3-33
3-2-3. Pump Motor Assembly .................................................................. 3-35
v
3-2-4. Cap Head assy. ................................................................................ 3-37

3-2-5. Cap Base 1H ................................................................................... 3-38
3-2-6. Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly ............................................... 3-42
3-2-7. Major Parts for Wash Cartridge Assembly ..................................... 3-51
3-2-8. Damper Assembly .......................................................................... 3-57
3-2-9. Sucker BOX .................................................................................... 3-61
3-2-10. NCU ................................................................................................ 3-63
3-3. Overhaul of PCBs ....................................................................................... 3-69
3-3-1. Main PCB ....................................................................................... 3-70
3-3-2. HDC PCB ....................................................................................... 3-77
3-3-3. IO PCB ........................................................................................... 3-78
3-3-4. USB PCB ........................................................................................ 3-79
3-3-5. Head Relay PCB ............................................................................. 3-81
3-3-6. Slider PCB ...................................................................................... 3-82
3-3-7. Power PCB ..................................................................................... 3-85
3-3-8. Heater PCB ..................................................................................... 3-88
3-3-9. BOX Relay PCB ............................................................................. 3-90
3-3-10. Keyboard PCB ................................................................................ 3-92
3-3-11. Dot Detection PCB ......................................................................... 3-96
3-3-12. Ink Unit PCB .................................................................................. 3-98
3-3-13. Side Relay PCB .............................................................................. 3-99
3-3-14. ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge) .................................. 3-101
3-3-15. LED PCB ...................................................................................... 3-103
3-3-16. Take-up PCB ................................................................................. 3-105
3-3-17. Drying Fan Fork PCB ................................................................... 3-106
3-4. Overhaul of Sensors ................................................................................. 3-109
3-4-1. Origin Sensor ................................................................................ 3-110
3-4-2. Wiper Sensor ................................................................................ 3-112
3-4-3. Clamp Sensor ................................................................................ 3-113
3-4-4. Bottom Point Sensor ..................................................................... 3-115
3-4-5. Cap Sensor .................................................................................... 3-117
3-4-6. Paper Width Sensor ...................................................................... 3-119
3-4-7. Jam Sensor .................................................................................... 3-121
3-4-8. Paper Thickness Encoder .............................................................. 3-125
3-4-9. Y Encoder ..................................................................................... 3-129
3-4-10. Head Up/Down Encoder ............................................................... 3-132
3-4-11. Paper Sensor ................................................................................. 3-136
3-4-12. Media Rotary Encoder Assembly ................................................. 3-139
3-4-13. Front Cover Sensor L ................................................................... 3-147
3-4-14. Front Cover Sensor R ................................................................... 3-149
3-4-15. Maintenance Cover Sensor L ....................................................... 3-151
3-4-16. Maintenance Cover Sensor R ....................................................... 3-152
3-4-17. Ink Leakage Sensor ...................................................................... 3-153
3-4-18. Waste Tank Sensor ........................................................................ 3-158
3-5. Overhaul of Driving Parts ....................................................................... 3-161
3-5-1. X-axis Motor Assembly ................................................................ 3-162
3-5-2. X Pulley, X Belt ............................................................................ 3-165
3-5-3. Y-axis Motor Assembly ................................................................ 3-167
3-5-4. Y Drive Pulley Assembly, Y-Drive Transmission Belt ................ 3-171
3-5-5. Y Drive Belt .................................................................................. 3-175
3-5-6. Wiper Motor ................................................................................. 3-179
3-5-7. Station Motor ................................................................................ 3-182
vi
3-5-8. Head UD Motor ........................................................................... 3-184
3-5-9. M Motor ....................................................................................... 3-186
3-6. Overhaul of Other Parts ......................................................................... 3-188
3-6-1. Cutter Unit Assy. .......................................................................... 3-189
3-6-2. A Heater Cover Assy. .................................................................. 3-193
3-6-3. P Heater Cover Assy. ................................................................... 3-198
3-6-4. R Heater Cover Assy. ................................................................... 3-204
3-6-5. Wiper Wash Solenoid ................................................................... 3-206
3-6-6. SSR .............................................................................................. 3-209
Troubleshooting
4-1. Outline .......................................................................................................... 4-2
4-1-1. Rough identification of the source of the trouble ............................ 4-2
4-1-2. Checking procedure ......................................................................... 4-2
4-2. Troubles for which error messages are displayed ..................................... 4-4
4-2-1. Error messages and corrective measures ......................................... 4-4
4-2-2. Warning messages and corrective measures .................................. 4-15
Explanation of Electrical Parts

5-1. Outline .......................................................................................................... 5-2
5-1-1. Operation Explanation ..................................................................... 5-3
5-1-2. Power Supply ................................................................................... 5-4
5-2. Circuit Board Specifications ....................................................................... 5-5
5-2-1. Main PCB ......................................................................................... 5-5
5-2-2. USB Board ....................................................................................... 5-6
5-2-3. I/F Connection Board ....................................................................... 5-6
5-2-4. HDC PCB ......................................................................................... 5-7
5-2-5. IO PCB ............................................................................................. 5-7
5-2-6. Ink Unit PCB .................................................................................... 5-8
5-2-7. Slider PCB ....................................................................................... 5-9
5-2-8. Heater PCB .................................................................................... 5-10
5-2-9. Keyboard PCB ............................................................................... 5-10
5-2-10. Dot Detection PCB ......................................................................... 5-11
5-2-11. Encoder PCB ................................................................................... 5-11
5-2-12. Paper Width Sensor PCB ................................................................ 5-11
5-2-13. Take-up PCB ................................................................................... 5-11
5-2-14. Box Relay PCB .............................................................................. 5-12
5-2-15. Side relay PCB ............................................................................... 5-12
5-2-16. Head relay PCB ............................................................................. 5-13
5-2-17. Head memory PCB ........................................................................ 5-13
5-2-18. LED PCB ....................................................................................... 5-13
5-2-19. Ink Leak Sensor PCB ..................................................................... 5-13
5-2-20. Memory PCB ................................................................................. 5-13
5-3. Electronic block diagram .......................................................................... 5-14
vii
viii
CHAPTER 1 Outline of Maintenance
Contents
1-1. Precautions in Maintenance ...................................... 1-2
1-1-1. Notes on repair ....................................................... 1-2
1-1-2. Preliminary checks ................................................ 1-3
1-2. Tools required for maintenance work ....................... 1-4
1-2-1. Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly . 1-4
1-2-2. Adjustment tools .................................................... 1-4
1-3. Specifications of the main unit .................................. 1-5
1- 1
1-1. Precautions in Maintenance

1-1-1. Notes on repair
Be sure to turn the power off and unplug the power cable from the main body inlet before
starting work.
To prevent the ink from getting into your eyes, be sure to wear safety goggles and gloves when
cleaning the print head or replacing the S pump L assembly or if the ink is anticipated to
scatter. If the ink sticks to your hand, the skin may be get rough and dry.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacture.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Take sufficient care so that leaked ink does not adhere to other parts. Ink droplets attached to
FPCs or connectors may cause shortcircuit or a bad electric contact at inserting/removing a
damper, thereby the ink discharge trouble or breakage of head/PCB may occur.
Properly and carefully connect the FPC cable of the slider PCB from the HDC PCB according
to the connector number. Failure to do so may cause a breakage of the PCB because of short-
circuit of the power supply.
Pay sufficient attention on arrangement of 2 FPC cables connecting the head relay PCB to the
head. Wrong arrangement of the FPC cables causes short-circuit of the power supply.Do not
turn off the power during firmware upgrading. Doing so may disable restarting.
Observe the following precautions in maintenance work.

Be sure to fully understand precautions given in “For safe operation” in the operation manual for the
JV5 series.
Some error conditions observed may be due to misoperation. First judge whether or not the error
condition is caused by misoperation.
Provide adequate space for the maintenance work.
When performing tests with the electrical circuit box open, be careful not to receive an electric shock
from any live part and not to drop screws or any other parts into the circuit box.
Take care to avoid insufficient insertion or skewed insertion of any connector or FPC.
In the case where it is necessary to conduct maintenance works with the power on, carefully observe
the movement of the head. (Keep any part of your body away from the moving parts.)
Shift the media (in the X-direction) and the head (in the Y-direction) using the jog keys. If it is
necessary to shift the paper and the head by hand with the power turned off, exercise care to shift them
slowly.
Do not tilt the printer with the ink cartridges filled with ink. Doing so can give rise to leakage of ink.
In principle, the following procedures should be taken in prior to the transportation and the
transportation should be conducted using exclusive packaging members.
Do not tilt the printer with the ink cartridges filled with ink. Doing so can give rise to leakage of ink.
Discharge ink from the tube in accordance with the description given under “Discharge cleaning” in
the maintenance.
1. Detach the waste ink tank.
2. Execute “BeforeMovingIt.” of the machine.
3. Fix the head with the head stopper. (As for the detail, see Setup Guide)
1- 2
Precautions in Maintenance
If the main unit is removed from the legs and placed directly on the floor, be careful of the following
points.
• Unplug the take-up unit power cord.
• Remove the ink waste tank and the fitting bracket.
(Plug the tube up with a cloth to prevent ink from spilling over.)
1-1-2. Preliminary checks

Before starting work, make sure that the following conditions are all met.
The following conditions for the power supply system are all met:
• The power supply voltage must be within the specification limits.
• The printer must be grounded properly.
• The power cable must be free from damage, broken wire, etc. Many cables must not be
connected to one outlet.
Make sure that the printer is not located under any of the following conditions:
• In a place where the printer is exposed to direct sunlight.
• On an inclined surface.
• In an environment of too high or low temperature, or too high or low humidity, or in a place
where temperature or humidity varies significantly.
• In a place where vibration occurs.
• In a place where the printer is exposed to direct air flow from an air conditioner or the like.
• Around a place where flame is used.
• In a dusty atmosphere.
• Around a place where strong electromagnetic waves are generated.
The media (sheets) to be used must conform to the specifications.
1- 3
1-2. Tools required for maintenance work

The tables below show the tools and measuring instruments required for maintenance work.
1-2-1. Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly

Name Remarks
Phillips screwdriver Type 1 For M2
Type 2 For M3 to5 (L=260 or more)
Type 3 for M3 to 5
Slotted screwdriver Long side 2.5mm for removing E-rings
Spanner (Box wrench) Width across flats: 5 mm
Width across flats: 5.5 mm
Width across flats: 7 mm
Hexagon wrench 1.5mm for M3 SSWP
2.0mm for M4 SSWP
2.5mm for M3 cap bolts (L=170)
5.0mm for M6 cap bolts
Spanner Width across flats: 5.0mm
Width across flats: 5.5mm for M3 nuts and hexagon stud
Width across flats: 7.0mm for M4 nuts
Tweezers To prevent the cable from being pulled when disconnecting the connector.
Long-nose pliers
Nippers
Soldering iron, Solder
Scale 150, 500mm
Loupe About 50x to 60x magnification
Protection glasses
Gloves To keep hands clean, and for safety.
Adhesive agent LOCKTITE242 (for locking screws)
Insulation lock L=150 or less (UL-approved product)
Nitroflon tape or acetate fabric tape As required (UL-approved product)
1-2-2. Adjustment tools

Name Code Remarks
Trimmer adjustment screwdriver For adjustment of trimmers on the power supply PCB.
Tester
Bar type tension gauge 500 g
Ink line airtight tester OPT-J0094
1.3mm Head gap check tool OPT-J0096
All Cap base positioning tool OPT-J0098
A Cap base positioning tool OPT-J0099
Media Jam/ Cutter unit height OPT-J0108
positioning tool
1- 4
Specifications of the main unit
1-3. Specifications of the main unit

Basic Specifications of the Unit
Specifications
Item Notice
JV5-130S JV5-160S
Head On demand piezoelectric head (IH47V*4 head stagger array) Solvant capable head
Printing resolution 540ÅA720ÅA1440 dpi Variable dot capable
Print mode 720 x 540dpi VD: 1440 x 1440VD
(Scan x Feed) 540 or 720 x 720dpi VD : Printing with decreasing the number of
540 x 900dpi VD : head because of memory constraint
540 or 720 x 1080dpi VD :
720 x 1440dpi VD :
1440 x 1440dpi :
Ink 6 color loading K • M • C • Y • Lc • Lm Total 16 IC chip mounted cartridgs
4color loading K • M • C • Y (Special solvant ink)
Ink supply Supplying by 2 cartridges with toggle switching
(replacement of cartrdges at printing is allowed))
Ink end is detected with the cartridge end board detection method.
Ink capacity At 6 color load- 2 crtaridges of 440cc for each color. 880cc/1color At 6-color, 1760cc for only CM
ing
At 4 color load- 4 cartridges of 440cc for each color. 1760CC/1 color
ing
Avairable media FFÅATarpaulin, Polyvinyl chloride film Print quality confirmation media is
(However, tdrying of he media must be allowed in the specified print MIMAKI genuin.
mode.)
Maximum At standard scan When left and right drawing margin is
drawing range 1365 mm 1620 mm set to the minimum, VD data is
allowed. At 1440*1440VD, printing is
conducted with 3 heads.
Media specifica- Maximum width1375 mm 1630 mm
tion Minimum width297 mm
Thickness Less than 1.0 mm
Roll O.D. Less than ø200 mm
Roll weight Less than 38 kg
(In the range that feeding error caused by bending with its own weight
when both ends of the roll are held does not occur.)
Tube I.D. 2 inches, 3 inches
Deawing face Outside (over wrap)
End of winding Taping or week pasting to the paper tube
Maximum ø250 mm or less
winding O.D.
Print margin Roll Left and Right: 15 mm (default value) Margin of left and right whose toler-
Top : 150 mm ance excluding meandering of media is
Bottom: 0 mm ± 2mm can be changed.
Leaf Left and Right : 15 mm (default value) Minimun 5mm
Top : 150 mm
Bottom : 200 mm
Distance accu- Precision ± 0.3 mm or ± 0.3% of specified distance, whichever larger Expansion and contraction of test
racy Repeatability ± 0.2 mm or ± 0.1% of specified distance, whichever larger media, photo paper or gloss paper is
excluded. Meandering just after the
setting is excluded.
Perpendicularity ± 0.5 mm/1000mm
Media skew 5 mm or less /10m
Print gap 1.5 mm~7 mm non-step user setting Any gap position settings are allowed.
(Automatic recognition of media thickness)
Media heater PRE/PRINT/AFTER (3-system independent control)
1- 5
Specifications
Item Notice
JV5-130S JV5-160S
Media cutting Cutting in the Y direction with a tool on the head Cutting tool is a consumable
Cutting accuracy (step height) less than 1.0mm
Waste ink tank FULL detection with a bottle type (4000cc) sensor
Interface Standard equip- USB2.0 *Cables are maintenance supplies.
ment
Command MRL-III
Noise At standby Less than 58dB (FAST-A, back and forth and around 1m)
Continuous Less than 65dB
Temporal Less than 70dB
Nozzle check unit Laser type (under class 1) Installed in the machine
(Class 2 as a unit)
Compatible specification VCCI Class A
FCC Class A
UL 60950
CE Marking (EMC Directive, Low Voltage Directive)
CB Report
RoHS Compliant
Power source specifications Single-phase AC200V ~ 240V ± 10% With the sleep function
Lower than 15A 50/60Hz ± 1Hz
Power consumption Lower than 3600VA Main body including heater
Excluding optional devices
Environment Operating tem- 20 °C~35 °C Ink discharge stability declines in an
perature limit environment out of the range listed in
Relative humid- 35~65%Rh (non condensing) the left.
ity
Accuracy assur- 20 °C~25 °C
ance tempera-
ture
Temperature Less than ± 10 °C/h
gradient
Dust Equivalent to office environment
Weight Main body Less than 292 kg (324kg) Less than 298 kg (333kg) Excluding exhaust fan (including
exhaust fan)
Outside dimen- (W) Less than 2860mm Less than 3120mm Including exhaust dryer fan
sion (D) Less than 850mm(1050mm) Less than 850mm(1050mm)
(H) Less than 1540mm Less than 1540mm
1- 6
CHAPTER 2 Operation Principle and Functions
Contents
2-1. Operation Principle .................................................... 2-2
2-1-1. Sequence at Power-on .............................................. 2-2

2-1-2. Origin Point Detection ............................................. 2-3
2-1-3. Set Up ...................................................................... 2-3
2-1-4. Media Detection ....................................................... 2-4
2-1-5. Sequence of Maintenance Function ......................... 2-5
2-1-6. Ink System ............................................................... 2-9
2-1-7. Nozzle Missing Detection (NCU) Function .......... 2-20
2-2. Functions ................................................................... 2-26
2-2-1. ADJUST Function ................................................. 2-26

2-2-2. TEST Function ....................................................... 2-33
2-2-3. Special Key Function ............................................. 2-48
2-2-4. PARAMETER Function ........................................ 2-49
2-3. Operation Flow ......................................................... 2-50
2-3-1. Outline ................................................................... 2-50

2-3-2. SETUP ................................................................... 2-51
2-3-3. MACHINE SET ..................................................... 2-52
2-3-4. NCU ....................................................................... 2-54
2-3-5. ADJUST ................................................................ 2-57
2-3-6. TEST ...................................................................... 2-61
2-3-7. PARAMETER ........................................................ 2-68
2- 1
2-1. Operation Principle
2-1-1. Sequence at Power-on
The following is the sequence after power-on.
No. Item Process content

1 Initial setting of CPU and H/W
2 BOOT display
3 S-RAM check R/W check of S-RAM
When an error is detected, the system is brought down with displaying
ERROR02 (MAIN RAM)
4 F-ROM check Hashing check of F-ROM
<At occurrence of hashing error>
Occurrence in boot system area:
The system is brought down with displaying ERROR01 (MAIN ROM).
Occurrence in main system area:
F/W update mode ( See Special Key Function ( p. 2- 48 ) ) starts.
5 Voltage check Voltage check
When an error is detected, the system is brought down with displaying
ERROR03.
6 FPGA configuration Configuration of PDC and HDC.
7 Device configuration decision Checking of a head and memory
8 Version information display Machine type name and main body F/W version are displayed.
At a maintenance open, revision and PDC/HDC version are also displayed.
Key input during the version information displaying starts special mode ( See
Special Key Function ( p. 2- 48 ) ).
9 Parameter check Parameter initialization at the first starting after F/W version-up.
(The flowing parameters are initialized.)
MAINTE.
INKSYSTEM
INKinfor.
INKSEQUENCE
INKTYPE
SERVO
TEST
NCU
Checksum of parameter area is executed, and in case of SUM value error, the
system is brought down with displaying ERROR04 (Flash ROM).
10 Initial operation
11 I/F Board Detection Detection of existence of I/F board and its type (USB2.0 / IEEE-1394: option).
2- 2
Operation Principle
2-1-2. Origin Point Detection
Detection of each original point of the device
<Operation sequence at original point detection>

No. Item Content Notice
1 Station original point 1. Station down (cap motor drive) If an error occurs in each
2. Station original point detection original point detection at
(detection by the lowest point sensor) maintenance open, input-
If the detection fails, the system is brought to down (ERROR47). ting of [ENTER] causes
2 Wiper original point Wiper original point detection (wiper motor drive) retry operation. Also,
If the detection fails, the system is brought to down (ERROR46) FUNCTION features can
be operated.
3 Y-original point *2 Y-original point detection (Y-motor drive) ( [FUNCTION] effective)
If the detection fails, the system is brought to down. (ERROR51)
4 Head height original 1. Moving the carriage to the head up/down position.
point *1, *2 2. Head upping (head up/down motor drive)
3. Detection of head top point (detection by the head height sensor)
4. Moving to the set height.
5 Cap 1. Returning the carriage to the Y-original point.
2. Upping the station (cap motor drive)

If the station original point detection fails, the system is brought to
down.(ERROR45)
*1 The position encoder is tested with up/down operation of the head.
If the head height original point detection fails, the system is brought to down. (ERROR53)
*2 Retry operation is not conducted even at the Maintenance Open.
2-1-3. Set Up
Machine Configuration
The following required resources are checked.
<Model determination>
No. Item Content
1 HDC connection A normal HDC substrate is determined based on configuration results of HDC 1 ~ 4.
determination When configuration of HDC 1 is not completed, a HDC error (ERROR09) is displayed and the
system is brought to down.
2 Head connection An effective head connection is determined.
determination
3 Head memory check Contents of the head unit memory are checked.
4 SDRAM check If size of SDRAM is 0, ERROR203 (SD-RAM size) is displayed and the system is brought to
down.
If required SDRAM for the device is not installed, ERROR203 is displayed again at LOCAL →
REMOTE transition after starting or at starting drawing.
Note: Normal start is executed when all results of check 1~3 above mentioned are normal, and ERROR202 (Device configura-
tion) is displayed when an error is detected.
Inputting [ENTER] during ERROR202 displaying causes execution of the following processes.
Diagnosis results Head (HDC) determined to have an error in 1 ~ 3 is displayed.

Restricted use Head (HDC) determined to have an error in 1 ~ 3 is separated and setting of device start is conducted only
with effective heads.
Control/Not control is selected on a head determined to have an error.
A head selected as “Not control” is displayed with “X” in function → MAINTENANCE → HEAD
SELECT, and it is not controlled actually.
Setting of restricted use is not stored and the machine configuration determination is always executed at
starting.
<Required RAM size>

1GB (2 SDRAM boards in the expansion slot)
2- 3
I/F Board Detection

Detection of existence of I/F board and its type (USB2.0 / IEEE-1394: option).
A type of connected I/F board can be known with the guidance function.
When I/F board is not connected, No I/F Board Error (ERROR21) is displayed. The error is displayed
again at LOCAL → REMOTE transition, and transition to the REMOTE is not executed.
2-1-4. Media Detection

Media width and media thickness are detected.
<Media detection operation sequence>

1 Media right end After moving the carriage to the media detection position, media right Up the lever to stop the
detection end is detected. (media sensor) detection.
2 Media thickness 1. Measuring distance of media non-existing part Up the lever to stop the
detection (cutter encoder detection) detection.
2. Measuring distance of media existing part
(cutter encoder detection)
3. Media thickness calculation
(media existing part - media non-existing part = media thickness)
4. Moving the carriage to the head up/down position
5. The head height is re-calculated based on the media thickness and
adjusted to the selected gap of USER TYPE automatically.
* Media thickness 0.0mm:ERROR50

Media thickness detection failure:
Input media thickness.
(ERROR is displayed after cap ON)
Set value: 0.1~1.0mm
(unit: 0.1 mm Default 0.1 mm)
(Input value is cleared by lever UP)
After inputting the media thickness, though the sequence starts
from 1, the media thickness detection is skipped.
* At cutter control error, the system is brought to down.
(ERROR49) or (ERROR59)
3 Media left end detection 1. After moving the carriage, media left end is detected. Up the lever to stop the
(media sensor) detection.
2. After measuring the distance between the left end and the right
end, media width is calculated (linear encoder)
* During carriage moving of the media width detection, the

linear encoder is tested.
If an error is detected, drawing is disabled. (ERROR8)
[ERROR8 detailed information]
DIRECTION: ± of counter of the linear encoder is wrong
COUNT: Count number of the linear encoder is error
SENSOR: Count failure
* When the media width can not be detected, ERROR50.
(Up the lever to release)
Returning the carriage to the Y-original point and cap ON.
* Distance accuracy adjusting is automatically executed in the media
detection.
4 Media length inputting When “MEDIA RESIDUAL” of the MAINTENANCE function is set
to ON and media return end detection failed, input media length.
Set value: 1 ~ 500m (unit:1m)
2- 4
Operation Principle
2-1-5. Sequence of Maintenance Function
CARRIDGE OUT
<CARRIDGE OUT operation sequence>
1 Start 1. Cap OFF
2. After moving the carriage to the maintenance position, wiper-ON
and servo motor-OFF.
2 Maintenance No action during the maintenance.
(Waiting for inputting [ENTER] of maintenance end.)
3 End Wiper-OFF and after moving the carriage, initial operation (origin
point detection)
Note : In order to avoid dehydration of nozzle surface and inside of the cap, a warning beep is made every 30 seconds.
(Only at maintenance closing)
WIPER EXCHANGE
<WIPER EXCHANGE operation sequence>
1 Start 1. Cap OFF
2 Maintenance 2 No action during the maintenance.
3 End Wiper-OFF and after moving the carriage, initial operation
(origin point detection)
Note : After finishing, wiping execution number of times of running parameter is cleared.
In order to avoid dehydration of nozzle surface and inside of the cap, a warning beep is made every 30 seconds.
NOZZLE WASH
<NOZZLE WASH operation sequence>
No. Item Operation content Notice
1 Start 1. Cap OFF
3. Pump tube is locked.
2 Maintenance No action during the wiper cleaning.
(Wiper) (Waiting for inputting [ENTER] of wiper cleaning end.)
3 Maintenance 1. Wiper OFF
(Nozzle wash) 2. The pump tube is locked and a message of “Fill the liquid.” is
displayed. (Waiting for inputting of [ENTER] ).
3. Input “being left time”. (Waiting for inputting [ENTER] )
Set value: 1 ~ 99 min (time unit: 1 min)
4. After moving the carriage and initial operation (original point
detection), no action for designated time.
4 Maintenance (End) 1. Execution of cleaning.
2. End
2- 5
DISWAY WASH
Cleaning of ink discharge path. Operation sequence is as the following.
<DISWAY WASH cleaning operation sequence>
1 Start 1. Cap OFF
2. Moving the carriage to the maintenance position, wiper ON, servo
motor OFF.
2 Maintenance The following operations are repeated until [ENTER] is input.
(Nozzle wash) 1. Pump tube lock
2. 10 seconds No action
3. 5 seconds dry suction
3 End 1. 30 seconds dry suction
2. Execution of initial operation (original position detection)
CUSTODY WASH
“NOZZLE WASH” and “DISWAY WASH” above mentioned are executed in series.
PUMP TUBE WASH

Cleaning of ink suction pump. Cleaning ink cap, ink discharge path and inside of tube of ink suction
pump with driving the cleaning fluid suction pump.
When cleaning fluid is not filled, or warning arises in cleaning fluid tank or waste ink tank, the
cleaning is not executed.
<PUMP TUBE WASH operation sequence>
1 Start Cap OFF.
2 Cleaning Drive cleaning fluid suction pump and ink suction pump for 10
seconds
3 End Cap ON to end.
WIPER WASH
Cleaning of the wiper.
When cleaning fluid is not filled, or warning arises in cleaning fluid tank, the cleaning is not executed.
<WIPER WASH operation sequence>
1 Start Placing the wiper in a wiper box (wiper sensor monitoring)
2 Wiper cleaning Open the wiper cleaning valve to drop cleaning fluid on the wiper.
(valve open time is not decided)
3 Maintenance 1. Cap OFF.
3. No operation at wiper cleaning.
4 End After wiper OFF and carriage moving, initial operation (original
position detection).
2- 6
Operation Principle
CR.MAINTENANCE
Execution of carriage maintenance (cleaning in the vicinity of head)
<CR.MAINTENANCE operation sequence>

1 Start 1. Cap OFF
2. Move he carriage to the maintenance position in the left end, servo
motor OFF.
2 Maintenance No action during the maintenance.
3 End Move the carriage, and execute initial operation
(original position detection)
HD.MAINTENANCE
The following maintenance items of head are executed.
FILL UP INK
Select a head to fill ink
<FILL UP INK operation sequence>
1 Start Select a head to be filled
Set value: 1234, 12––, ––34
Filling is not executed when a warning arises in waste ink tank.
2 Filling Open cartridge valve and drive ink suction motor. Use a cartridge having
The operation is stopped when a warning is detected in ink smaller residual ink
cartridge during the filling. quantity.
3 End Stop the pump motor.
2- 7
DISCHARGE&WASH
Ink in head, damper and tube is discharged to execute cleaning.
<DISCHARGE&WASH operation sequence>
1 Preparation Selection of a head to be discharged and cleaned.
2 Ink discharging 1. Taking out cartridges (all slots) (Cartridge sensor monitoring) Cartridge valve is closed.
2. Discharging ink (Ink suction motor driving)
If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not
executed. (waste ink tank sensor monitoring)
3 Cleaning 1. Inserting cleaning fluid cartridges (all slots)
(Cartridge sensor monitoring*1)
2. Cleaning inside of tube.
(Opening cartridge valve, ink suction motor driving)
executed. (waste tank sensor monitoring)
3. Head vibrating operation (Y-motor) is executed.
4 Discharging of cleaning 1. Taking out cleaning cartridges (all slots). Cartridge valve is closed.
fluid (Cartridge sensor monitoring)
2. Discharging cleaning fluid (ink suction pump motor driving)
executed. (waste tank sensor monitoring)
5 Repeating 3~4 are executed again.
6 Operation selection [ ] WASH : No.3 → 4 are executed again
[] COMPLETED : (to next No.)
7 Confirmation of [] No : to No.9 (End)
maintenance cleaning [ ] Yes : (to next No.)
fluid discharge
8 Maintenance cleaning See the next item, “Maintenance cleaning fluid fill/discharge
fluid discharge operation sequence“
9 End (When cleaning is executed, the state is Not-filling at discharging
ink.)
*1 As an IC chip is not placed in a filling liquid cartridge, it is recognized that IC chip read error means normal.
Maintenance cleaning fluid fill/discharge

Dedicated cleaning fluid for WIPER WASH and PUMP TUBE WASH is filled.
<Cleaning fluid filling operation sequence>
1 Start Cleaning fluid suction (ink suction motor, cleaning fluid suction
motor driving)
If a warning arises in the cleaning fluid cartridge, filling is not
executed. (cleaning fluid cartridge sensor monitoring)
If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, filling is not executed.
(waste tank sensor monitoring)
2 Filling 1. Pump stop.
2. Cleaning fluid suction pump blocked
3. Cartridge valve open
(until cleaning fluid is filled in the wiper cleaning valve)
Note: At discharging
1. Remove a cartridge
2. Drive the ink/cleaning fluid discharge suction pump to discharge.
At filling
1. Set a cartridge
2. Drive the ink/cleaning fluid suction pump to fill.
2- 8
Operation Principle
2-1-6. Ink System
Ink Supply Control

Ink filling method of JV5 is a suction system with roller pump, a pressure damper with a self sealing
valve is used. Ink supply at drawing is a siphon supply. The sealing valve is opened by discharging
pressure reduction to supply ink, and when the damper ink chamber is filled, the sealing valve is
closed. The ink path pressure at carriage moving conveyed to the meniscus of head is eased by the
sealing valve.
Longer consecutive drawing time than conventional products and replacement of cartridges during the
drawing are allowed by toggle switching of 2 cartridges for 1 supply path.
During the ink end cartridge replacement, in order to avoid dehydration of ink supply system, a
WARNING is displayed if a cartridge is not placed for more than 10 minutes.
A supply valve is placed for each cartridge to supply ink at the supply valve OPEN. The supply valve
is usually in CLOSE state, and when ink supply is necessary, the supply valve turns to OPEN state. Ink
supply is conducted at discharging operation (drawing and flashing) and suction operation (cleaning
and filling). The supply valve is not opened for a cartridge having an error not to supply ink.
2 types of LED (Green: control LED / Red: Error LED) are placed for each cartridge to allow a user to
check a state of cartridge in visual.
JV5 switches the supply valve at occurrence of “INK NEAR END” or “INK END” in the cleaning to
use a cartridge having smaller residual quantity. As for details,
see “ Ink wear-up cleaning ” P. 2- 17 )
( .
Device configuration
The device configuration of ink supply path is shown below.
Fig.2-1 Ink Supply Path Diagrammic Illustration
2- 9
Flow of the ink supply control

The ink supply control flow can be divided as the followings.
1. Error check of the cartridge.
2. Selection/determination of a supply cartridge (depends on a state of the cartridge).
3. Updating of each LED (depends on a state of the supply/error cartridge).
4. Supply valve open/close operation of the cartridge selected in “2” with a valve operation instruction.
Error check of a cartridge

The error check of a cartridge is executed periodically (every 30 ms) to select a supply cartridge
according to an error state and ink residual quantity.
The supply cartridge notifies being under control with lighting the control LED (Green).
The error cartridge lights/blink the error LED (Red) to urge replacement of cartridges.
A valve of the cartridge indicated by lighting of the control LED is opened with a valve-open
instruction.
When an error occurs in a supply cartridge while the valve is opened (at drawing or at cleaning), if
there is a cartridge which can supply ink, the valve is switched to continue the operation, if a supply
cartridge is removed, drawing is aborted and cleaning is terminated to return to the local state.
Selection/determination of a supply cartridge

As ink is supplied by toggle switching of 2 cartridges for 1 supply path in JV5, a supply cartridge
should be selected. The followings are selection conditions of a supply cartridge.
a) When there is a cartridge having an error in 1 supply path.

• If another cartridge can supply, the cartridge is selected.
• The selection conditions depend on occurrence of an error, contents of the error and ink supply
timing. The ink supply is executed at discharging operation (drawing, flushing and so on) or at
suction operation (cleaning and filling).
The followings are cartridge selection conditions. As for errors, see “ Ink system error monitoring” ( P. 2-
15 ) .
<Cartridge selection conditions>
Error content Discharging Suction
operation operation
Normal cartridge
Cartridge near end ∆
Cartridge ink end × ∆
Residual quantity 0 cartridge × ×
No cartridge × ×
InK IC * × ×
Note : Supply is effective.
∆: Supply is effective when another cartridge is normal.
×: Supply is not effective
* Ink IC: NON-ORIGINAL INK, WRONG INK IC, Kind of INK, Color of INK, WRONG CARTRIDGE,
Expiration:2MONTH
2- 10
Operation Principle
b) When there are plural of effective cartridges in 1 supply path.
Priority Content
1 A cartridge having smaller ink residual quantity.
2 When “1” is the same, a cartridge having closer expiration date.
3 When both “1” and “2” are the same, a cartridge having smaller slot number.
Occurrence timing of supply cartridge switching

At power-on
When an error occurs in the currently selected cartridge.
When a cartridge superior to the currently selected cartridge is inserted.
(Switching is not executed at drawing or cleaning. It is executed when returned to the local state.)
Based on a) and b), effectiveness of ink supply in variety of cartridge states is shown in the table
below.
<Ink supply effectiveness>
Cartridge 2 Normal Cartridge Cartridge ink Residual No cartridge Ink IC
Cartridge 1 cartridge near end end quantity 0
cartridge
Normal cartridge
Cartridge near end ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
Cartridge ink end ∆ × × × ×
Residual quantity 0 cartridge ∆ × × × ×
No cartridge ∆ × × × ×
Ink IC ∆ × × × ×
Note : Discharge is allowed and suction is allowed.
∆: Discharge is allowed and suction is not allowed (Near end error).
×: Discharge is not allowed and suction is not allowed (Ink end error). As for details, see “ Ink system error
monitoring” ( P. 2- 15 ).
The table below shows the switching timing of supply cartridges.

<Conditions for supply cartridge switching timing> Active side: Cartridge which is selected now
Non-active Normal Cartridge Cartridge ink Residual No cartridge Ink IC
Active cartridge near end end quantity 0
cartridge
Normal cartridge ∆ – – – –
Cartridge near end – ∆ – – – –
Cartridge ink end – – – –
Residual quantity 0 cartridge – – – –
No cartridge – – – –
Ink IC – – – –
Note : Switch
∆: Switch according to the condition of priority.
–: Not switched
During the cleaning an operation may not follow the conditions above. As for details, see “ Ink wear-up
cleaning” ( P. 2- 17 ).
2- 11
Cartridge LED
Lighting/blinking of 2 types of LED informs cartridge states to show the timing of replacement.
When the Control LED (Green) lights : At supplying
When the Error LED (Red) lights/blinks : Occurrence of an error
Lighting/blinking conditions for each LED are shown in the table below.
<Conditions for lighting/blinking of LED>
LED State
Control LED Not Supply cartridge is not selected
(Green) light
Blinking –
Light At selecting a supply cartridge
At ink wear-up cleaning (See “ Ink wear-up cleaning” ( P. 2- 17 ))
Error LED (Red) Not At normal state
light
Blinking Occurrence of an error (Blinks at occurrence of the following errors).
Cartridge near end
Cartridge ink end
1 months passed after ink expiration date
Light Occurrence of an error (Lights at occurrence of the following errors)
Residual quantity 0 cartridge
No cartridge
Ink IC*
Expiration:2MONTH
Examples of cartridge switching and LED operation patterns are shown in the table below.
<LED operation pattern>
Cartridge 1 Cartridge 2
Event Valve operation Control Error LED Control Error LED
LED LED
Online drawing start Cartridge 1 valve open Light – – –
No problem on both cartridge
Cartridge 1 Not changed Light Blink – –
Cartridge near end occurs
Cartridge 1 Switched to cartridge 2 – Blink Light –
Cartridge ink end occurs
Cartridge 2 Not changed – Blink Light Blink
Cartridge near end occurs
Cartridge 1 Not changed – Light Light Blink
Take out to replace
Cartridge 1 Not changed – – Light Blink
Set a normal cartridge
Cartridge 2 Switched to cartridge 1 Light – – Blink
Cartridge ink end occurs
Online drawing end Close all supply valves Light – – Blink
2- 12
Operation Principle
Open/close instruction for supply valve

Generally, a supply valve is in the CLOSE state, and OPEN is instructed when ink supply is necessary.
Timing of open/close instruction is shown in the table below.
<Supply valve operation instruction timing>
Supply valve operation
Timing instruction
OPEN CLOSE
Flushing Before execution –
After execution –
Cleaning/filling Before execution –
After execution –
Wash Before execution –
After execution –
Before drawing operation –
Before Capping –
Replacement of supply cartridges during ink supplying
At occurrence of an system error –
At power-off –
Note : Operation instruction
2- 13
Cartridge Control
2 ink cartridges are used per 1 supply system (1 nozzle row), total 16 cartridges can be loaded.
Supply cartridge is always 1 per 1 supply system, and a cartridge having smaller residual quantity is used
first with toggle switching. LED (Green, Red) of each slot indicates cartridge states shown below.
<Cartridge states indicated by LED>

Green LED Light Supply cartridge
Red LED Blink INK END, INK NEAR END, Expiration:1MONTH
Light Ink IC warning*1, Residual quantity 0 cartridge*2, No cartridge
*1 Ink IC warning: Errors related PIC such as NON-ORIGINAL INK, WRONG INK IC, Kind of INK, Color of
INK, WRONG CARTRIDGE and Expiration:2MONTH.
*2 Residual quantity 0 cartridge: A cartridge having no residual quantity after execution of the ink wear-up cleaning (a
function to conduct cleaning with preferentially using a cartridge having NEAR END or
INK END error).
Switching of supply cartridges occurs under the conditions shown below.

“INK END” during the drawing
“INK NEAR END” during the filling
Ink IC warning
When a cartridge is taken off.
Ink wear up cleaning
If switching in 1 supply system is impossible, a warning occurs in currently used supply cartridge is
displayed. The followings are relations between warnings and operations.
Local/Remote idle warning Guidance function warning
display display in detail Cleaning Filling Drawing
(state of supply system unit) (state of cartridge unit)
NEAR END INK NEAR END × × *1
INK END
NO CARTRIDGE
NON-ORIGINAL INK
WRONG INK IC
INK END
!CAR Kind of INK
× × ×
Color of INK
WRONG CARTRIDGE
Expiration:2MONTH
Expiration:1MONTH *2
Expiration
*1 Transition to the LOCAL mode is executed after each completion of drawing.

*2 In case of a month next to the ink expiration month, transition to the LOCAL mode is executed after each completion of
drawing.
2- 14
Operation Principle
Ink system error monitoring

Operation at occurrence of an ink system error
Error check on ink system/cartridge is executed periodically (every 30 ms), and operation is restricted
according to the error state.
Error contents/operation restrictions are shown in the table below.
<Ink system error>
P
r Executions at error
i
o
r Ink system error CL/ Head Pump Error contents
Filling Drawing cleaning cleaning
i
t
y
Waste ink tank × × × × No waste ink tank or the waste ink tank is full.
Initial filling is not Initial filling is not executed.
executed × × × ×
H Ink end error × × Errors occurred in both cartridges and drawing &
suction operation can not be executed.
Errors occurred in both cartridges and drawing &
suction operation can not be executed.
Ink near end error × Returns to the local state at each completion of 1 file
drawing.
Waste ink tank is almost full.
A waste ink tank is
FULL soon now. × × × Returns to the local state at each completion of 1 file
drawing.
No cartridge Cartridge is not installed.
An error related to the cartridge IC occurs.
Ink IC *
Ink supply is disabled.
Residual quantity 0 Ink in the cartridge is used up.
cartridge Ink supply is disabled.
Quantity of ink in the cartridge reached to the
Cartridge ink end predetermined amount.
Ink supply is disabled (CL can be used).
The near end sensor detection board detects the state
Cartridge near end close to ink end.
Can be used for ink supplying at drawing or CL.
1 months passed after ink 1 months passed after ink expiration date.
expiration date
Announcement of nozzle Urging execution of nozzle cleaning.
cleaning execution
Wiper replacement The number of usage times of a wiper exceeds the
predetermined replacement number.
WashLiquidCart.NONE × Cleaning fluid cartridge is not installed.
L Cleaning fluid cartridge × Troubles on the ink cleaning fluid cartridge.
Wash Liquid END × The cleaning fluid cartridge is empty.
Ink expiration of Ink expiration of limitation period.
limitation period.
Expiration:2MONTH
2- 15
Ink residual quantity control

Residual quantity of cartridge ink is calculated by subtracting ink consumption quantity obtained by
calculation of number of ink shot times of drawing and flashing and ink suction amount by cleaning and
filling from the ink residual quantity.
When ink residual quantity is updated, writing to the ink IC chip is executed.
A cartridge error is issued according to the residual quantity.
Calculation of ink consumption quantity

The followings are calculation of ink consumption quantity at drawing, cleaning etc.
a) At drawing and flashing (ink discharging)
Ink consumption quantity at ink discharging is calculated with counting the number of ink shot
times.
In JV5, as each dot size is counted at unit of each nozzle array, Small, Middle, Large, smaller error
between actual measured value and calculated value can be expected.
b) At cleaning and filling (ink suction)

Ink consumption quantity at each operation is shown in the table below.
<Ink consumption quantity at ink suction>
Type Ink consumption quantity in 1
supply path [cc]
Soft cleaning 0.4
Normal cleaning 1.1
High power cleaning 8.3
Maintenance filling 33.7
Initial filling Main suction 69.2
Cobble filling 15.7
Initial filling Main suction 69.2
(At replacement) Cobble filling 15.7
Updating of ink residual quantity

The ink residual quantity is updated at the following timings, and written in the ink IC chip.
<Ink residual quantity updating timing>
Updating timing Conditions
At pre-capping operation When ink is consumed by drawing or flashing.
Mainly at capping after completion of drawing.
At completion of cleaning and filling operation Ink is consumed by cleaning and filling.
Cartridge residual quantity at using main suction is updated.
When the following events occur at drawing and cleaning or Ink consumption quantity until just before the events shown in the
filling. left is updated.
Cover OPEN
Lever UP
Media end
When the following errors occur at drawing. Updated just after occurrence of the error not waiting for writing
Cartridge near end at the capping pre-operation.
Cartridge ink end Update before replacing of cartridge during the drawing.
Cartridge error
2- 16
Operation Principle
Errors related to ink residual quantity

Errors related to ink residual quantity are shown in the table below.
<Errors related to ink residual quantity>
Item Content
Cartridge near end Error arising timing:Residual quantity detection by the near end detection board.
Set value of each cartridge is as the followings.
220 cc cartridge: 20 cc
440 cc cartridge: 40 cc
Restrictions after arising of an error:
Initial filling is not allowed (drawing and cleaning is allowed).
Cartridge ink end Error arising timing:Arising at consumption of predetermined quantity after the near end
detection.
Restrictions after arising of an error:Drawing and initial filling are not allowed (cleaning is
allowed).
Residual quantity 0 cartridge Error arising timing:Arising at residual quantity 0 after arising of ink end.
This error may arise only after cleaning by the ink wear-up cleaning.
Drawing, initial filling and cleaning are not allowed.
Cartridge error Error arising timing:Arises when the ink end does not arise even if ink consumption quantity
exceeds about double of ink cartridge capacity*.
Drawing, initial filling and cleaning are not allowed.
* Arises at 220cc cartridge: 400cc, 440cc cartridge: 800cc.
Ink wear-up cleaning

The purpose of this cleaning is subduing ink consumption of a normal cartridge by using residual ink
of a cartridge having “Cartridge near end” error or “Cartridge ink end” error by priority.
When one cartridge is normal at starting of cleaning, residual ink side is sucked and after suction,
switched to the normal cartridge to continue cleaning.
When residual ink is used up (soft counter), “Residual quantity 0 cartridge” error is arisen to disable
the cartridge.
Ink wear-up cleaning control is only effective in the normal cleaning, and it can not be executed at
other cleanings or at initial filling.
2- 17
Ink Suction and Discharge Control

Outline of control
Suction and discharge of ink is driven by roller pumps (ink suction pump), 1 pump is allocated to
every 2 heads.
Suction and discharge are executed at each pump (at each head is impossible because of the
configuration).
2 sensors in the waste ink tank prevent ink troubles caused by an installation miss, ink over flowing
and so on.
At sensor detection, operations conducting ink discharging such as drawing, cleaning, filling and so
on, are restricted.
In order to avoid clotting of ink in an waste ink path tube from inside of a cap to the waste ink tank,
automatic cleaning mechanism (pump tube cleaning) is equipped.
An exclusive pump sucks cleaning fluid from installed cleaning fluid tank to clean inside of the tube
(Executed at Standby in Power ON or Sleep in Power OFF.)
In order to avoid clotting of ink adhered on a wiper, a wiper cleaning mechanism is equipped.
Cleaning fluid is supplied on the wiper at a solenoid for wiper cleaning OPEN.
Device configuration
The device configuration of ink suction and discharge is shown in a diagrammic illustration below.
2 ink suction pumps

2 cleaning fluid suction
1 cleaning fluid cartridge

Head 1 Head 2 Head 3 Head 4 Cartridge PIC
Cartridge sensor
Cap 1 Cap 2 Cap 3 Cap 4 Ink near end sensor
1 supply valve
Solenoid for wiper cleaning
c C
a
c r l
c F F e
l l l t a
e l e o r
a o a i n
n w n w d i
i g n
i n o g
n o e
g f g f
f
l
u
i
Cleaning Cleaning d
Ink suction fluid fluid Ink suction

pump 1 suction suction pump 2
pump 1 pump 2 Supply valve
Solenoid for
Flow of Flow of wiper cleaning
ink ink
To waste ink tank To waste ink tank
Fig.2-2 Diagrammic illustration of Ink Suction and Discharge Path
2- 18
Operation Principle
Initial Filling
At device starting, when ink is not filled, initial filling id conducted. Operation sequence is as the
following.
<Initial filling operation sequence>

No. Item Content
1 Selection of ink type A set value is selected among values shown below.
Set value: ES3 Sol, HS Sol
2 Selection of number of A set value is selected among values shown below.
colors Set value: 4-Color (MCYKKYCM), 6-Color (MCcKYCMm)
3 Filling of filler liquid Insert a filler liquid cartridge in a slot to be sucked
(As 8 filler liquid cartridges are initially attached, use those cartridges with swapping in order of
odd number slots → even number slots.)
1. Suction to a coupler (odd number slots):

Insert filler liquid cartridges into odd number slots (x8) and suck the liquid to the coupler.
Sucking the liquid to the damper (head) (even number slots):
Taking out filler liquid cartridges in odd number slots and insert them into even number slots
(x8), suck the liquid to the damper (head).
If there is an occurrence of warning* in a filler liquid cartridge, suction is not conducted.

If there is an occurrence of warning in waste ink tank, suction is not conducted.
If a warning related to waste ink tank is detected during sucking, sucking is stopped and the
filler liquid sucked again.
4 Cleaning fluid filling Inserting ink cartridges into all slots and ink filling is conducted.
1. Filling to the coupler

In case of cartridges in the same supply system, valves are opened in order of 2 → 1, ink is
filled to the coupler.
2. Filling to the damper (head).
If a warning occurs in the ink cartridge, filling is not conducted.

If a warning occurs in the waste ink tank, filling is not conducted.
If a warning related to the cartridge occurs during filling to the coupler, filling is stopped and
ink filling is executed again.
If a cartridge warning occurs during filling to the damper (head), filling is continued with
replacing cartridges.
Filling is stopped when ink supply fails in one supply system.
If a warning related to the waste ink tank is detected during the filling, sucking is stopped and
ink filling is started again.
5 Cleaning fluid filling Filling of exclusive cleaning fluid for wiper cleaning, pump tube cleaning.
Insertion of the cleaning fluid cartridge into a slot is confirmed and filling is conducted.
If a warning occurs in the cleaning fluid cartridge, filling is not conducted.
If a warning occurs in the waste ink tank, filling is not conduct.
* As an IC chip is not placed in a filling liquid cartridge, it is recognized that IC chip read error means normal.
2- 19
2-1-7. Nozzle Missing Detection (NCU) Function
This is a function to detect nozzle missing during drawing or after cleaning using the nozzle check unit.
Selection of conduct/not conduct the nozzle missing detection is set with “NOZZLE CHECK” of
NCU function.
When nozzle missing is detected, a check pattern having predetermined nozzle interval is discharged
to the nozzle check unit to check nozzle missing.
When the number of missing nozzles exceeds the set standard value (Set in “NG JUDGEMENT” of
the NCU Function (p.2-23)), a result of the nozzle check is NG, and a recovering operation selected in
“NG ACTION” of the NCU function is executed.
Operation flows at the nozzle detection are shown in p.2- 21 and p.2- 22.
As for details of each setting related to the nozzle missing detection function, refer to the
“NCU Function” ( p.2-23).
2- 20
Operation Principle
Nozzle missing
detection
No Nozzle check
effective?
END Yes
Missing
nozzle qty. in 1 supply Yes
system is more than the
judging value
?
No
Missing
nozzle qty. in all supply Yes
judging value
?
No
No
NG ACTION
END (DURING THE DRAW)
=CONTINUE?
Yes
NG ACTION No
1 (DURING THE DRAW)
=STOP?
Yes
Cleaning
Drawing stop
NG
ACTION
END (DURING THE DRAW) = Yes
CLEANING&CONT.
?
No
Nozzle check
Cleaning success? Yes
No Missing nozzle qty.

clear
Yes Cleaning retry?
No 1
Drawing stop
END
Fig.2-3 Operation at Nozzle Missing Detection 1/2
2- 21
Missing
nozzle qty. in 1 supply Yes
judging value
?
No
Missing
nozzle qty. in all supply Yes
judging value
?
No
NG ACTION No
END (AFTERtheDRAWend)
=CONTINUE?
Yes
NG ACTION No
(AFTERtheDRAWend)
=STOP?
Drawing continue Yes
Cleaning
Drawing stop
END
NG
ACTION Yes
END (AFTERtheDRAWend) =
CLEANING&CONT.
?
No
Nozzle check
Cleaning success? Yes
No Missing nozzle qty.

clear
Yes Cleaning retry?

Drawing
No continue
Drawing stop
END
END
Fig.2-4 Operation at Nozzle Missing Detection 2/2
2- 22
Operation Principle
NCU Function
Details of the nozzle missing detection function (nozzle check unit) are set.
<NCU function setting items>

Item Content
NOZZLE CHECK Setting ON/OFF of nozzle missing detection.
Set value: ON, OFF (Default: ON)
NG DURING Setting of operations when nozzle missing NG is determined during the drawing.
ACTION THE DRAW Set value
CONTINUE: The drawing is continued (Default)
CLEANING&CONT: The drawing is restarted after the cleaning.
CLEANING&STOP: Nozzle recovery by cleaning is executed If failed, the drawing is not re-
started
STOP: Drawing is stopped
Pressing [FUNCTION] at item selection in CLEANING&CONT, CLEANING&STOP, the Detail
Setting of Cleaning operation starts.
CLEANING TYPE:Set a type of cleaning (CLEANING&CONT, CLEANING&STOP)
Set value: NORMAL, SOFT, HARD (Default: NORMAL)
RETRY COUNT*:No. of cleaning re-try is set (CLEANING&STOP)
Set value: 0 ~ 3 (Default: 3)
AFTER the Setting of an operation after completion of 1 file drawing at the Nozzle missing NG determination.
DRAW end Set value
CONTINUE: The drawing is continued (Default)
CLEANING&CONT: The drawing is restarted after the cleaning.
CLEANING&STOP: Nozzle recovery by cleaning is executed If failed, the drawing is not re-
started
STOP: Drawing is stopped
Pressing [FUNCTION] at item selection in CLEANING&CONT, CLEANING&STOP, the Detail
Setting of Cleaning operation starts.
CLEANING TYPE:Set a type of cleaning (CLEANING&CONT, CLEANING&STOP)
Set value: NORMAL, SOFT, HARD (Default: NORMAL)
RETRY COUNT*:No. of cleaning re-try is set (CLEANING&STOP)
NG JUDGEMENT Setting No. of missing nozzles to cause nozzle check NG.
Setting contents are stored in the function parameter.
CLOGG NZL/color:Standard of No. of missing nozzles per 1 nozzle raw is set.
CLOGG NZL/ALL:Standard of No. of total missing nozzles is set.
COND. INDICATION operation state of NCU is displayed. (at operation / at being separated)
Pressing [FUNCTION] at operation state displaying, an NCU related error presently occurs is
displayed.
If plural of errors are occurring, the display can be switched with [ ]/[].
Errors related to NCU ERROR116: NCU I/F error
ERROR160: NCU DETECT error
ERROR161: NCU current consumption on creases
ERROR162: NCU current consumption abnormal
ERROR163: NCU SENSOR error
ERROR164: NCU FPGA error
* When the RETRY COUNT is set to 3, (if the nozzle can not be recovered) max. 4 times f cleaning are executed.
2- 23
TEST
The following items are tested. They can be selected only at the maintenance open except for NCU
detection test.
<Test Items>
Item Content
NOZZLE CHK TEST Operation contents Testing whether the nozzle missing detection is normally executed.
(NCU detection test) Flushing of NCU test pattern is executed, confirm that detection detail information
of the nozzle check unit agrees with the pattern.
There are 4 NCU test patterns as listed below. It is tested that both of “missing“
and “not missing“ can be detected on discharging of each nozzle.
• For the odd number nozzle discharge (odd number nozzle missing)
• For the even number nozzle discharge (even number nozzle missing)
• For consecution odd number nozzle discharge > even number nozzle discharge
• Noemal discharge (no missing)
At error Error (ERROR160 DETECT) is displayed.

SDRAM CHECK Operation contents Write/Read check of NCU SDRAM is executed.
At error If data is not agreed, the check is aborted and SDRAM address and Write/Read data
at occurrence of the error are displayed.
F-ROM CHECK Operation contents Hash check of NCU F-ROM is executed.
In the check, It is confirmed that SUM value of long ward size from address 0 of F-
ROM is a normal value, that is counted as 1, and this process is repeated to [END]
input.
At error Check process is aborted and an error is displayed. (When SUM value is not
00007000H)
LDconsu.ELcurr. Operation contents Check whether power current consumption of LD overs the threshold.
At error Over the threshold: Error (ERROR161 NCU CONSUMPTION) is displayed.
Near then threshold: Warning (ERROR161 NCU EXCHANGE.) is displayed
LINE VOLTAGE Operation contents Power source voltage of NCU (5V) is checked.
At error Error (ERROR162 NCU LINE VOLTAGE) is displayed.
LD&SensorTEST Operation contents Sensor test of NCU is executed.
At error At error detection : Error (ERROR163 NCU SENSOR DETECT)
At error detection level down : Warning (ERROR163 NCU SENSOR )
SERIAL CHECK Operation contents Serial communication with NCU test is executed.
At error Error(ERROR116 NCU I/F 01H) is displayed
LASER TEMP.CHK Operation contents Temperature read from the thermistor at laser emission part of NCU is displayed.
(A/D value is also displayed)
At error
* As it is assumed that tests are executed in a state that there is no nozzle missing, it is required that no nozzle missing is con-
firmed by drawing a nozzle check pattern beforehand.
2- 24
Operation Principle
NCU LD RESET
Initialising LD current consumption value.

Current value increases gradually according to the operation of NCU. Initial value of the current value is
stored in the device and when the value exceeds the predetermined value, the error (ERROR161) to urge
the user to replace the LD sensor unit with a new one is displayed.
If LD current consumption value exceeds 109% of the initial value:
ERROR161 NCU EXCHANGE
NCU can be used
If LD current consumption value exceeds 110% of the initial value:
ERROR161 NCU CONSUMPTION
NCU can not be used
This function is effective only at the MAINTENANCE OPEN, and required to be exe-
cuted at replacement of LD sensor units.
The4 NCULD reset should be executed in the local idling state (a state that initial oper-
ation has been completed and capped).
At normal end (reset complete) : “ RESET COMPLETION ”
At error (reset failure) : “ !! RESET FAILURE !! ”
(Make sure that the machine is in the local idling state, and then execute the reset
again.)
2- 25
2-2. Functions
2-2-1. ADJUST Function

#ADJUST function comprises the following items executed at factory shipping or maintenance
operation.
<Adjust functions>
Item Content Reference
page
HEAD ADJUST Slant adjust, Stagger adjust, Dot position adjust, impact confirmation. P.3-20
HEAD WASH Cleaning of head, damper, tube P.2-27
MANUALhead WASH Manual cleaning of head, damper and tube at head replacement and so on. P.2-28
DEFAULT SET Initialization of the selection parameter P.2-28
CAPPING Capping, wiping position adjustment P.3-14
BasisHEADheight Head standard height (manual) adjustment P.3-12
HEAD ID Head ID inputting P.2-29
MOTOR CURRENT Adjusting power current of X-motor, Y-motor P.2-29
SERIAL No Confirmation and input of device serial No. P.2-30
DEALER No Confirmation and input to device dealer No. P.2-30
EDGE ADJUST Adjusting margin in both sides of paper P.2-30
MEDIA ENCODER Decentering compensation of media encoder P.2-31
MEDIA COMP.2 Media basic feed amount compensation P.2-31
EXCHANGE PARTS Display and input of parts, units replacement history P.2-32
2- 26
Functions
HEAD WASH
Cleaning head, damper and tube.
As it is non- filling state after the completion of cleaning, the Initial Filling ( p. 2- 19 ) or filling of
corresponding head is required.
<Head wash operation sequence>

1 Preparation Selection of a head to be discharged and cleaned.
2 Discharging of ink Taking out cartridges (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring)
1.
2.Discharging ink (Ink suction motor driving)

If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not executed.
(waste ink tank sensor monitoring)
3 Cleaning 1.Inserting cleaning fluid cartridges (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring*1)
2.Cleaning inside of tube (Opening cartridge valve, ink suction motor driving)
3.Head vibrating operation (Y-motor) is executed
4 Discharging of 1.Taking out cleaning cartridges (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring)
cleaning fluid 2.Discharging cleaning fluid (ink suction pump motor driving)
5 Repeating 3 ~ 4 are executed again.
6 Wiper Cleaning 1.Cap OFF
2.Wiper ON (after moving the carriage to the maintenance position)
Waiting for wiper cleaning end
( [ENTER] pressing to start the following No.)
7 Operation Press one of a key below to select an operation.
selection [] : Transit to No. 10 (END)
[] : Transit to No. 8 (CONTINUE)
[ ] : Transit to No. 3 (WASH)
8 Filling of shipping Insert shipping fluid cartridge (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring)
1.
fluid 2.Fill head, damper and tube with shipping fluid

(Cartridge valve OPEN, Ink suction pump motor driving).
9 Discharging of 1.Taking out of shipping fluid cartridges (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring)
shipping fluid 2.Discharge shipping fluid (with leaving appropriate amount)
(Cartridge valve OPEN, Ink suction pump motor driving)
selection [] : End of head cleaning (END)
[] : Transit to No. 11 (Yes)
11 Maintenance 1.Taking out the maintenance cleaning fluid cartridge
cleaning fluid (maintenance cleaning fluid slot)
discharge 2.Discharging maintenance cleaning fluid
(driving ink suction, cleaning fluid suction motor)
*If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not executed.
selection [] : End of head cleaning (END)
[] : Transit to No. 13 (CONTINUE)
13 Shipping fluid 1.Inserting shipping fluid cartridge. (maintenance cleaning fluid slot)
suction and 2.Shipping fluid suction (driving ink suction, cleaning fluid suction motor)
discharge 3.Taking out of shipping fluid cartridges. (maintenance cleaning fluid slot)
4.Discharging shipping fluid (driving ink suction, cleaning fluid suction motor)
*When a warning on the ink waste tank arises, do not execute suction and discharge.
*1 As an IC chip is not placed in a filling liquid cartridge, it is recognized that IC chip read error means normal
2- 27
MANUALhead WASH
At head cleaning with a syringe (after head replacement and so on), cap off to execute dry suction.
<Manual head cleaning operation sequence>
1 Preparation Select a head to be sucked.
Set value: 1234, 12––, ––34
2 Suction 1.Cap OFF
2.Dry suction (pressing [ENTER] to drive corresponding motor)
If a warning on waste ink tank arises, filling is not conducted.
(Waste tank sensor monitoring)
3 End Press [ENTER] to stop pump motor and return to 1.
DEFAULT SET
Setting initial value to a selected parameter.
<Default set>
No. Selection Item Operation content Notice
1 SETUP PARAMETER Initialization of user operation setting value
1. Always selectable
Set user No. to 1
2.
Initialization of language to be used

3.
Initialization of User dot position compensation value

4.
Set to maintenance close

5.
2 MAINTE. PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question

3 CUSTOM. PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question
4 RUNNING PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question
5 EXCHANGE PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question
6 INKSYSTEMparam. Initializing the parameter in question
7 INKinfor.PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question Quasi-disclosure
8 INKinfor.PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question parameter (Selectable
only at releasing)
9 INKSEQUENCEpara Initializing the parameter in question
10 HEADunit PARAM. Unit selection: UNIT-1~4, ALL
11 SERVO PARAMETER Initializing the parameter in question
12 TEST PARAMETER Initializing the parameter in question
13 CORRECT PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question
14 ADJUST PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question
15 NCU PARAMETER Initializing the parameter in question
2- 28
Functions
HEAD ID
Contents:Head ID input of JV-5 is automatically executed by the system.
The head memory PCB Assy is equipped on the head unit Assy (M007034, IH47V Head
Unit Assy), the ID information is written in the head memory Assy.
Head ID is for compensating differences of discharge amount of ink among each head. A label on
which a compensation value (ID) is written is attached on a head at shipping.
Storing the ID in the Parameter of JV-5 makes print quality constant.
Manual input of the ID information is required in the following cases.

In a case that the ID information is not stored in the head memory PCB Assy.
“ HEAD ID Un-Input ” is displayed on the panel (at the power ON)
In a case that the head ID is not identical to the ID information in the PCB Assy.
(when a PCB of another head is placed, for example).
As the error is not displayed on the panel, taking care is required at replacing.
Manual ID input is recommended if there is a doubt on agreement between the ID
of a head and the ID information in the memory PCB.
When the head ID is changed, never forget to turn the power OFF with the remort
switch (the front side power switch) to write new ID information in the head memory.
(If the power is turned OFF with the main power SW (back side), as contents of the
headmemory are not updated, changing of IDs is not reflected.
MOTOR CURRENT
STOP ADJUST
Contents:Adjusting of power current of X-, Y-motor. Adjust value is stored in the system parameter.
X-, Y-motor power current value and corresponding D/A value are displayed.
Key operation
[ENTER] :Transit to adjust mode
[ ], []:Motor selection
[], []:Change of D/A value
X MOVING ADJUST/ Y MOVING ADJUST

Contents:Adjust current value with driving X- or Y-motor.
Current value of X- or Y-motor and corresponding D/A value are displayed.
The operation sequence is as same as that of #TEST→MOTOR TEST→ XY SERVO
MOTOR.
Adjust the D/A value with [] [] during the operation under designated conditions.
The set value is stored at stopping with [END] .
2- 29
SERIAL No
Contents:Confirmation and setting of serial ID.
8 characters of alphabet and numeral (0~9, A~Z) can be input.
Key operation
[], []:Change value (cursor position)
[ ], []:Moving the cursor
(When the cursor is in the left end or the right end, key input does not work)
[ENTER] :Setting
[END] :Input cancel
Do not change the serial No in usual.
DEALER No
Contents:Confirmation and setting of dealer ID.
8 characters of alphabet and numeral (0~9, A~Z) can be input.
Key operation
[], []:Change value (cursor position)
[ ], []:Moving the cursor
(When the cursor is in the left end or the right end, key input does not work)
[ENTER] :Setting
[END] : Input cancel
EDGE ADJUST
Contents:Adjust dead space size of both left and right ends of paper
Key operation
[ ]:Set adjust value of L, R to default (15.0 mm).
[]: Execute media width detection to draw an adjust pattern.
[], []:Change adjust values
[END] :Input cancel
Adjust value:0.0~35.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm)
Input actual measurement from media end to the pattern as an adjust value.
If the unit is changed to inch, convert the value to inch to adjust.
15mm 15mm
Media width
Fig.2-5
Note: The set value is stored in the system parameter No.2 R GRIP, No.3 L GRIP as “current parameter value + (15mm-input
value)”.
2- 30
Functions
MEDIA ENCODER
Contents:Eccentric compensation of the media encoder is executed.
When the compensation is started, the following operations are executed automatically.
Used media:Using of the following cut media having more than 800mm of feed amount is
recommended.
1. Photo paper
2. Glossy white
3. Media having characteristic of as firm as possible (if media above mentioned can not
be obtained)
Using of media hard to feed, such as tarpaulin, is not allowed.

Use cut media and not to use roll media.
(Decentering compensation is interrupted by the back tension.)
MEDIA COMP.2
Contents:Basic feeding amount of media is compensated.
Key operation
[ENTER] :Drawing an adjusting pattern
[]: Input compensation value without drawing the adjusting pattern
[END] : Complete drawing and input compensation value.
Compensation value:-500 ~ 500
In actual feeding amount compensation, compensation for each media set in the
SET UP function is added to this compensation value.
A pattern having width of media is drawn.

Resolution is 720dpi
Compensation value is too large
Compensation value is too small
Fig.2-6
2- 31
EXCHANGE PARTS
Displaying of replacement date history of parts/unit, or registering of replacement date.
REGISTRATION
Parts replacement history is registered.
Select a part to be registered and input date and part number. Effective part numbers are as the
followings.
Type Part number

Pump 1~4
Cap 1~4
Damper 1-A, 1-B, 1-C, ... 4-G, 4-H
(combination of head number and nozzle number)
NCU sensor unit Number is not input
JV-5 determines timing of replacement of above parts.

When a part in question is replaced, never forget to register the replacement date.
HISTORY
The latest history is displayed at stating. (Switching is allowed with [], [])
As for a head, as it is recorded automatically at first starting after replacement, registration is not
required. (Confirmation of history is allowed)
Layout of each part is shown in the following drawing.
Cap Damper
Corresponding head No. is equal to cap No. Designate with head No. (1~4) and nozzle row (A~H)
Cap 1
Cap 2 A B C D E F G H
Cap 3
Cap 4 ~Top view of head~

~Top View of Cap~
Pump
Pump Pump Pump1: Ink suction pump

1 3 Pump2: Ink suction pump
Pump3: Cleaning fluid suction pump
F.BOX Pump Pump Pump4: Cleaning fluid suction pump
2 4
~Front view of the device~
Fig.2-7
2- 32
Functions
2-2-2. TEST Function
The test function comprises the following items executed in shipping, and the maintenance operation.
<Test function item>

Item Content Reference
page
CHECK PATTERN Drawing of various type of check patterns.
100%, 50%, 25%, 12.5%, 6.25% (Density pattern) P.2-34
NOZZLE CHECK, COLOR CHART,DROP.POS CHK
PARAMETER DRAW Drawing of parameter setting contents.
SYSTEM, MAINTE, CUSTOM, RUNNING, EXCHANGE, INKSYSTEM, P.2-35
INKinfor., INKSEQUENCE, INK TYPE, HEADunit 1 ~ 4 (1 ~ 2 in case of 2
head model), SERVO, TEST, CORRECT, ADJUST, NCU
ALL PATTERN Drawing of adjusting pattern. P.2-35
MOTOR TEST Operation test of various motors.
X SERVO MOTOR, Y SERVO MOTOR, XY SERVO MOTOR, P.2-36
WIPER MOTOR, CAP MOTOR, HEADup/downMTR, PUMP MOTOR,
TAKE-UP MOTOR
HEATER TEST Test of media heater
P.2-39
TEMPERATURE, LED, SSR, POWER RELAY SW
WARMING TEST Test of head warming heater P.2-39
ACTION TEST Operation Test of various fan motor, cutter, valve
VACUUM FAN, VACUUM FAN, FS FAN, Y-CUTTER, WIPERwashVALVE, P.2-40
HDC FAN, DEOD.FAN & DRY FAN
SENSOR TEST Test of various sensors
SET LEVER, R.PAPER, Y-ORIGIN, STATION, WIPER, FRONT COVER, P.2-40
WasteTANK, HEATER POW,MEDIA JAM, INK LEAK, Interlock CABLE
CAP SENSOR Test of cap sensor P.2-41
PAPER SENSOR Test of media width sensor P.2-41
KEYBOARD TEST Test of panel SW P.2-41
LCD TEST Test of LCD 1, 2 P.2-41
TIMER CHECK Confirmation and setting of device time P.2-42
MEMORY CHECK Check of various memory
MAIN.SDRAM, MAIN.S-RAM, MAIN.F-ROM, BACKUP.SRAM, P.2-43
HEAD.EEPROM
SKEW CHECK Media skew check P.2-44
TEMPERATURE.CHK Display of temperature around head
HEAD TEMP., NOZZLE TEMP., HEAT SINK TEMP., SLIDER TEMP., SIDE P.2-44
TEMP.
VOLTAGE CHECK Confirmation of power source voltage. P.2-44
I/F TEST Interface check
P.2-45
LOOP BACK, SDRAM
ENCODER TEST Test of various encoders.
LINEAR ENCODER, CUTTER ENCODER, MEDIA ENCODER, P.2-46
POSITIONencoder
INK CARTRIDGE Test around cartridge.
PACK&END SENSOR, CARTRIDGE VALVE, CARTRIDGE LED, INK-IC P.2-46
CHECK, SolenoidVOLTAGE
WASH CARTRIDGE Test around cleaning cartridge.
PACK&END SENSOR, CARTRIDGE VALVE, IC CHECK, P.2-47
SolenoidVOLTAGE
2- 33
CHECK PATTERN
The following 4 types of drawing are allowed in check pattern. Procedure of pattern drawing is shown in
the table below
• Density pattern
• NOZZLE CHECK
• COLOR CHART
• DROP.POS CHK
<Check pattern drawing procedure>
No. Item Content
1 Selection of density*2 ALL, 100%, 50%, 25%, 12.5%, 6.25%
2 Selection of resolution 540x 720, 540x 900, 540x1080, 720x 540
720x 720, 720x1080, 720x1440, 1440x1440
3 Selection of can Bi-D, Uni-D
direction
4 Selection of No. of Resolution Passes(4 color) Passes(6 color)
passes 540x720: 2,4,8,16 4,8,16,32
540x900: 5,10,20,40 5,10,20,40
540x1080: 3,6,12,24 6,12,24,48
720x540: 3,6,12,24 3,6,12,24
720x720: 2,4,8,16 4,8,16,32
720x1080: 3,6,12,24 6,12,24,48
720x1440: 4,8,16,32 8,16,32,64
1440x1440: 8,16,32 16,32,64
5 Selection of drawing size X size: 10 mm ~ paper length (unit: 10 mm) *Roll paper: 500000mm
Y size: 10 mm ~ paper width (unit: 10 mm)
6 Selection of drawing 6 colors: M,C,Y,K,c,m
color*1 4 colors: M,C,Y,K
7 Drawing start [ENTER] : Drawing start
(waiting for key input) [TEST] : Execution of test drawing
[(JOG)]: JOG operation mode
Press [ENTER] to start drawing with setting the current position as the original
position.
[REMOTE] : Setting of high speed scan ON/OFF
[END] : END of drawing
*1 COLOR CHART, DROP.POS CHK do not have these items.
*2 Density pattern, NOZZLE CHECK and DROP.POS CHK do not have these items.
<Example of DROP.POS CHK pattern printing>
Feed
Scan
Fig.2-8
2- 34
Functions
PARAMETER DRAW
Select a parameter to draw setting contents. Selectable parameters are as the followings.
<Parameter drawing>
No. Parameter Selection Notice
1 SYSTEM PARAM.
2 MAINTE PARAM.
3 CUSTOM PARAM.
4 RUNNING PARAM.
5 EXCHANGE PARAM.
6 INKSYSTEM PARAM
7 INKinfor.PARAM.
8 INKSEQUENCEpara
9 INK TYPE PARAM.
10 HEADunit PARAM. Unit–ALL, 1~4 (1~2 in case of 2 head model) to draw
11 SERVO PARAMETER
12 TEST PARAMETER
13 CORRECT PARAM.
14 ADJUST PARAM.
15 NCU PARAMETER
:Standard parameter (Default selection is allowed)

:Quasi disclosure parameter (Selectable only at releasing)
F/W Version, Item No., Item Name, Adjust Value, Initial Value of a selected parameter are drawn.
When DISPLAY setting is “JAPANESE” they are drawn in Japanese, if other language is set, they are
drawn in English.
Fig.2-9
ALL PATTERN
The following check patterns are drawn in the block.
Check pattern Reference

page
Slant adjusting pattern P.3-20
Stagger adjusting pattern P.3-23
Y-impact position adjusting pattern (FINE Y Si/Re/Bi) P.3-28
2- 35
MOTOR TEST
The following 8 motors are tested.
<Motor>
Motor name Reference
page
X SERVO MOTOR P.2-36
Y SERVO MOTOR P.2-36
XY SERVO MOTOR P.2-37
WIPER MOTOR P.2-37
CAP MOTOR P.2-38
HEADup/downMTR P.2-38
PUMP MOTOR P.2-38
TAKE-UP MOTOR P.2-39
X SERVO MOTOR
Operation of X-servo motor is executed.
<X (Y)-servo motor test sequence>
1 Speed designation [ ], []: Speed selection set value [], []:
Set value: 1 ~ 150 mm/s (unit: 1 mm/s) (at X-motor test) Selection of item
Set value: 1 ~ 1500 mm/s (unit: 1 mm/s) (at Y-motor test) 2~4
2 Acceleration designation [ ], []: Acceleration selection
Set value: 0.01 ~ 0.50G (unit: 0.01 G) (at X-motor test)
Set value: 0.05 ~ 2.00G (unit: 0.05 G) (at Y-motor test)
3 Moving amount [ ], []: Moving amount selection
designation Set value: 1mm ~ paper length (width) (unit: 1 mm)
When media is not detected X-motor: 1 mm~500000 mm
4 Cap OFF Move the station to the lowest position. Only Y-moter
5 Move [ENTER] : Reciprocating motion in the X (Y) direction with designated
conditions is repeated.
6 End [END] : Return to the motion starting position and execute capping to
end.
Note: During the test, heater temperature control is allowed (When HEATER key is effective).
Y SERVO MOTOR
Operation of Y-servo motor is executed.
Operation sequence is as same as that of X-motor test. (See the operation sequence above.)
2- 36
Functions
XY SERVO MOTOR
Operation test of XY-servo motor is executed.
< XY-servo motor test sequence>
1 X speed designation [ ], []: Speed selection [], []:
Set value: 1 ~ 150 mm/s (unit: 1 mm/s) Selection of item
2 X acceleration [ ], []: Acceleration selection 2~4
designation Set value: 0.01 ~ 0.50 G (unit: 0.01 G) [ENTER]:
3 X moving amount [ ], []: Moving amount selection Transit to setting
designation Set value: 1 mm ~ Paper length (unit: 1 mm) in the Y
When media is not detected: 1 mm ~ 500000 mm direction (5~)
press [ENTER] to start Y-motor setting
4 Y speed designation [ ], []: Speed selection [], []:
Set value: 1 ~ 1500 mm/s (unit: 1 mm/s) Selection of item
5 Y acceleration [ ], []: Acceleration selection 5~7
designation Set value: 0.05 ~ 2.00 G (unit: 0.05 G) [ENTER]:
6 Y moving amount [ ], []: Moving amount selection Transit to the
designation Set value: 1 mm ~ Paper width (unit: 1 mm) following step
When media is not detected: 1 mm ~ Mechanical limit size
[END]: Transit
to setting in the
X direction (2~)
7 Cap OFF Move the station to the lowest position.
8 Moving [ENTER] : The following motion is repeated with the designated
conditions.
(During the motion, No. of Y reciprocation is displayed.)
a ) Y designated distance moving
b ) X designated distance moving, Move to Y starting position
9 End [END] : Return to the motion starting position and execute capping to
end.
Note: During the test, heater temperature control is allowed (When HEATER key is effective).
WIPER MOTOR
Operation test of wiper motor is executed.
<Wiper motor test sequence>
1 Driving speed [ ], []: Selection of driving speed of the motor [], []:
designation Set value: 100 ~ 4000 pps (unit: 100 pps) Selection of item
2 WAIT designation [ ], []: Designating operation interval 1~3
Set value: 0~60 sec (unit: 1 sec)
3 Count designation [ ], []: Designating No. of operation times
Set value: CONTINUE, 1~1000 count (unit: 1 count)
4 Carriage state selection [FUNCTION] : Displaying carriage state at test selection menu
IN :Execution at cap position
OUT :Execution after carriage out
5 Test start [ENTER] : Driving the motor with designated conditions
When CONTINUE is selected in count setting, finished with
[END]
6 Test end Wiper is returned to the original position.
2- 37
CAP MOTOR
Operation test of cap motor is executed.
<Cap motor test sequence>
designation Set value: 100 ~ 4000 pps (unit: 100 pps) Selection of
2 WAIT designation [ ], []: Designating operation interval item 1~3
4 Test start [ENTER] : Cap OFF, carriage out, cap motor is driven with designated conditions
(Moving range: Station lowest position ~Cap ON position)
5 Test end When CONTINUE is selected in count setting, finished with [END] .
Cap ON to END.
HEADup/downMTR
Operation test of head up/down motor is executed.
< Head up/down motor test sequence>
designation Set value: 100 ~ 4000 pps (unit: 100 pps) Selection of
2 WAIT designation [ ], []: Designating operation interval item 1~3
4 Test start [ENTER] : Move the station to the lowest position, driving the head up/down
motor with the designated conditions. (Moving range: Head top most
position ~ Lowest position)
5 Test end When CONTINUE is selected in count setting, finished with [END] .
Head is returned to the position before the test, Cap ON to END.
PUMP MOTOR
Operation test of pump motor is executed.
<Pump motor test sequence>
1 Pump selection [], []: Pump selection (Move cursor) [], []:
[ ], []: Operation selection Selection of
2 Rotation direction [ ], []: Pump rotation direction selection item 1~3
selection Set value: FORWARD, REVERSE
3 Driving speed [ ], []: Select driving speed
designation Set value: 100~4000 pps (unit: 100 pps)
4 Carriage/Cap state [FUNCTION] : Carriage/cap state at test selection menu is displayed
selection <Carriage> IN: Execution at cap position / OUT: execution after carriage out
<Cap> ON: execution with cap ON / OFF: execution with cap OFF
5 Test start [ENTER] : Cap OFF, carriage is moved to maintenance position. Pump motor is
driven with designated conditions.
[END] : End
6 Test end Test end
2- 38
Functions
TAKE-UP MOTOR
Operation test of take-up motor is executed.
<Take-up motor test sequence>
1 Test start [ENTER] : Take-up motor is driven
(Switching of winding direction, or operation stop is allowed
with SW of winding device)
2 Test end [END] : End
HEATER TEST
Various tests of the media heater are executed.
<Heater test>
Item Content
TEMPERATURE Control test of heater set temperature is executed.
Temperature settings of Pre, Print, After Heater are executed to control heater.
Set value (Celsius): OFF, 20 ~ 60 °C (unit: 1 °C After-heater is up to 70 °C)
Set value (Fahrenheit): OFF, 68 ~ 140 °F (as converted from celsius, unit is not 1°F)
LED ON/OFF test of LED is executed.
LED is controlled according to heat LED of Pre, Print, After Heater, ON/OFF designation of constant
LED.
SSR ON/OFF of heater is executed.
Heater is turned to ON/OFF according to ON/OFF designation of pre, print, after heater.
(Heater temperature control is not conducted)
POWER RELAY Test of the heater power relay is executed.
SW Switching the power relay SW according to the ON/OFF designation.
Current temperature of the media heater is also displayed.
Note1: Temperature is displayed with a unit selected in the UNIT SETUP of the MACHINE SETUP function.
Note2: A/D conversion value is also displayed.
WARMING TEST
Control test of the head warming heater ON/OFF and the power FET SW is executed.
<Warming test>
Item Content
TEMPERATURE Controlling the heater temperature with the temperature setting of the warming heater (each head).
Temperature and ON/OFF of each heater are displayed during the temperature control.
Set value (Celsius): OFF, 20 ~ 45 °C (unit: 1 °C)
Set value (Fahrenheit): OFF, 68 ~ 113 °F (as converted from celsius, unit is not 1°F)
POWER FET SW Making sure that the FET switch works normally with controlling the power FET SW according to the
ON/OFF designation.
Set value: ON, OFF
Note1: Temperature is displayed with a unit selected in the UNIT SETUP of the MACHINE SETUP function.
2- 39
ACTION TEST
Operation of the following parts/units is tested.
<Action test>
Item Content
VACUUM FAN Contents: Operation test of vacuum fan motor
Set value: L.L, LOW, MID, HIGH, OFF
BUILTinDEOD.FAN Contents: Operation test of exhaust fan
Set value: ON, OFF
FS FAN Contents: Operation test of flushing station fan motor
Set value: L.L, Low, MID, HIGH, OFF
Y-CUTTER Contents: Operation test of media cutter.
Set value: UP, DOWN
Operation interval of Y-cutter is set with [FUNCTION]
[ ], []: Operation interval setting
Set value: 0 ~ 7200 sec (unit: 1 sec)
[ENTER] : UP, Down is repeated with set interval
Number count is displayed during the test.
WIPERwashVALVE Contents: Operation test of wiper cleaning valve
Set value: OPEN, CLOSE
HDC FAN Contents: Operation test of HDC fan
Set value: OPEN, CLOSE
DEOD.FAN & DRY Contents: Operation test of dryer/exhaust fan motor.
FAN Set value: ON, OFF
SENSOR TEST
Various sensors are tested.
Before starting the test, turn the servo motor and stepping motor to OFF, after finishing the test, initial
operation of original position detection is executed.
<Sensor test>
Sensor Content LCD display
SET LEVER State display of clamp lever sensor ON/OFF
R.PAPER State display of rear paper sensor ON/OFF
Y-ORIGIN State display of Y-original position sensor. ON/OFF
STATION State display of station lowest position sensor ON/OFF
WIPER State display of wiper sensor ON/OFF
FRONT COVER State display of cover sensor (front, maintenance LR) ON/OFF
WasteTANK State display of waste ink tank full sensor/exist sensor ON/ON
ON/ON: Full sensor ON / exist sensor ON (waste tank exist) OFF/ON
OFF/ON: Full sensor OFF / exist sensor ON (waste tank exist and near full) ON/OFF
ON/OFF: Full sensor ON / exist sensor OFF (never occur in usual state) OFF/OFF
OFF/OFF:Full sensor OFF / exist sensor OFF (no waste tank or tank full)
HEATER POW Displaying the state of heater SW ON/OFF
MEDIA JAM State display of media jam sensor ON/OFF
INK LEAK Displaying the state of ink leak sensor ON/OFF
Interlock CABLE Displaying existence of a short circuit of the interlock cable. Always ON
(OFF: short circuit)
2- 40
Functions
CAP SENSOR
Cap sensor is tested.
Cap OFF (station moved to the lowest position), state off cap sensor is displayed.
### ( *** ) ### : Sensor state (ON, OFF, Error)
*** : Sensor reading
less than 0x00A4, sensor state : OFF
more than 0x0200, sensor state : ON
at 0x00A5~0x01FF, sensor state : Error
Sensor reading is updated periodically (every 150 msec).
[END] : After cap ON, cap sensor ends.
PAPER SENSOR
Paper width sensor is tested.
Cap OFF (station moved to the lowest position), reading of paper width sensor is displayed.
*** (@@@,$$$) @@@ : Sensor reading at SLOP-ON
$$$ : Sensor reading at SLOP-OFF
***: Difference between @@@ and $$$
Sensor reading is updated periodically (every 150 msec).
[ ], []:Head move
[], []:Alternately move to paper existing position and non-existing position in the right end of
media.
[END] :After cap ON, paper sensor ends
KEYBOARD TEST
Panel SW is tested.
When a panel SW is pressed, name of the SW is displayed on LCD.
When no key is pressed, “NONE” is displayed.
When [END] is pressed, “END TEST” is displayed and the keyboard test ends.
LCD TEST
Characters are displayed on LCD 1, LCD 2.
When the LCD Test is started, scrolling of character code of 0x21 ~ 0xFF in one line is repeated. Press
[END] to stop the test.
2- 41
TIMER CHECK
Confirmation and setting of date and time of the device.
Inputting of past date is only allowed present day -8H. Other date is an error.
*Machine setting → Same as the time setting
Set value:20YY.MM.DD HH:MM:00
YY : 00~50
MM : 01~12
DD : 01~31
HH : 00~23
MM : 00~59
Returning to the last setting is allowed by pressing [FUNCTION] in the Date, Time Display State (not the
Entering State). (However, the time elapsed after the setting change is added.)
2- 42
Functions
MEMORY CHECK
Variety of memory of the device is checked.
<Memory check>
Item Content
MAIN.SDRAM*1 Read/Write check of SDRAM
Select insert/not insert of wait time (30sec) between data write and read.
In the checking the following process is counted as 1 and repeat until [END] is input.
1.00000000h is written into from address 0 to all area of SDRAM.
2.Read vacant data from address 0 to all area of SDRAM sequentially to confirm the reading meet the
writing data.
3.FFFFFFFFh is written into from address 0 to all area of SDRAM.
writing data.
5.Write increment data of 00010203h, 04050607h, ... FCFDFE00h into from address 0 to all area of
SDRAM.
writing data.
MAIN.S-RAM*1 Read/Write check of S-RAM
1.Write 00h in from address 0 of S-RAM, confirm that read value is 00h.
2.Write FFh in from address 0 of S-RAM, confirm that read value is FFh.
3.Write increment data of 00h, 01h, 02h, ..., FDh, FEh, 00h, ...in from address 0 of S-RAM, confirm that
read value agrees.
MAIN.F-ROM Hash check of F-ROM.
In the checking, it is confirmed that long ward size SUM value from address 0 of F-ROM is
0001f000H*2, that is counted as 1, the process is repeated until [END] is input.
If the SUM value is not 0001f000H, the check process is aborted and an error is displayed.
BACKUP.SRAM* 1 Read/Write check of back up S-RAM
Before starting the check, save contents of BACKUP.SRAM in F-ROM (sector 1,10).
1.Write 00h in from address 0 of backup S-RAM, confirm that read value is 00h
2.Write FFh in from address 0 of back up S-RAM, confirm that read value is FFh.
3.Write increment data of 00h, 01h, 02h, ..., FDh, FEh, 00h, ...in from address 0 of backup SRAM,
confirm that read value agrees.
HEAD.EEPROM*1 Read/Write check of HEAD.EEPROM
Select a head unit to be checked.
Before starting the checking, save contents of EEPROM in S-RAM (head unit parameter area).
1.Write 00h in from address 0 of HEAD.EEPROM, confirm that read value is 00h
2.Write FFh in from address 0 of HEAD.EEPROM, confirm that read value is FFh.
3.Write increment data of 00h, 01h, 02h, ..., FDh, FEh, 00h, ...in from address 0 of HEAD.EEPROM,
confirm that read value agrees.
Note: No. of counts is displayed during the check.
*1 When data does not agrees, the check process is aborted, and memory address, write/read data at occurrence of the error
are displayed.
*2 As sector 1~10 used by parameter are passed, SUM value is not 0.
2- 43
SKEW CHECK
Skewing of media is checked.
When media is not detected, an operation error (ERROR30) is displayed.
Feed distance is designated to execute feeding.
Feed distance: 1~500 m (unit: 1 m)
During the feeding, remaining of feed distance is displayed with unit of 10mm.
[END] : Feeding abort, [ENTER] : Start feeding again.
Cut jig function

After the Skew check starts, (feed distance is not designated) the following operation starts the cut jig
function.
[REMOTE] → [FUNCTION]
The cut jig function repeats media cut → feed with designating feed distance and number of cut times.
Number of cut times is displayed in count down during cut.
Feed distance: 10~10000 mm (unit: 10 mm Default: 500 mm)

Number of cut times: 1~1000 count (unit: 1 count Default: 25 count)
TEMPERATURE.CHK
<Temperature check test>
Item Content
HEAD TEMP. Environment temperature of head is displayed (A/D value is also displayed).
Displaying of head temperature uses a unit selected in the UNIT SETUP of the MACHINE SETUP.
NOZZLE TEMP. Nozzle temperature error check is executed.
At Normal: OK is displayed
At error: NG is displayed
HEAT SINK TEMP. Temperature of HDC board heatsink is displayed (A/D value is also displayed).
Displaying of heatsink temperature uses a unit selected in the “UNIT SETUP” of the
MACHINE SETUP.
SLIDER TEMP. Temperature read from the thermistor on the slider PCB is displayed (A/D value is also displayed).
SIDE TEMP. Temperature read from the thermistor on the side board of device is displayed (A/D value is also
displayed).
VOLTAGE CHECK
Stipulated voltage and actual voltage of each channel are displayed.
Input channel Stipulated

voltage
Analog input channel 2 3.3 V
2- 44
Functions
I/F TEST
<Interface test>
Item Content
LOOP BACK*1 Loop back test with I/F Board is executed.
Operations of 1~6 are counted as 1, the process is repeated until [END] is pressed.
During the check number of counts is displayed.
1. Write check data in REVERSE register.
2. Read check data from CH1 data register, and check whether it agrees the written data.
4. Read check data from CH2 data register, and check whether it agrees the written data.
6. Read check data from STATUS register, and check whether it agrees the written data.
The check prepares the following 6 types of data (size 256 kbs).
(The test is conducted successively with 6 types of data per 1 path.)
00010203h,04050607h,08090A0Bh•••FCFDFEFFh
All 55555555h
All AAAAAAAAh
All 5555AAAAh
All AAAA5555h
All 55AA55AAh
MEMORY CHECK*2 Write/Read of I/F Board SDRAM (receive buffer & program area) is checked.
Number of counts is displayed during the check.
*1 When data does not agree, the check process is aborted, and a path in which the error occurs (CH1/CH2/STATUS) and
Write/Read data are displayed.
*2 When data does not agree, the check process is aborted, and SDRAM address where the error occurs and Write/Read data
are displayed.
2- 45
ENCODER TEST
<Encoder test>
Item Content
LINEAR ENCODER Linear scale, Linear sensor are tested.
Moving a carriage with designated distance (3 reciprocatings), difference of linear encoder value and
Y-motor encoder value is displayed. If an error arises during the operation, the test is aborted.
Moving distance: 100 mm ~ Maximum actual operation limit (unit: 100 mm)
LCD display is as the following. (M∗: Y-motor encoder, E∗: linear encoder)
• Moving distance: M=∗∗∗∗.∗ E=∗∗∗∗.∗ (unit: 0.1 mm)
• Difference of encoder values before moving and after moving:
Mc=∗∗∗∗.∗ Ec=∗∗∗∗.∗ (unit: 0.1 mm)
• Encoder values before moving: Ms=∗∗∗∗∗ Es=∗∗∗∗∗
• Encoder values after moving: Mm=∗∗∗∗∗ Em=∗∗∗∗∗
• Encoder values after moving with designated distance:
Mr=∗∗∗∗∗ Er=∗∗∗∗∗
CUTTER ENCODER Linear scale, Linear sensor for media thickness detection are tested.
ON/OFF of Y-cutter is conducted at media exists position and media no-exists position on the platen,
media thickness and reading of linear sensor are displayed.
Media thickness: ∗.∗∗ mm
Sensor reading value: Pr=h ∗∗∗∗ Mr=h ∗∗∗∗
(Pr: reading on platen, Mr: reading on media)
MEDIA ENCODER Media encoder is tested.
Executing media OREFEED/BACKFEED under conditions shown below, motor encoder value,
media encoder value and their difference are displayed.
Feed speed: 1 ~ 150 mm/s (Default: 60 mm/s)
Feed acceleration: 0.01 ~ 0.50 G (Default: 0.20 G)
Feed distance: 127 mm ~ paper length* (unit: 1 mm Default: 127 mm)
*If paper length can not be detected 1 ~ 500000 mm
POSITIONencoder Position encoder is tested
Reciprocating from head top most to the lowest position, encoder values at each of starting position
(Top most), position after moving (Lowest position), and end position (Top most) are displayed.
After the test, head height is returned to the position before test to end.
LCD display is as the following.
Es=∗∗∗∗: Position encoder value at starting position (Top most)
Em=∗∗∗∗: Position encoder value at position after moving (Lowest position)
Er=∗∗∗∗: Position encoder value at end position (Top most)
INK CARTRIDGE
<Ink cartridge test>
Item Content
PACK&END SENSOR Displaying state of cartridge exist/non-exist sensor and end sensor.
A slot number on which an error (No cartridge, Ink near end) is found is displayed.
[–2–––––––––––––] (Example of LCD display)
CARTRIDGE VALVE Checking open/close of cartridge valve
CARTRIDGE LED Light/Off of cartridge LED is tested.
INK-IC CHECK Ink cartridge IC is checked.
In the check, IC chip data is read, number of occurrence of errors at each cartridge is displayed.
SolenoidVOLTAGE Solenoid voltage is set to 24V to check whether an abnormal voltage can be detected.
2- 46
Functions
WASH CARTRIDGE
<Wash cartridge test>
Item Content
PACK&END SENSOR Displaying state of cartridge exist/non-exist sensor and end sensor
[ON, OFF] (Example of LCD display)
CARTRIDGE VALVE Open/Close of cartridge valve is checked.
IC CHECK Maintenance cleaning fluid IC is checked.
IC chip data is read to be checked and the number of error occurrences is displayed.
SolenoidVOLTAGE Solenoid voltage is set to 24V to check whether an abnormal voltage can be detected.
2- 47
2-2-3. Special Key Function
A function executed with pressing certain key SW at starting the device, the function starts the device
with the following modes.
<Special key mode>
Mode Starting operation State after reset
F/W update mode [REMOTE] + Power ON Keeping previous state
Parameter Up/Down load mode [ ] + [] + Power ON Keeping previous state
Maintenance open mode [REMOTE] + [FUNCTION] + Power ON User mode
System parameter input mode [] + [] + Power ON User mode
or [ENTER] + [END] + Power ON
F/W update mode

Receiving ROM data from the host computer through USB2.0 I/F to update device F/W, or rewriting of
ink information.
Starting method: Starting with pressing [REMOTE]
In JV-5, the following updates are allowed.
• Main board F/W (Contain NCU board F/W)
• I/F board F/W (USB2.0, IEEEE 1394 )
Parameter Up/Down load mode

Parameter data, log data are Up/Down loaded via USB I/F with the Host computer.
Starting method: Starting with pressing [] + [].
Upload, Download is instructed by the host PC (F/W update tool) with an exclusive maintenance
command.
Upload
USB I/F
Download
JV-5 side Host PC side
Fig.2-10
Maintenance Open Mode

Starts the device in maintenance open state
Starting method: Start with pressing [REMOTE] + [FUNCTION] .
System Parameter Input Mode

Starts the device in system parameter input state of #PARAMETER function.
This function is for initializing parameters when starting of device is disabled to start because of
parameter hash error and so on.
Starting method: Starts with pressing [ ] + [] (Or starts with pressing [ENTER] + [END] ).
2- 48
Functions
2-2-4. PARAMETER Function

PARAMETER function is a function to confirm and set parameters in the device.
<Parameter function item>

No. Item Stored place Notice
1 SYSTEM PARAM. F-ROM sector 2
2 MAINTE PARAM. F-ROM sector 2
3 CUSTOM PARAM. F-ROM sector 2
4 RUNNING PARAM. F-ROM sector 1 /Backup SRAM
5 EXCHANGE PARAM. F-ROM sector 2
6 INKSYSTEM PARAM F-ROM sector 2
7 INKinfor.PARAM. F-ROM sector 2,8,9
8 INKSEQUENCEpara F-ROM sector 2,8,9
9 INKTYPE PARAM. F-ROM sector 2,8,9
10 HEADunit PARAM. F-ROM sector 1 /Backup SRAMHEAD.EEPROM
11 SERVO PARAMETER F-ROM sector 2
12 TEST PARAMETER F-ROM sector 2
13 CORRECT PARAM. F-ROM sector 2
14 ADJUST PARAM. F-ROM sector 2
15 NCU PARAMETER F-ROM sector 2
Note: While accessing F-ROM and HEAD.EEPROM, display [F-ROM WRITING] and light up BUSY LED (red).
No.1~6: Default selection is allowed
No.7~15:Selection is allowed only at the maintenance open
2- 49
2-3. Operation Flow
2-3-1. Outline
The followings are items to be operational at the maintenance open. As for the operation flow at the
maintenance close, see the operation manual.
FUNCTION
PRE PRT POST

35°C 40°C 50°C
FUNCTION SETUP
SET UP <ENT> [ENTER]
See p.2- 51
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
PRE PRT POST

35°C 40°C 50°C
FUNCTION MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE <ENT> [ENTER]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
PRE PRT POST

35°C 40°C 50°C
FUNCTION MACHINE SET
MACHINE SETUP <ENT> [ENTER]
See p.2- 52
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
PRE PRT POST

35°C 40°C 50°C
FUNCTION NCU
NCU <ENT> [ENTER]
See p.2- 54
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
PRE PRT POST

35°C 40°C 50°C
FUNCTION DISPLAY DISPLAY
DISPLAY <ENT> [ENTER]
Japanese <ent> [ENTER]
English <ent>
[ FUNCTION ] English *Display is switched to the selected language.
[
or
]/[ ]
German
French
Spanish
Italian
Portuguese
Effective at the maintenance open.
PRE PRT POST (not disclosed to users)
35°C 40°C 50°C
FUNCTION ADJUST
#ADJUST <ENT> [ENTER]
[ FUNCTION ] See p.2- 57
[
or
]/[ ]
PRE PRT POST

35°C 40°C 50°C
FUNCTION TEST
#TEST <ENT> [ENTER]
[ FUNCTION ] See p.2- 61
[
or
]/[ ]
PRE PRT POST

35°C 40°C 50°C
FUNCTION PARAMETER
#PARAMETER <ENT> [ENTER]
See p.2- 68
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
2- 50
Operation Flow
2-3-2. SETUP
SETUP
[END]
PRE PRT POST PRE PRT POST

35°C 40°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 50°C [ENTER]
SET UP [1]
SELECT :TYPE 1 [ENTER] MEDIA COMP. <ent> [END]
TYPE 2 [ FUNCTION ]
TYPE 3
TYPE 4 [
or
]/[ ]
PRE PRT POST PRE PRT POST

35°C 40°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 50°C [ ENTER ]
[1] [1]MediaFeed SETUP

MediaFeed SETUP <ent> [ENTER] FEED METHOD <ent>

[ ENTER ]
[ FUNCTION ]

/ [ END ]
or [ ]/[ ]
[ ]/[ ]
PRE PRT POST

35°C 40°C 50°C [ ENTER ]
[1]MediaFeed SETUP
SPEED SWITCHING<ent>

[ ENTER ]
/ [ END ]
[ ]/[ ]
PRE PRT POST INPUT RANGE

35°C 40°C 50°C [ ENTER ]
127 - 50000mm
[1]MediaFeed SETUP [1]MOVEMENT TEST
[ ENTER ]
MOVEMENT TEST <ent> FEED LENGTH:150mm

[ END ]
* Input of FEED LENGTH
isallowed at the
maintenance open
[ ENTER ]
[1]MOVEMENT TEST Detecting operation

[ END ]
TEST START :ent
[ END ]
∗RESULT of MOV.TEST∗ ∗RESULT of MOV.TEST∗

FEED ERROR : 0.2% FEED ERROR :0.5%
[DIRECT]METHOD > OK Recommendation is
100% SPEED > OK :ent specified. :ent
∗∗ RECOMMENDATION ∗∗
FeedMETHOD>[NORMAL]
or FeedSPEED>lowered
COMPLETED :ent
* When the feed difference is more than 0.4%, the

PRE PRT POST following recommended settings are displayed.
35°C 40°C 50°C • FeedMETHOD [NORMAL]
[ENTER]
• Decrease feeding speed.
[1]
HEATER <ent>
[END]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
2- 51
2-3-3. MACHINE SET

MACHINE SET
[ENTER]
MACHINE SETUP
DEODORIZE FAN <ent>
[END]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER]
MACHINE SETUP
DRYNESS FEED <ent> [END]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER]
MACHINE SETUP
CONFIRM. FEED <ent>
[END]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER]
MACHINE SETUP
TIME SET <ent>
[END]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER]
MACHINE SETUP * Test drawing and page No. can be added to the standard stamp
UNIT SETUP <ent> items at the maintenance open.
[END] Stamping on the built-in drawing is also allowed other than on-line
[ FUNCTION ]
drawing.
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER] [FUNCTION]
MACHINE SETUP STAMP SETUP

[ENTER]
STAMP SETUP TEST DRAW: PAGE No

STAMP SETUP <ent> STAMP :OFF ITEM <ent> [ENTER]
OFF : OFF
[ENTER]

[END]
[ FUNCTION ]
[END] :ON [END]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
MACHINE SETUP
[ENTER]
STAMP SETUP STAMP SETUP
MACHINE NAME <ent> [END]
PRINT EXTEND <ent> [ENTER]
PRINT :ONLINE
[ FUNCTION ] [END]
PRINT :ALL
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
MACHINE SETUP INFORMATION

INFORMATION <ent> ERROR HISTORY <ent>

[END] [END]
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
INFORMATION
MAINTE. HISTORY <ent>

[END]
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
INFORMATION
PRT.modeHISTORY<ent>

[END]
[ ]/[ ]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ] [ENTER]
INFORMATION
LIST <ent> * Confirmation of FPGA
version is also allowed in

[END]
[ ]/[ ]
the maintenance mode.
JV5-160S V1.00
[ENTER]
JV5-160S V1.00
[ENTER] / [ ]
INFORMATION USB-I/F V1.00 FPGA-PDC V1.00

VERSION <ent> MRL-III V1.00 FPGA-HDC V1.00

[END] [END] / [ ]
[ ]/[ ]
MACHINE SET 2/2 See p.2- 53
[ENTER]
MACHINE SETUP
MRL COMMAND <ent> [END]
2- 52
Operation Flow
MACHINE SET 2/2 See p.2- 52
[
]/[ ]
[ENTER]
INFORMATION
Serial&DealerNo<ent> [END]
[
]/[ ]
* Registered content of the E-

INFORMATION
[ENTER]
EVENT LOG [ 0] LOG parameter is displayed
0823-01-01.0000.0000 in the maintenance mode for
EVENT LOG <ent> the simplicity.

[END]
[ ]/[ ]
EVENT LOG [ -1]

[
]/[ ]
2307-01-02.0000.0000
[ ]/[ ]
EVENT LOG [-1234]

0000-00-00.0000.0000
[ENTER] [ENTER]
INFORMATION REPLACE COUNTER REPLACE COUNTER

REPLACE COUNTER<ent> CARTRIDGE <ent> [END]
CART. 1 : 0

[END]
CART. 1~16
* Replace counter (operation [ ]/[ ]
state of the JV-5) can be [ENTER]
confirmed in the REPLACE COUNTER REPLACE COUNTER

maintenance mode. SCAN COUNT <ent> [END]
SCAN : 0
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
REPLACE COUNTER REPLACE COUNTER

USE TIME <ent> [END]
TIME : 0h
[ ]/[ ]
REPLACE COUNTER
[ENTER]
REPLACE COUNTER * Set to 0 at wiper replacement.

WIPING(WIPER) <ent> [END]
WIPER : 0
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER] * Corresponding number of times is

REPLACE COUNTER REPLACE COUNTER set to 0 at head replacement.
WIPING(HEAD) <ent> [END]
HEAD 1: 0
[ ]/[ ] HEAD 1~4 H1A:ALL =123,456,789
Sdot= 13,579,135
[ENTER] [ENTER]
REPLACE COUNTER REPLACE COUNTER Mdot= 68,024,680

SHOT COUNT <ent> [END]
SELECT :HEAD1 [END]
Ldot= 41,852,974
[ ]/[ ] HEAD1~4 Head∗-A~H
REPLACE COUNTER
[ENTER]
REPLACE COUNTER * Corresponding number of times is

PumpRotationCNT <ent> PUMP 1: 0 set to 0 at replacement of the pump.
[END]
[ ]/[ ] PUMP 1~4

[ENTER]

PRINT LENGTH <ent> [END]
LENGTH : 0m
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]

DRAW AREA <ent> [END]
AREA : 0m2
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
REPLACE COUNTER TIME : 0H 00M

SLEEP REFRESH <ent> [END]
CNT : 0
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]

SLEEP CLEANING <ent> [END]
CNT : 0
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]

SLEEP TUBE WASH<ent> [END]
CNT : 0
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]

INK PIC <ent> [END] CART.1 : 0
CART.1~16
2- 53
2-3-4. NCU
NCU
[ENTER]
NCU
NOZZLE CHECK <ent>
[END]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER]
NCU
NG ACTION <ent> [END]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER]
NCU
NG JUDGEMENT <ent>
[END]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER]
NCU
COND.INDICATION<ent>
[END]
[ FUNCTION ]
* The TEST MENU of NCU is added in the maintenance mode.
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER]
NCU See p.2- 52

#TEST <ent> [END]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER]
NCU #NCU LD RESET [ENTER]

∗∗ Being LD-reset ∗∗
#NCU LD RESET <ent> [END]
LDcons.ELcurr. :RESET PLEASE WAIT
As for the detail of “NCU LD RESET” End
( p. 2- 25) .
Normal Abnormal
∗∗RESET COMPLETION∗∗ !! RESET FAILURE !!
#NCU LD RESET #NCU LD RESET

LDcons.ELcurr. :RESET LDcons.ELcurr. :RESET
2- 54
Operation Flow
NCU TEST1
( To the previous page )
[ENTER]
NCU NCU TEST
#TEST <ent>
As for the detail of “TEST” ( p. 2- 24) .
#NOZZLE CHK TEST 540dpi. x1Speed

[ENTER] EVEN-NUM. NOZZLES EVEN-NUM. NOZZLES
#TEST #NOZZLE CHK TEST Y-Dpi : Speed #NOZZLE CHK TEST [ENTER]
[END] NOZZLE CHK TEST<ent> SEL. : EVEN-NUM. NZL. 540 : x1 TEST START :ent
[END] [ENTER] [ENTER]
540dpi. x1Speed Testing operation

EVEN-NUM. NOZZLES
[ ]/[]
∗∗∗ TEST RUNTIME ∗∗∗
PLEASE WAIT
#RESULT
[ ]/[] EVEN-NUM. NOZZLES
Nzl-A:0
Nzl-B:0
Nzl-A ~ H

ODD-NUM. NOZZLES ODD-NUM. NOZZLES
#NOZZLE CHK TEST Y-Dpi : Speed #NOZZLE CHK TEST [ENTER]
SEL. : ODD-NUM. NZL. 540 : x1 TEST START :ent

ODD-NUM. NOZZLES
PLEASE WAIT
#RESULT
[ ]/[] ODD-NUM. NOZZLES
Nzl-A:0
Nzl-B:0
Nzl-A ~ H

EVEN & ODD NOZZLES EVEN & ODD NOZZLES
#NOZZLE CHK TEST Y-Dpi : Speed #NOZZLE CHK TEST [ENTER]
SEL. : EVEN & ODD NZL. 540 : x1 TEST START :ent

EVEN & ODD NOZZLES
PLEASE WAIT
#RESULT
[ ]/[] EVEN & ODD NOZZLES
Nzl-A:0
Nzl-B:0
Nzl-A ~ H
#NOZZLE CHK TEST 540dpi. x1Speed. CONT.
ALL NOZZLES ALL NOZZLES
#NOZZLE CHK TEST Y-Dpi : Speed :CONT. #NOZZLE CHK TEST [ENTER]
SEL. : ALL NOZZLES 540 : x1 : ON TEST START :ent
540dpi. x1Speed. CONT. Testing operation

ALL NOZZLES
PLEASE WAIT
#RESULT
ALL NOZZLES
Nzl-A:0
Nzl-B:0
Nzl-A ~ H
( Continued to next page )
2- 55
NCU TEST2
[ ]/[]
~Display of Result~ NCU SDRAM ERROR

[ENTER] [ENTER] address = h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
#TEST #SDRAM CHECK #SDRAM CHECK WriteData=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
[END] SDRAM CHECK <ent> TEST START :ent CNT:1 Read Data=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
[END]
[ ]/[] ~Display of Result~
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#TEST #F-ROM CHECK #F-ROM CHECK NCU F-ROM CHECK
[END] F-ROM CHECK <ent> TEST START :ent CNT:1 ERROR ROM HASH
[END]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#TEST #LDconsum.EL-current ∗∗ NCU TESTING ∗∗ Testing operation
[END] LDconsu.ELcurr. <ent> TEST START :ent PLEASE WAIT
[END]
~Display of Result~
[ ]/[] ∗∗∗∗ SUCCESS ∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗ ERROR 161 ∗∗∗∗
NCU CONSUMPTION
#LDconsum.EL-current #LDconsum.EL-current
VALUE = ∗∗.∗mA VALUE = ∗∗.∗mA
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#TEST #LINE VOLTAGE ∗∗ NCU TESTING ∗∗ Testing operation
[END] LINE VOLTAGE <ent> TEST START :ent PLEASE WAIT
[END]
~Display of Result~
[ ]/[] ∗∗∗∗ SUCCESS ∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗ ERROR 162 ∗∗∗∗
NCU LINE VOLTAGE
#LINE VOLTAGE #LINE VOLTAGE
VALUE = ∗.∗V VALUE = ∗.∗V
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#TEST #LD&SensorTEST ∗∗ NCU TESTING ∗∗ Testing operation
[END] LD&SensorTEST <ent> TEST START :ent PLEASE WAIT
[END]
~Display of Result~
[ ]/[] ∗∗∗∗ SUCCESS ∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗ ERROR 163 ∗∗∗∗
NCU SENSOR DETECT
#LD&SensorTEST #LD&SensorTEST
SENSOR LEVEL = 255 SENSOR LEVEL = 0
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#TEST #SERIAL CHECK ∗∗ NCU TESTING ∗∗ Testing operation
[END] SERIAL CHECK <ent> TEST START :ent PLEASE WAIT
[END]
~Display of Result~
[ ]/[] ∗∗∗∗ SUCCESS ∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗ ERROR 116 ∗∗∗∗
NCU I/F nn
#SERIAL CHECK #SERIAL CHECK
TEST START :ent TEST START :ent
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#TEST #LASER TEMP.CHK ∗∗TEMP.Acquisition∗∗ Testing operation
[END] LASER TEMP.CHK <ent> TEMP.Acquisition :ent PLEASE WAIT
[END]
~Display of Result~
#LASER TEMP.CHK
50°C (1234)
2- 56
Operation Flow
2-3-5. ADJUST
ADJUST 1/2 As for the detail of “ADJUST Function” ( p. 2- 26) .
[ENTER]
#ADJUST See p.2- 59
HEAD ADJUST <ent>
[FUNCTION] [END]
or
[ ]/[] [ENTER]
#ADJUST See p.2- 60
HEAD WASH <ent>
[END]
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[] A head to absorb is
[ENTER] chosen. [ENTER] [ENTER]
#ADJUST MANUALhead WASH MANUALhead WASH Waste ink tank
MANUALhead WASH<ent> HEAD SELECT :12.34 SUCTION START :ent error check
[END] [END] [END] Abnormal Normal
No waste ink tank, Replace a

[FUNCTION] or a tank is FULL. waste ink tank.
or
[ ]/[] <ENT>keyHIT is after <ENT>keyHIT is after Being ABSORBED
theTANK set or exchg the TANK exchange.
[ENTER] [ENTER]
MANUALhead WASH
COMPLETED :ent
Recovered
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#ADJUST #DEFAULT SET [ENTER] SETUP PARAMETER Parameter
DEFAULT SET <ent> SETUP PARAMETER<ent> INITIALIZE OK? :ent initialization
[END] MAINTE. PARAM. <ent> MAINTENANCEparameter
CUSTOM. PARAM. <ent> CUSTOMIZE PARAMETER
RUNNING PARAM. <ent> RUNNING PARAMETER
EXCHANGE PARAM.<ent> EXCHANGE PARAMETER
INKSYSTEMparam.<ent> INK-SYSTEM PARAMETER
INKinfor.PARAM.<ent> INK INFOR. PARAMETER
INKSEQUENCEpara<ent> INKsequencePARAMETER
INKTYPE PARAM. <ent> INK-TYPE PARAMETER
[ ]/[]
[ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER]
[FUNCTION] #DEFAULT SET #DEFAULT SET HEAD UNIT-ALL PARAM. Parameter
or initialization
[ ]/[] HEADunit PARAM.<ent> UNIT SELECT :ALL INITIALIZE OK? :ent
[ ]/[] UNIT SELECT :UNIT-1~4 UNIT-1~4
[ENTER]
#DEFAULT SET [ENTER] SERVO PARAMETER Parameter
SERVO PARAMETER<ent> INITIALIZE OK? :ent initialization
TEST PARAMETER <ent> TEST PARAMETER
CORRECT PARAM. <ent> CORRECT PARAMETER
ADJUST PARAM. <ent> ADJUST PARAMETER
NCU PARAMETER <ent> NCU PARAMETER
UP:^ V:DOWN LEFT:< >:RIGHT UP:^ V:DOWN

[ENTER] (-20.0 - +20.0) (-20.0 - +20.0) (-20.0 - +20.0)
#ADJUST #CAPPING #CAPPING #CAPPING
CAPPING <ent> LOWER POS. = 0.0mm CAPPING POS= 0.0mm CAP HEIGHT = 0.0mm
[END] [ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER]
REAR:< >:FRONT UP:^ V:DOWN LEFT:< >:RIGHT ∗∗ Being ADJUSTED ∗∗

[FUNCTION] (-20 - +20) (-20.0 - +20.0) (-20.0 - +20.0) PLEASE WAIT
or
[ ]/[] #CAPPING #CAPPING #CAPPING #CAPPING
WipwePOS(X)= 0mm WiperHEIGHT= 0.0mm WiperPOS(Y)= 0.0mm NCU HEIGHT = ∗.∗mm
[ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER] End
Height 2.0mm is #CAPPING
[ENTER] adjusted by hand.
NCU HEIGHT = 0.0mm
#ADJUST #BasisHEADheight
BasisHEADheight <ent> COMPLETED :ent
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[] [ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER]
#ADJUST #HEAD ID #HEAD ID/HEAD-1(1/2) #HEAD ID/HEAD-1(2/2)
HEAD ID <ent> SELECT :HEAD-1 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
[FUNCTION] SELECT :HEAD-1~4
or
[ ]/[] See p.2- 58
2- 57
ADJUST 2/2 See p.2- 57

[FUNCTION] [^] CurrentValueUP
or
[ ]/[] [ENTER] [ENTER] [V] CurrentValueDOWN
#ADJUST #MOTOR CURRENT X=0 Y=0
MOTOR CURRENT <ent> STOP ADJUST <ent> (∗∗∗∗) (∗∗∗∗)
0~255
[ ]/[] [ENTER]
#X MOVING ADJUST Operation #XmovingADJUST ∗RUN∗
[ENTER] start xxx (∗∗∗∗)
[FUNCTION]
#MOTOR CURRENT S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗G S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗G
or X MOVING ADJUST<ent> X=∗∗∗∗∗mm X=∗∗∗∗∗mm
[ ]/[] [ENTER]
[END]
[ ]/[] #Y MOVING ADJUST #YmovingADJUST ∗RUN∗
[ENTER]
Operation xxx (∗∗∗∗)
start
#MOTOR CURRENT S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗G S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗G
Y MOVING ADJUST<ent> Y=∗∗∗∗∗mm [END] Y=∗∗∗∗∗mm
[ENTER] [ ]/[] : Value change
#ADJUST #SERIAL No []/[] : Column shift
SERIAL No <ent> ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ [ENTER] : Setting
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[] [ENTER] [ ]/[] : Value change
#ADJUST #DEALER No []/[] : Column shift
DEALER No <ent> ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ [ENTER] : Setting
[FUNCTION] End of drawing
or
[ ]/[] [ENTER] [] /[END]
Adjust pattern drawing INPUT RANGE
#ADJUST #EDGE ADJUST 0.0 - 35.0
EDGE ADJUST <ent> CLEAR< >PRINT
[FUNCTION] [] Adjusted value clear #EDGE ADJUST
or L=15.0 R=15.0
[ ]/[] [ENTER] [ENTER]
#ADJUST #MEDIA ENCODER Automatic decentering
MEDIA ENCODER <ent> ADJUST START :ent compensation
Abnormal
Normal
0:∗∗ 1:∗∗ 2:∗∗ 3:∗∗ ADJUST FINISHED ADJUST FINISHED

[FUNCTION] 4:∗∗ 5:∗∗ 6:∗∗ 7:∗∗ ∗ ORG.DETECT ERROR ∗ ∗ ENC. COUNT ERROR ∗
or
[ ]/[] 8:∗∗ 9:∗∗ #MEDIA ENCODER #MEDIA ENCODER
COMPLETED :ent COMPLETED :ent COMPLETED :ent
[] INPUT RANGE
[ENTER] [ENTER] -500 - +500
#ADJUST #MEDIA COMP.2 Adjust pattern drawing #MEDIA COMP.2
MEDIA COMP.2 <ent> PRINT START :ent VALUE =0
End of drawing / [END]
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[] INPUT ITEM
[ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER] Date, PumpNo.
#ADJUST #EXCHANGE PARTS #REGISTRATION ∗PUMP
EXCHANGE PARTS<ent> REGISTRATION <ent> PARTS :PUMP 05.07.?? : No.?
[ ]/[] INPUT ITEM
[ENTER] Date, CapNo.
#REGISTRATION ∗CAP
PARTS :CAP 05.07.?? : No.?
[ ]/[] INPUT ITEM
[ENTER] Date, HeadNo. NzlNo.
[ ]/[] #REGISTRATION ∗DUMPER
PARTS :DUMPER 05.07.?? : No.?-?
[ ]/[] INPUT ITEM
[ENTER] Date
#REGISTRATION ∗NCUsensorUNIT
PARTS :NCUsensorUNIT 05.07.??
History indication
[ENTER] ∗CAP
#EXCHANGE PARTS ∗HEAD [ 2] 06.08.15 : No.4
HISTORY <ent> [ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2
[ ]/[]
if there is no [ ]/[]
history record ∗DUMPER
∗PUMP [ 3] 06.07.23:No.3-E
[ 1] 06.09.15 : No.1
∗∗ There is no ∗∗
∗∗ HISTORY ∗∗ [ ]/[]
2- 58
Operation Flow
HEAD ADJUST
ADJUST 1/2 See p.2- 57
[ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER]

#ADJUST #HEAD ADJUST #SLANT ADJUST #SLNT ADJ./HEAD=1234 Adjust pattern
HEAD ADJUST <ent> SLANT ADJUST <ent> HEAD SELECT :1234 PRINT START :ent drawing
[END] * JOG operation is allowed
[FUNCTION] [ ]/[]
or [ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER]
[ ]/[] #HEAD ADJUST #STAGGER ADJUST #STAG ADJ./HEAD=ALL Adjust pattern
STAGGER ADJUST<ent> HEAD SELECT :1-2 PRINT START :ent drawing
#ADJUST * JOG operation is allowed
HEAD WASH <ent> HEAD SELECT :2-3
HEAD SELECT :3-4
[ ]/[] HEAD SELECT :ALL
#HEAD ADJUST #DROP POS. MODE #DROP POS. Hs
DROP.POS ADJUST<ent> SELECT :HiSPEED SCAN GAP SELECT :Low
SELECT :Normal-SCAN GAP SELECT :High
[ ]/[]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#HEAD ADJUST #DROPposCONFIRM. Confirmation
DROPposCONFIRM.<ent> PRINT START :ent pattern drawing
* JOG operation is allowed
[] INPUT RANGE

-50 - +50
#DROP POS. HsLg #DROP POS. HsLg Adjust pattern #DROP POS. HsLg
SELECT :Y BASE [ENTER] Y BASE DRAW :ent drawing Y BASE 1-2 : 0. 0
[ENTER] End of drawing/[END] 1-3
1-4
[ ]/[]
[]
INPUT RANGE
-50 - +50
#DROP POS. HsLg #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT Adjust pattern #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT
SELECT :DRAFT ADJUST :Y Si Y Si DRAW :ent drawing Y Si H1-H2 : 0. 0
SELECT :FINE [ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER] End of drawing/[END] H1-H3, H1-H4
[ ]/[]
[] INPUT RANGE
-50 - +50
#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT Adjust pattern #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT
ADJUST :Y Re Y Re DRAW :ent drawing Y Re H1-H2 : 0. 0
[ENTER] [ENTER] End of drawing/[END] H1-H3, H1-H4
[ ]/[]
[] INPUT RANGE
-50 - +50
ADJUST :Y Bi Y Bi DRAW :ent drawing Y Bi H1-H1 : 0. 0
[ENTER] [ENTER] End of drawing/[END]
[ ]/[]
[] INPUT RANGE
[ ]/[] -50 - +50
ADJUST :FINE Y Si FINE-Y Si DRAW :ent drawing Y Si H1-H2 : 0. 0
[ENTER] [ENTER] End of drawing/[END] H1-H3,H1-H4
[ ]/[]
[]INPUT RANGE
-50 - +50
ADJUST :FINE Y Re FINE-Y Re DRAW :ent drawing Y Re H1-H2 : 0. 0
[ENTER] [ENTER] End of drawing/[END] H1-H3,H1-H4
[ ]/[]
[] INPUT RANGE
-50 - +50
ADJUST :FINE Y Bi FINE-Y Bi DRAW :ent drawing Y Bi H1-H1 : 0. 0
[ENTER] [ENTER] End of drawing/[END]
[ENTER]
#DROP POS. HsLg #DROP POS. HsLg
SELECT :BASIS SET BASIS SET :ent
2- 59
HEAD WASH
See p.2- 57 As for the detail of “HEAD WASH” ( p. 2- 27) .
ADJUST
HEAD WASH <ent> [ENTER]
Ink discharge. Remove all wshing Do you discharge a

Remove cartridges. liquid cartridges. mainte.wash.liquid ?
MMCC YYKK KKYY CCMM 1234 5678 9ABC DEFG No < > Yes []
[END] []
Confirmation of the state Confirmation of the state
Is the
Is the NG Waste tank Remove a maint.wash.
NG Waste tank waste ink tank normal
waste ink tank normal
? WARNING ? (Recovered) WARNING liquid cartridge.
OK (Recovered) OK
[ENTER] There is a CARTRIDGE
[ENTER]
It'sBeingDischarged.
Being discharged PLEASE WAIT Confirmation of the state
PLEASE WAIT Is the NG Waste tank
waste ink tank normal WARNING
∗∗∗∗∗∗–––––––––––––– ?
∗∗∗∗∗∗–––––––––––––– OK (Recovered)
End of discharge End of discharge [ENTER]
Is the Is the Being Discharged.
NG discharging?state normal NG discharging?state normal Please Wait
OK OK
∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––
Set all washing WIPER CLEANING End of discharge
liquid cartridges. A >:TransLiquidAbsorbe
1234 5678 9ABC DEFG COMPLETED :ent
Confirmation of the state [ENTER] END< >CONTINUE []
NG Waste tank []
Is the waste ink >:TransLiquidAbsorbe
tank normal? WARNING v: It is washed again []
OK (Recovered)
[ENTER]
END < >CONTINUE A Set a TRANS liquid
cartridges.
It is being absorbed
V WASH
[] []
PLEASE WAIT CARTRIDGE : none
Set all TRANS liquid Confirmation of the state
∗∗∗∗∗∗–––––––––––––– cartridges. Is the NG Waste tank
End of suction waste ink tank normal WARNING
Is 1234 5678 9ABC DEFG ?
the suction state OK (Recovered)
NG normal? Confirmation of the state [ENTER]
OK Is the NG Waste tank It is being absorbed
waste ink tank normal WARNING Please Wait
Remove all wshing ?
liquid cartridges. OK (Recovered)
[ENTER] ∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––
1234 5678 9ABC DEFG It is being absorbed End of suction
Please Wait Is the
Confirmation of the state NG suction state normal
?
Is the NG Waste tank ∗∗∗∗∗∗–––––––––––––– OK
waste ink tank normal WARNING
? End of suction Remove a TRANS
OK (Recovered) Is the
[ENTER] suction state normal liquid cartridges.
NG ?
It'sBeingDischarged. OK
PLEASE WAIT There is a CARTRIDGE
Remove all TRANS
∗∗∗∗∗∗–––––––––––––– liquid cartridges. Confirmation of the state
Is the NG Waste tank
End of discharge waste ink tank normal WARNING
Is the 1234 5678 9ABC DEFG ?
OK (Recovered)
NG discharge state
?
normal
Confirmation of the state [ENTER]
OK Is the NG Waste tank Being Discharged.
waste ink tank normal WARNING Please Wait
Set all washing ?
OK (Recovered)
liquid cartridges. [ENTER] ∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––
Being Discharged. End of discharge
1234 5678 9ABC DEFG Please Wait Is the
Confirmation of the state NG discharging?state normal
Is the NG Waste tank ∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––
waste ink tank normal WARNING OK
? End of discharge
OK (Recovered) Is the
[ENTER]
NG discharging?state normal End of discharge
It is being absorbed OK
PLEASE WAIT
∗∗∗∗∗∗–––––––––––––– Waste tank WARNING
End of suction No waste ink tank, Replace a
Is the or a tank is FULL. waste ink tank.
NG suction state normal <ENT>keyHIT is after <ENT>keyHIT is after
? theTANK set or exchg the TANK exchange.
OK
2- 60
Operation Flow
2-3-6. TEST
TEST 1/4 As for the detail of “TEST Function” ( p. 2- 33) .
DPI :360x360
[ENTER] [ENTER] SCAN:Uni-D / PASS:1 [ENTER]
#TEST #CHECK PATTERN X=123450 Y=1234
CHECK PATTERN <ent> PATTERN:100% COLOR :KMCY
[END] PATTERN:50% [END] 6 colors= :KMCYmc
[FUNCTION] PATTERN:25% 8 colors= :KMCY1234
or
[ ]/[] PATTERN:12.5%
PATTERN:6.25%
PATTERN:NOZZLE CHECK
[ ]/[] DPI :360x360
[ENTER] SCAN:Uni-D / PASS:1
#CHECK PATTERN [ENTER]
X=123450 Y=1234
PATTERN:COLOR CHART DENSITY :ALL
[END]
[ ]/[]
DPI :360x360
[ENTER] SCAN:Uni-D / PASS:1
#CHECK PATTERN [ENTER]
X=123450 Y=1234
PATTERN:DROP/POS CHK
[END]
JOG operation is allowed
PRE PRT AFT Alternatively displayed at drawing PRE PRT AFT
35°C 40°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 50°C
[ENTER]
#CHECK PATTERN/100% PATTERN 360x360. W1. 4P.Uni
DRAW :ent DRAWING x1. H1234 0.00m
PRE PRT AFT

[HEATER] 35°C 40°C 50°C
[]/[] : Select (Pre/Print/After)
[HEATER] / [END] 40°C 50°C 35°C [ ]/[] : Adjust temperature
/ 30sec / Error ( 35 40 50 ) Range PRE : OFF, 20~60
PRT : OFF, 20~60
[ENTER] [REMOTE] [TEST] AFT : OFF, 20~70
/ [END]
#CHECK PATTERN100% TEST DRAWING
Hi-SPEED SCAN :OFF
:ON
#TEST #PARAMETER DRAW #PARAMETER DRAW PARAMETER
PARAMETER DRAW <ent> SYSTEM PARAM. <ent> DRAW(SYSTEM) :ent DRAWING
[END] MAINTE PARAM. <ent> [END]
DRAW(MAINTE) :ent
[FUNCTION] CUSTOM PARAM. <ent> DRAW(CUSTOMIZE) :ent
or

[ ]/[ ] RUNNING PARAM. <ent>
EXCHANGE PARAM.<ent>
DRAW(RUNNING) :ent
DRAW(EXCHANGE) :ent
INKSYSTEM PARAM<ent> DRAW(INKSYSTEM) :ent
INKinfor.PARAM. <ent> DRAW(INKINFO) :ent
INKSEQUENCEpara <ent> DRAW(INKSEQ.) :ent
INK TYPE PARAM. <ent> DRAW(INK TYPE) :ent
[ ]/[ ] [ENTER] [ENTER] [ENTER]
#PARAMETER DRAW #PARAMETER DRAW #PARAMETER DRAW PARAMETER
HEADunit PARAM. <ent> UNIT SELECT :ALL DRAW(UNIT-ALL) :ent DRAWING
[END] UNIT SELECT :UNIT-1 [END] DRAW(UNIT-1) :ent
UNIT SELECT :UNIT-2 DRAW(UNIT-2) :ent
[ ]/[] UNIT SELECT :UNIT-3 DRAW(UNIT-3) :ent
UNIT SELECT :UNIT-4 DRAW(UNIT-4) :ent
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#PARAMETER DRAW #PARAMETER DRAW PARAMETER
SERVO PARAMETER<ent>
[END]
DRAW(SERVO) :ent DRAWING
TEST PARAMETER <ent> DRAW(TEST) :ent
CORRECT PARAM. <ent> DRAW(CORRECT) :ent
ADJUST PARAM. <ent> DRAW(ADJUST) :ent
NCU PARAMETER <ent> DRAW(NCU) :ent
[ENTER]
#TEST #ALL PATTERN
ALL PATTERN <ent> DRAW :ent
[FUNCTION] [END]
or
[ ]/[]
2- 61
TEST 2/4 ( To the previous page )
[ENTER]
#TEST
MOTOR TEST <ent> See p.2- 65
[END]
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[] PRE PRT AFT PRE PRT AFT
[ENTER] 35°C 40°C 50°C [ENTER] 35°C 40°C 50°C
[]/[] : Select (Pre/Print/After)
#TEST #HEATER TEST 40°C 50°C 35°C [ ]/[] : Adjust temperature
HEATER TEST <ent> TEMPERATURE <ent> ( 35 40 50 ) Range PRE : OFF, 20~60
[END] [HEATER] PRT : OFF, 20~60
[ ]/[] AFT : OFF, 20~70
PRE PRT AFT #HEATER TEST /LED

35°C 40°C 50°C [ENTER] PRE PRT AFT
#HEATER TEST HEAT :OFF OFF OFF [[]/[ ] : Select (Pre/Print/After)
]/[] : Switch (ON/OFF)
LED <ent> CONST.:OFF OFF OFF
[HEATER]
[ ]/[]
PRE PRT AFT PRE PRT AFT

[FUNCTION] 35°C 40°C 50°C [ENTER] 35°C 40°C 50°C
or []/[] : Select (Pre/Print/After)
[ ]/[] #HEATER TEST <15F> <1E2> <1F0> [ ]/[] : Switch (ON/OFF)
SSR <ent> OFF OFF OFF
[HEATER] * Heater temperature control is cut off.
[ ]/[] Temperature and AD input value are displayed in
a range of 0~100 °C.
PRE PRT AFT PRE PRT AFT
35°C 40°C 50°C [ENTER] 35°C 40°C 50°C
#HEATER TEST #POWER RELAY SW
POWER RELAY SW<ent> ON [ ]/[] : Switch (ON/OFF)
[HEATER]
HD1 HD2 HD3 HD4

[ENTER] 40 40 40 40 [°C]
#TEST 40 40 40 40:R-SW
WARMING TEST <ent> . o . o : ON
[END]
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[] Change condition Change condition Change condition
[ENTER] IN UP/DOWN KEY. [ENTER] IN UP/DOWN KEY. [ENTER] IN UP/DOWN KEY. [ENTER]
#TEST #ACTION TEST #ACTION TEST #ACTION TEST
ACTION TEST <ent> VACUUM FAN :LOW BUILTinDEOD.FAN :OFF FS FAN :LOW
[END] :MID [END] :ON [END] :MID
:HIGH [ ]/[] :HIGH
:L.L. :L.L.
:Poff [ ]/[] :Poff [ ]/[]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#ACTION TEST #ACTION TEST #ACTION TEST
Y-CUTTER :DOWN SUCK VALVE-1 :CLOSE SUCK VALVE-2 :CLOSE
[FUNCTION] :UP :OPEN :OPEN
or
[ ]/[] [ ]/[] [ ]/[] [ ]/[]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#ACTION TEST #ACTION TEST DEOD.FAN & DRY FAN
WIPERwashVALVE:CLOSE HDC FAN :OFF OFF OFF
:OPEN :ON ON ON
[ ]/[ ] [ ]/[] [ ]/[]
[ENTER]
#TEST #SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST
SENSOR TEST <ent> SET LEVER :OFF WIPER :OFF TAKE-UP :OFF
[ ]/[] [ ]/[] [ ]/[]
[END]
#SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST #SENSOR TEST

R.PAPTER :OFF FRONT COVER :OFF MEDIA JAM :OFF
[ ]/[] [ ]/[] [ ]/[]
Y-ORIGIN :OFF WasteTANK :OFF/OFF INK LEAK :OFF
[ ]/[] [ ]/[] [ ]/[]
STATION :OFF HEATER POW :OFF Interlock CABLE :OFF
( Continued to next page ) [ ]/[] [ ]/[] [ ]/[]
2- 62
Operation Flow

TEST 3/4
[ENTER]
#TEST #CAP SENSOR
CAP SENSOR <ent> ON (∗∗∗)
[END]
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[] [ENTER]
#TEST #PAPER SENSOR #KEYBOARD TEST
PAPER SENSOR <ent> ∗∗∗( ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗) JOG operation
Key->[USER TYPE]
[END]
[FUNCTION]
is allowed
Key->[INFORMAITION]
or Key->[ST.MAINTE]
[ ]/[] Indication of a name Key->[HEATER]
[ENTER] of the pushed key. Key->[TEST]
#TEST #KEYBOARD TEST Key->[LEFT]
KEYBOARD TEST <ent> Key-> NONE Key->[UP]
Key->[DOWN]
Key->[RIGHT]
[END] Key->[CLEANING]
Test is finished. Key->[FEED COMP.]
[FUNCTION]
Key->[CLEAR]
or Key->[FUNCTION]
[ ]/[] #KEYBOARD TEST [END] Key->[REMOTE]
[END]-> END TEST Key->[ENTER]
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
[ENTER] !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! """"""""""""""""""""
#TEST !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! """""""""""""""""""" ####################
LCD TEST <ent> !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! """""""""""""""""""" #################### $$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
[END] * Displayed items are changed at predetermined interval and at 1 line unit.
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[] Push and Change [ENTER] KEY : SET UP 2006.11.23 09:15
[ENTER] ENTER key. [END] KEY : CANCEL -> 2005.12.13 11:50
#TEST #TIMER CHECK #TIMER CHECK #TIMER CHECK
TIMER CHECK <ent> 2005.01.01 01:23:45 2005.01.01 01:23:00 [ ]/[] : Changing values DoYou change it? :ent
[END] [ENTER]/[END] []/[] : Shifting columns
[ENTER] : Set ( Starting at 0 second)
* A display after setting a future time

* Returning to the setting before previous
setting is allowed.
[FUNCTION]
or
FUNC. It's returned
before the change.
2006.11.23 09:15
-> 2005.12.13 11:50 →
Change-1 Change-2 Return →
Returning to Change-2 can be allowed
⇒
[ ]/[]
[FUNCTION]
#TIMER CHECK #TIMER CHECK (returning to Change-1 is not allowed).
2006.11.23 09:15:00 [ENTER]/[END] DoYou return it?:ent However, elapsing time after changing to
the time before changing is added.
ON:30secWaitAftWrite ∗∗∗ RUNNING ∗∗∗ [END]

[ENTER] (SDRAM SIZE = 0.5GB) (SDRAM SIZE = 0.5GB) RESTART
#TEST #MEMORY CHECK #MEMORY CHECK #MAIN.SDRAM CHECK
MEMORY CHECK <ent> CHECK:MAIN.SDRAM WAIT TIME :OFF COUNT= 1 ∗ MAIN.SDRAM ERROR ∗
address = h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
:ON (ERROR) WriteData=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
Read Data=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
[ ]/[]
∗∗∗ RUNNING ∗∗∗ [END]
RESTART
[FUNCTION] #MEMORY CHECK #MAIN.S-RAM CHECK
or
[ ]/[] CHECK:MAIN.S-RAM COUNT= 1 ∗ MAIN.S-RAM ERROR ∗
[ENTER] address = h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
(ERROR) WriteData=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
[ ]/[]
RESTART
#MEMORY CHECK #MAIN.F-ROM CHECK
CHECK:MAIN.F-ROM COUNT= 1
[ENTER]
(ERROR) ∗∗∗∗∗ ERROR 85 ∗∗∗∗∗
ROM HASH
[ ]/[]
HALT !
2- 63
TEST 4/4
RESTART
#MEMORY CHECK #BACKUP.SRAM CHECK
CHECK:BACKUP.SRAM
[ENTER]
COUNT= 1
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
∗BACKUP.SRAM ERROR∗
address = h'
(ERROR) ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
WriteData=h'
[ ]/[]
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[]
RESTART
#MEMORY CHECK #MEMORY CHECK #HEAD-1.EEPROM CHECK
CHECK:HEAD.EEPROM SELECT :HEAD-1 COUNT= 1 ∗HEAD1.EEPROM
[ENTER] SELECT :HEAD-2 [ENTER] (ERROR)
ERROR∗
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
address = h'
SELECT
SELECT
:HEAD-3
:HEAD-4 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
WriteData=h'
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#TEST #SKEW CHECK #SKEW CHECK
SKEW CHECK <ent>
[END]
FEED :1m ∗∗ FEED :1m ∗∗
INPUT RANGE INPUT RANGE
10 - 10000mm 1 - 1000
[FUNCTION] #MEDIA CUTTING TOOL [ENTER] #MEDIA CUTTING TOOL [ENTER] #MEDIA CUTTING TOOL
or
[ ]/[] [REMOTE] + [FUNCTION]
LENGTH :500mm COUNT :10 COUNT :10
* A cycle of 1 ~ 3 is repeated
[ENTER]
HEAD-1=
[ENTER] HEAD-2=
°C (
°C (
∗∗∗
)
∗∗∗
)
∗∗∗∗
∗∗∗∗
predetermined times.
1. Designated length feed
2. Width detection
#TEST
TEMPERATURE.CHK<ent>
#TEMPERATURE.CHK
HEAD TEMP. <ent>
HEAD-3=
HEAD-4=
°C (
°C (
∗∗∗
)
∗∗∗
)
∗∗∗∗
∗∗∗∗
3. Cut
[END]
[ ]/[]
[ENTER]
#TEMPERATURE.CHK HEAD-1=OK HEAD-2=NG
NOZZLE TEMP. <ent> HEAD-3=OK HEAD-4=OK
[ ]/[] HEAD1-1=
[ENTER] HEAD1-2=
∗∗∗
∗∗∗°C°C ((∗∗∗∗
∗∗∗∗)) HEAD3-1=
HEAD3-2=
∗∗∗
∗∗∗°C°C ((∗∗∗∗
∗∗∗∗))
HEAD2-1=∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗) ∗∗∗
#TEMPERATURE.CHK
HEAT SINK TEMP.<ent> HEAD2-2=∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)
HEAD4-1=
HEAD4-2= ∗∗∗°C°C ((∗∗∗∗
∗∗∗∗))
[FUNCTION]
or [ ]/[]
[ ]/[] [ENTER]
#TEMPERATURE.CHK #SLIDER TEMP.
SLIDER TEMP. <ent> ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗
°C ( )
[ ]/[]
[ENTER]
#TEMPERATURE.CHK #SIDE TEMP.
SIDE TEMP. <ent> ∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)
3.3V -> 3.3V (∗∗∗∗)

[ENTER] 5V -> 5.0V (∗∗∗∗)
#TEST 24V -> 24.0V (∗∗∗∗)
VOLTAGE CHECK <ent> 42V -> 42.0V (∗∗∗∗)
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[]
[END]
[ENTER]
∗ABN.COURSE=>
I/F.LoopBack ERROR∗
CH1(DMA)
#TEST #I/F TEST [ENTER] I/F.LOOP BACK (ERROR) WriteData=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
I/F TEST <ent> LOOP BACK <ent> COUNT=1 Read Data=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
[END]
[FUNCTION]
[ ]/[] ∗address
I/F.MOMORY ERROR ∗
= h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
or
[ ]/[]
[ENTER] (ERROR)
#I/F TEST I/F.MEMORY CHECK WriteData=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
MEMORY CHECK <ent> COUNT=1 Read Data=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
[ENTER]
#TEST See p.2- 66
ENCODER TEST <ent>
[FUNCTION] [END]
or
[ ]/[] [ENTER]
#TEST See p.2- 67
INK CARTRIDGE <ent>
[FUNCTION] [END]
or
[ ]/[] [ENTER]
#TEST See p.2- 67
WASH CARTRIDGE <ent>
[END]
2- 64
Operation Flow
MOTOR TEST
See p.2- 62
#TEST [ENTER]
MOTOR TEST <ent>
[ENTER]
#X SERVO MOTOR Operation #X SERVO ∗ RUNNING ∗
start COUNT= 0
#MOTOR TEST S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗G [END] S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗G
X SERVO MOTOR <ent> X=∗∗∗∗∗mm X=∗∗∗∗∗mm
[END] [ENTER]
[ ]/[]
[ENTER]
#Y SERVO MOTOR Operation #Y SERVO ∗ RUNNING ∗
start COUNT= 0
#MOTOR TEST S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗G [END] S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗G
Y SERVO MOTOR <ent> Y=∗∗∗∗∗mm Y=∗∗∗∗∗mm [HEATER]/[END]/30second
[ENTER] /Error
[ ]/[]
[ENTER] [HEATER]
#XY SERVO MOTOR Operation #XYservo ∗ RUNNING ∗
start COUNT= 0 PRE PRT AFT
35°C 40°C 50°C
#MOTOR TEST S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗G S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗G
XY SERVO MOTOR<ent> X=∗∗∗∗∗mm X=∗∗∗∗∗mm 40°C 50°C 35°C
[ENTER] [ENTER] ( 35 40 50 )
[FUNCTION]
[END] []/[] : Select (Pre/Print/After)
#XY SERVO MOTOR [ENTER] #XYservo ∗ RUNNING ∗ [ ]/[] : Adjust temperature
COUNT= 0 Range PRE : OFF, 20~60
PRT : OFF, 20~60
[ ]/[] S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗G S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗G AFT : OFF, 20~70
Y=∗∗∗∗∗mm [END] Y=∗∗∗∗∗mm
(End of count)
[ENTER]
100pps : 0s :1,CONT Cap OFF WIPER ∗ RUNNING ∗
4000 : 60 :1000 test operation start COUNT= 0
#MOTOR TEST SPEED :WAIT :COUNT [END] SPEED :WAIT :COUNT
WIPER MOTOR <ent> 100 : 0 :CONT. Return to the state 100 : 0 :CONT.
[ENTER] 100~4000 pps (at 100 pps unit) before starting the test
* Terminate with END key at
[ ]/[] CONTINUE, 1~1000 times CONTINUE
(at 1 time unit) (End of count)
[ENTER]
100pps : 0s :1,CONT
Cap OFF
4000 : 60 :1000 • head moving CAP ∗ RUNNING ∗
test operation[END] COUNT= 0
#MOTOR TEST SPEED :WAIT :COUNT SPEED :WAIT :COUNT
CAP MOTOR <ent> 100 : 0 :CONT. (Head moving•cap ON) 100 : 0 :CONT.
[ENTER] 100~4000 pps (at 100 pps unit) * Terminate with END key at CONTINUE
CONTINUE, 1~1000 times
[ ]/[] (at 1 time unit) (End of count)
[ENTER]
Moving to the sta-
100pps : 0s :1,CONT Headup/down∗RUNNING∗
4000 : 60 :1000 COUNT= 0
tion lowest position
operation start
#MOTOR TEST SPEED :WAIT :COUNT [END] SPEED :WAIT :COUNT

HEADup/downMTR <ent> 100 : 0 :CONT. (Return to the state 100 : 0 :CONT.
before starting the test)
[ENTER] 100~4000 pps (at 100 pps unit) * Terminate with END key at CONTINUE
CONTINUE, 1~1000 times
[ ]/[] (at 1 time unit) (End of count)
*1 [ENTER] *1 A guide corresponding to the
Cap OFF• cursor set position is dis-
PUMP MOTOR SELECT. valve close test PUMP ∗ RUNNING ∗
operation start COUNT= 0
[END] FORW. / REVR.
#MOTOR TEST PUMP=1234 DIR=FORW. PUMP=1234 DIR=FORW.
PUMP MOTOR <ent> SPD=1017 (Return to the state SPD=1017
before starting the test) 100 - 4000pps
[ENTER] FORW. / REVER. * Terminate with END key at
[ ]/[] CONT. /100~4000
CONTINUE
[ENTER]
1000pps: 0s Test Operation TORQUE ∗ RUNNING ∗
4000 : 60 start COUNT= 0
#MOTOR TEST SPEED :WAIT SPEED :WAIT
TAKE-UP TORQUE <ent> 100 :0 100 :0
[ ]/[] [ENTER] 100~4000 pps (at 100 pps unit)
[ENTER]
Test Operation ∗∗∗ RUNNING ∗∗∗ ∗∗∗ RUNNING ∗∗∗
start [PROPER ROTATION] [REVERSE ROTATION]
#MOTOR TEST #TAKE-UP MOTOR #TAKE-UP MOTOR ∗∗∗ RUNNING ∗∗∗
TAKE-UP MOTOR <ent> START :ent START :ent [STOP]
2- 65
ENCODER TEST
See p.2- 64
#TEST [ENTER]
ENCODER TEST <ent>
[ENTER] (Normal END) [FUNCTION]

#ENCODER TEST #LINEAR ENCODER Check operation: #ENCODER TEST << Coord.Of point >>
LINEAR ENCODER <ent> ActiveWIDTH :∗∗∗∗mm 3 times Result of a test Ms =∗∗∗∗∗∗ Es= ∗∗∗∗∗
[END] [ENTER] reciprocating M =∗∗∗∗.∗ E =∗∗∗∗.∗ Mm=∗∗∗∗∗∗ Em=∗∗∗∗∗
Mc= 0.0 Ec= 0.0 Mr =∗∗∗∗∗∗ Er= ∗∗∗∗∗
[ ]/[]
[ ]/[] ∗∗∗∗∗ ERROR 08 ∗∗∗∗∗ <<CommonCoord.SYS>>

LinearENCODER :SENSOR ERR(ME-LE) = ∗∗.∗∗mm
(Abnormal) #ENCODER TEST MotorENC = ∗∗∗∗.∗∗mm
ActiveWIDHT :∗∗∗∗mm LinearEND = ∗∗∗∗.∗∗mm
[ENTER] (Normal END)

#ENCODER TEST #CUTTER ENCODER Check operation #CUTTER ENCODER
CUTTER ENCODER<ent> CHECK :ent Result of a test
[ENTER] THICK = ∗.∗∗mm
Pr=∗∗∗∗ Mr=∗∗∗∗
∗∗∗∗∗ ERROR 59 ∗∗∗∗∗

[ ]/[] CUTTER ENCODER
(Abnormal) #CUTTER ENCODER
CHECK :ent

#MEDIA ENCODER Feed operation #MediaENCODER/RESULT
Input feed parameter ERR(M-E)=∗∗.∗∗∗mm
#ENCODER TEST S= 60mm/s A= 0.50G MTR = ∗∗∗∗∗
MEDIA ENCODER <ent> L= 127mm ENC = ∗∗∗∗∗
[ENTER]
[ ]/[]
#ENCODER TEST #POSITIONencoder Check #POSITIONencoder
POSITIONencoder <ent> CHECK :ent operation Result of a test
[ENTER] St =∗∗∗∗
Mv=∗∗∗∗ Rt=∗∗∗∗
∗∗∗∗∗ ERROR 58 ∗∗∗∗∗

POSITIONencoder
(Abnormal) #POSITIONencoder
CHECK :ent
2- 66
Operation Flow
INK CARTRIDGE TEST

See p.2- 64
#TEST [ENTER]
INK CARTRIDGE <ent>
PACK SENSOR
1-3- 56-- --BC -E-G
#INK CARTRIDGE END SENSOR
PACK&END SENSOR<ent> -2-4 --78 9A-- D-F-
[END] [ENTER]
[ ]/[] #CARTRIDGE VALVE
o = OPEN / . = close
#INK CARTRIDGE
CARTRIDGE VALVE<ent> o.o. o. .o .oo . .o. o
[ ]/[] ERROR-LED (o=ON)
o.. o . oo. o.o . .o. o []/[] : Slot selection
#INK CARTRIDGE ACTIVE-LED (o=ON) [ ]/[] : LED pattern changing
CARTRIDGE LED <ent> .. .. o. .o .o. o o.o. [FUNCTION] : Switching ERROR/ACTIVE
[ENTER]
[ ]/[] SLOT. No -> NG A cursorlsMoved. NG
_-> OK , x -> None num.ofTimes confirm.
#INK CARTRIDGE #INK-IC CHECK CNT=∗ CNT=∗ NG=∗
INK-IC CHECK <ent> 1234 5678 9ABC DEFG 12__ _67_ 9__C D_F_ 12__ _67_ 9__C D_F_
[ENTER] [ENTER] [END]
[ENTER]
[ ]/[] ∗DURING THE ∗
Check operation
∗UNUSUAL DETECTION∗
#INK CARTRIDGE #SolenoidVOLTAGE #SolenoidVOLTAGE
SolenoidVOLTAGE <ent> CHECK START :ent Check end operation
CHECK START :ent
[ENTER] [END]
Check end operation
* When an unusual An unusual detection * When an unusual Unusual detection

signal is detected
within 2 minutes ∗∗ SUCCESS ∗∗ signal is not
detected within 2 !! FAILURE !!
after starting the #SolenoidVOLTAGE minutes after #SolenoidVOLTAGE
check starting the check TEST END
(success buzzer) TEST END :ent (failure buzzer) :ent
[ENTER] [ENTER]
WASH CARTRIDGE TEST

See p.2- 64
#TEST [ENTER]
WASH CARTRIDGE<ent>
#WASH CARTRIDGE PACK SENSOR :ON

PACK&END SENSOR<ent> END SENSOR :OFF
[END] [ENTER]

[ ]/[ ]
#WASH CARTRIDGE #CARTRIDGE VALVE [ ]/[] : State change

CARTRIDGE VALVE<ent> OPEN OPEN/close
[ENTER]
[ ]/[ ] ∗∗∗ RUNNING ∗∗∗
#WASH CARTRIDGE #IC CHECK #IC CHECK #IC CHECK
IC CHECK <ent> o CNT=1 NG=0 CNT=1 NG=0
[ENTER]
[ ]/[] ∗DURING THE ∗
Check operation
∗UNUSUAL DETECTION∗
#WASH CARTRIDGE #SolenoidVOLTAGE #SolenoidVOLTAGE
SolenoidVOLTAGE<ent> CHECK START :ent Check end operation
CHECK START :ent
[ENTER] [END]
Check end operation
* When an unusual An unusual detection * When an unusual Unusual detection

signal is detected
within 2 minutes ∗∗ SUCCESS ∗∗ signal is not
detected within 2 !! FAILURE !!
after starting the #SolenoidVOLTAGE minutes after #SolenoidVOLTAGE
check starting the check TEST END
(success buzzer) TEST END :ent (failure buzzer) :ent
[ENTER] [ENTER]
2- 67
2-3-7. PARAMETER
PARAMETER 1/2 As for the detail of “PARAMETER Function” ( p. 2- 49) .
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER SYSTEM PARAMETER [ENTER] ----> 1
SYSTEM PARAM. <ent> 000:COMP. X = 0 000:COMP. X = 0
[END]
[FUNCTION]
or
(If INITIAL=1) ALL PARAMETER [ENTER] Initialization of all
[ ]/[] INITIALIZE OK ? :ent parameters
(If INITIAL=2) SYSTEM PARAMETER [ENTER] Initialization of
INITIALIZE OK ? :ent system parameters
(If INITIAL=3) CLOSED PARAMETER [ENTER] Initialization of
INITIALIZE OK ? :ent non-disclosed
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER MAINTENANCEparameter [ENTER] ----> 1 MAINTENANCEparameter
MAINTE PARAM. <ent> 000:DIR = 0 000:DIR = 0 INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[]
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER CUSTOMIZE PARAMETER [ENTER] ----> 100 CUSTOMIZE PARAMETER
CUSTOM PARAM. <ent> 000:EDGE LV = 50 000:EDGE LV = 50 INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
[END]
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[]
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER RUNNING PARAMETER [ENTER] ----> 3000 RUNNING PARAMETER
RUNNING PARAM. <ent> 000:CAPC.H1 = 0 000:CAPC.H1 = 0 INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
[END]
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[]
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER EXCHANGE PARAMETER [ENTER] ----> 3
EXCHANGE PARAM.<ent> 000:Hd.nn01 = 0 000:Hd.nn01 = 0
[END]
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[]
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER INK-SYSTEM PARAMETER [ENTER] ----> 1 INK-SYSTEM PARAMETER
INKSYSTEM PARAM<ent> 000:LEVELsw = 0 000:LEVELsw = 0 INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
[END]
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[]
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER INK INFOR. PARAMETER [ENTER] ----> 101
INKinfor.PARAM.<ent> 000:VERSION = 100 000:VERSION = 100
[END]
* Displayed only on
[FUNCTION] filled ink type
or
[ ]/[]
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER INKsequencePARAMETER [ENTER] ----> 12345 INKsequencePARAMETER
INKSEQUENCEpara<ent> 000:POWON.F = 0 000:POWON.F = 0 INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
[END] * Displayed only on
or
[ ]/[]
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER INK-TYPE PARAMETER [ENTER] ----> 0x0060 INK-TYPE PARAMETER
INKTYPE PARAM.<ent> 000:DE0D0sw = 0 000:DE0D0sw = 0x0040 INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
[END] * Displayed only on
or
[ ]/[]
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER #HEADunit PARAM [ENTER] #HEADunit-1 PARAM. [ENTER]
HEADunit PARAM.<ent> HEAD SELECT :UNIT-1 RANGE SEL. :0 - 511
[END]
HEAD SELECT :UNIT-2 RANGE SEL :512-1023
HEAD SELECT :UNIT-3
HEAD SELECT :UNIT-4
[FUNCTION]
or
[ ]/[]
HEADunit-1PARA/ 0 + [ENTER] ----> 1 [ENTER] HEADunit-1 PARAM.
000:SHOT1.0 = 0 000:SHOT1.0 = 0 INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
2- 68
Operation Flow
PARAMETER 2/2 ( To the previous page )
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER SERVO PARAMETER [ENTER]

----> 0x000d SERVO PARAMETER
SERVO PARAMETER<ent> 000:Cycle = 0x000c 000:Cycle = 0x000c INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
[END]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER TEST PARAMETER [ENTER]

----> 1 TEST PARAMETER
TEST PARAMETER<ent> 000:H1A.drv = 0 000:H1A.drv = 0 INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
[END]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#PARAMETER #CORRECT PARAM. #USER CORRECT PARAM. [ENTER]
CORRECT PARAM.<ent> SELECT :USER CRCT SELECT :TYPE-1

[END] [END]
SELECT :TYPE-2
SELECT :TYPE-3
SELECT :TYPE-4
SELECT :Y BASE
[ ]/[ ]
[ENTER]
USER CRCT./ TYPE-1 ----> -1

000:MODE1NR = 0 000:MODE1NR = 0
[END] [END]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
#CORRECT PARAMETER USER BASIS PARAMETER ----> -1

SELECT :USER BASIS 000:LoMD1NR = 0 000:LoMD1NR = 0
[END] [END]

[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ ]/[ ]
#CORRECT PARAMETER #HEAD CORRECT PARAM. #HEAD CORRECT /HsLo

SELECT :HEAD CRCT SELECT :Hi.SPEED/Lo SELECT :MODE-1
[END] [END]
SELECT :Hi.SPEED/Hi SELECT :MODE-2
SELECT :Std.SPEED/Lo SELECT :MODE-3
SELECT :Std.SPEED/Hi SELECT :MODE-4
SELECT :Y BASE
[ENTER]
HEAD CRCT./HsLo.MD-1 ----> 0

000:RESERVE = 0 000:RESERVE = 0
[END] [END]
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER ADJUST PARAMETER [ENTER]

----> 0 ADJUST PARAMETER
ADJUST PARAM. <ent> 000:RESERVE = 0 000:RESERVE = 0 INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
[END]
[ FUNCTION ]
[
or
]/[ ]
[ENTER]
#PARAMETER NCU PARAMETER [ENTER]

----> 0 NCU PARAMETER
NCU PARAMETER <ent> 000:RESERVE = 0 000:RESERVE = 0 INITIALIZE OK ? :ent
[END]
2- 69
2- 70
CHAPTER 3 Overhaul / Adjustment
Contents
3-1. Outline ......................................................................... 3-2
3-1-1. Precautions for disassembly and reassembly ...... 3-2

3-1-2. Tools and jigs ........................................................... 3-3
3-1-3. Disassembly and Reassembly Procedure ................. 3-4
3-2. Overhaul of Ink-related Parts ................................... 3-6
3-3. Overhaul of PCBs ..................................................... 3-69
3-4. Overhaul of Sensors ............................................... 3-109
3-5. Overhaul of Driving Parts ..................................... 3-161
3-5. Overhaul of Driving Parts ..................................... 3-161
3- 1
3-1. Outline
This chapter describes disassembly and reassembly of JV5-130S/160S. The description given here is chiefly of
disassembly procedures. As a rule, reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly. For reassembly, however,
description is added as needed, for example, if the procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure or
if any precautions are to be taken.
Where any adjustment is to be made in reassembly process, the adjustment procedure is described with the heading
“Adjust/Confirm”.
3-1-1. Precautions for disassembly and reassembly

Be sure to follow the precautions shown below before starting disassembly and reassembly.
Be sure to turn off the main power switch (behind the printer) unless otherwise instructed, to prevent
human electric shock or circuit damage. (Turning off the power switch on the front panel is
insufficient.)
For disassembly and reassembly, be sure to wear gloves to avoid injury.
For servicing, place the printer on a firm floor with sufficient space around it.
Take great care to handle the printer, which is very heavy. At least five persons must cooperate to
install or remove the leg assembly to or from the main body.
Use only the specified tools. (See P.3- 3 )
Do not use any lubricants or adhesives other than specified.
When handling a PCB assembly, never touch any elements on the PCB assembly with your bare hand;
otherwise static electricity may arise to damage elements.
To touch any element, be sure to use a grounding band.
In reassembly, put wiring for every electric part in position.
(Otherwise, a cable may come in contact with a sharp edge or the noise resistance margin may
decrease.)
If it is needed to operate the printer with cover removed, take care not to get injured with any moving
part.
Be very careful to handle cutter blade to avoid human injury or damage of peripheral elements. It is
very sharp.
Be sure to certainly join connectors and FPCs. Be careful to avoid insufficient or skewed insertion.
To remove a part for which procedure is not described, carefully observe its installation status in
advance. Refer to the part catalog as needed.
3- 2
Outline
3-1-2. Tools and jigs
Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly
Name Remarks
Phillips screwdriver Type 1 For M2
Type 2 For M3 to5 (L=260 or more)
Type 3 for M3 to 5
Slotted screwdriver Long side 2.5mm for removing E-rings
Spanner (Box wrench) Width across flats: 5 mm
Width across flats: 5.5 mm
Width across flats: 7 mm
Hexagon wrench 1.5mm for M3 SSWP
2.0mm for M4 SSWP
2.5mm for M3 cap bolts (L=170)
Spanner Width across flats: 5.0mm
Width across flats: 5.5mm for M3 nuts and hexagon stud
Width across flats: 7.0mm for M4 nuts
Tweezers To prevent the cable from being pulled when disconnecting the connector.
Long-nose pliers
Nippers
Soldering iron, Solder
Scale 150, 500mm
Loupe About 50x to 60x magnification
Protection glasses
Gloves To keep hands clean, and for safety.
Adhesive agent LOCKTITE242 (for locking screws)
Insulation lock L=150 or less (UL-approved product)
Nitroflon tape or acetate fabric tape As required (UL-approved product)
Adjustment tools
Name Code Remarks

Trimmer adjustment screwdriver For adjustment of trimmers on the power supply PCB.
Tester
Bar type tension gauge 500 g
Ink line airtight tester OPT-J0094
All Cap base positioning tool OPT-J0098
A Cap base positioning tool OPT-J0099
Media Jam/ Cutter unit height OPT-J0108
positioning tool
3- 3
3-1-3. Disassembly and Reassembly Procedure

The chart below shows the disassembly procedure.
MF cover C
Covers
Overhaul of Ink-related Parts IO PCB HDC PCB USB PCB
( p. 3- 6 )
( p. 3- 78 ) ( p. 3- 77 ) ( p. 3- 79 )
Overhaul of PCBs
( p. 3- 69 ) Main PCB
( p. 3- 70 )
Overhaul of Sensors
( p. 3- 109 )
Overhaul of Driving Parts

( p. 3- 161 ) Pump cover T

( p. 3- 161 ) BOX Relay PCB Sucker BOX Pump Motor Assembly S Pump Assembly
( p. 3- 90 ) ( p. 3- 61 ) ( p. 3- 35 ) ( p. 3- 33 )
Maintenance cover L
Ink Leakage Sensor L Maintenance Cover Sensor L Left cover

( p. 3- 153 ) ( p. 3- 151 )
B Rear cover L
R Heater Cover Assy. A Heater Cover Assy. Heater PCB X Pulley, X Belt X-axis Motor Assembly
( p. 3- 204 ) ( p. 3- 193 ) ( p. 3- 88 ) ( p. 3- 165 ) ( p. 3- 162 )
Paper Sensor P Heater Cover Assy.

( p. 3- 136 ) ( p. 3- 198 )
Media Rotary Encoder Assembly

( p. 3- 139 )
Take-up cover ICU cover F
M Motor Take-up PCB Ink Unit PCB ICU cover R

( p. 3- 186 ) ( p. 3- 105 ) ( p. 3- 98 )
Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly LED PCB

( p. 3-42 ) ( p. 3- 103 )
Waste ink tank bracket

assy. Drying FAN assy. MF cover R
Waste Tank Sensor Drying Fan Fork PCB

( p. 3- 158 ) ( p. 3- 106 ) SSR Power PCB
( p. 3- 209 ) ( p. 3- 85 )
3- 4
Outline
Open & Close cover

(Dry fan assy.)
Front cover L
Y cover F Front Cover Sensor L Front Cover Sensor R

( p. 3- 147 ) ( p. 3- 149 )
D
Head Cover Jam Sensor
( p. 3- 121 )
A KB cover
Head Unit Damper Assembly Cutter Unit Assy. Keyboard PCB Dot Detection PCB
( p. 3- 7 ) ( p. 3- 57 ) ( p. 3- 189 ) ( p. 3- 92 ) ( p. 3- 96 )
Paper Width Sensor Paper Thickness Encoder Y Encoder Head Up/Down Encoder
( p. 3- 119 ) ( p. 3- 125 ) ( p. 3- 129 ) ( p. 3- 132 )
Maintenance cover R
Right cover Cap Head assy.

( p. 3- 37 )
Head Relay PCB
( p. 3- 81 )
Wiper Wash Solenoid
( p. 3- 206 )
D
Cap Base 1H
( p. 3- 38 )
C
Origin Sensor Cap Sensor Ink Leakage Sensor S

( p. 3- 110 ) ( p. 3- 117 ) ( p. 3- 153 )
Wiper Sensor Maintenance Cover Sensor R

( p. 3- 112 ) ( p. 3- 152 )
Rear cover R Major Parts for Wash Cartridge Assembly ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge) Side Relay PCB
( p. 3- 51 ) ( p. 3- 101 ) ( p. 3- 99 )
Head UD Motor Y-axis Motor Assembly B

( p. 3- 184 ) ( p. 3- 167 ) Y Drive Pulley Assembly, Y-Drive Transmission Belt
( p. 3- 171 )
A
Y Drive Belt
( p. 3- 175 )
Station Motor Clamp Sensor Bottom Point Sensor Ink Leakage Sensor R
( p. 3- 182 ) ( p. 3- 113 ) ( p. 3- 115 ) ( p. 3- 153 )
A C
NCU Wiper Motor Slider PCB
( p. 3- 63 ) ( p. 3- 179 ) ( p. 3- 82 )
3- 5
3-2. Overhaul of Ink-related Parts
Ink-related parts of JV5-130S/160S are shown below.

Part Reference page Part Reference page
3-2-1. Head Unit p. 3 - 7 3-2-6. Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly p. 3 - 42
3-2-2. S Pump Assembly p. 3 - 33 3-2-7. Major Parts for Wash Cartridge Assembly p. 3 - 51
3-2-3. Pump Motor Assembly p. 3 - 35 3-2-8. Damper Assembly p. 3 - 57
3-2-4. Cap Head assy. p. 3 - 37 3-2-9. Sucker BOX p. 3 - 61
3-2-5. Cap Base 1H p. 3 - 38 3-2-10. NCU p. 3 - 63
~Ink Cartridge Assembly ~ ~ HEAD Assy ~
Presence Sensor
ID Point of Contact PCB
Valve Base
Damper Assembly (x32)
Solenoid Valve
Near End Sensor
Head Unit (x4)
NCU Wash Cartridge Assembly
Cap Head assy. (x4)

Sucker BOX
Cap Base 1H (x4)
S Pump Assembly (x4) Pump Motor Assembly (x4)
3- 6
Overhaul of Ink-related Parts
3-2-1. Head Unit
General
Procedures and instructions for Head Unit Replacement are described here.
Item (Page) Description

1. Preparation (Cleaning within Head) ( p. 3- Head is filled with water-based liquid (S-46) that has been charged on
8) shipment. Use S Head Changing Wash (MS Wash) to clean the head before
replacement.
Otherwise Solvent Ink will react with the liquid to produce precipitates.
2. Head Unit Removing ( p. 3- 9 ) Take off Damper and remove Head Unit.
3. Reassemble Head Unit ( p. 3- 11 ) Put on a new Head Unit.
4. BasisHEADheight ( p. 3- 12 ) Adjust the height of replaced head using a tool based on the platen face.
5. Capping adjusting ( p. 3- 14 ) Execute adjusting of all seven items related to capping.
(Sequential flow)
6. Enter Head ID ( p. 3- 18 ) Enter ID of each Head specified on shipment to equalize variations between
Heads.(As the ID is input automatically, this process is not required in usual
state.)
*Manual input of ID is required when a head unit only (without head memory
PCB) is replaced.
7. Filling of Ink ( p. 3- 19 ) Choose ink charge procedure according to change or no-change of Damper,
and execute “TEST DRAW” after ink charge is completed.
8. Adjustment of the head angle ( p. 3- 20 ) Mechanically adjust the angle of Head Unit.
9. Adjust Head Stagger ( p. 3- 23 ) Mechanically adjust Head Stagger.
10. Drop Position Correction ( p. 3- 26 ) Correct dot positions.
11. Reassemble Covers ( p. 3- 32 ) Put on covers.
Tools and Jigs

•IIH47V Head unit Assembly. (M007034)
•Head inside washing tool (M005027) ←
•Washings for replacement of S-head (M005026) ←
Equivalent to JV3
Equivalent to JV3
•Phillips screwdriver (No.2 M3-M5)

•Hexagon wrench (Opposite side: 2.5 mm Bondhus type magnetized)
•Small slotted screwdriver
•Scope (approx. 50x)
•1.5mm Head gap check tool (OPT-J0097)
•Media for adjustment (Glossy type media)
•Waste cloth (non-woven paper, etc.)
Use protection glasses and gloves during works.

In some working conditions, ink may reach your eye or contact with ink may get your skin
roughed.
Head Unit Replacement procedure is principally the same as for JV3. Damper construction is the
same, while the appearance of Head is different.
3- 7
Caution:Confirm the type of current

ink to choose washing.
1. Preparation Type of washing depends
on ink.
(Cleaning within A washing jig must be
exclusive to a washing. Do
Head) not use the jig for another
washing.
S-dumper Assembly Syringe

* Main washing must be done 1a. Charge Head Changing Washing. 1b. ~ Types of Wash ~
before the replacement of head
assembly. Remove Damper Assembly from ES3 Ink:
Washing Jig, and charge Syringe MILD SOLVENT WASHING LIQUID
with 12-16 cc of S-head Changing (SPC-0294)
HS Ink:
Washing. SOLVENT WASHING LIQUID (SPC-0352)
Caution: Be careful of MS washing

dripping on the operation of
the damper. Wet of FPC
connector may damage the
head.
Caution:Pour washing slowly, or

Head may be damaged.
2a. Connect Damper to Head. 2b. ~ Caution for connection ~ 3a. Slowly pour the washing.
Reassemble S-damper assembly Pour 3-4cc of washing to a nozzle in
with Syringe and join it with about 30 seconds.
Damper Connector on Head.
Caution:Do not touch the nozzle

surface with waste cloth,
nor rub the nozzle surface.
Both may cause discharge
failure.
3b. Use waste cloth to receive liquid

split out of nozzle.
* Conduct the above for every
nozzle (x8). (Charge syringe with
washing every 4 nozzles.)
3- 8
Power ON.
Behind
L.*> [JV5-01]
2. Head Unit [ST.MAINTE]
Removing ST.MAINTENANCE
CARRIDGE OUT <ent> [ENTER]
Execute CARRIAGE OUT. Caution: Be sure to shut the main circuit

breaker on the back to prevent unex-
pected move.
1a. Execute Carriage Out. 1b. ~ Caution for Power-off ~
Turn on the power, select
[ST.MAINTE] → [ENTER] to move
Carriage to above Platen, and turn
off the power.
Right
Open/Close Cover Assy (M007138/9)

Moving fulcrum pin inside and
remove it from the pin hole.
Right Right
2a. Remove Open and close cover 2b. ~ Remove Open/Close cover~ 3a. Remove Front Cover L.
Assy.
Take out fulcrum pin on the left side Open the cover, move the right side
Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and of cover from from frame to remove fulcrum pin inside, and remove it
remove left side of the cover. open/close cover. from the pin hole.
P4x12 SMW (x6)

Left Right
Front Cover L (M601940/41) Maintenance Cover R (M601943)
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
3b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~ 4. Remove Y Cover F. 5. Remove Maintenance Cover R.
Remove a pin from the left shaft Remove screws in both sides (x6),
hole to remove the front cover. and remove the Y cover F.
* Take care not to drop the cover.
Operation with more than 2 persons
3- 9
Left Head Cover (M507559)
B3x6 (x2) 1
Lay Media. 2
3
4
Right (Front)
6. Remove the head cover. 7. Lay Media on Platen to prevent 8a. Confirm the Head to be removed.
from dirt.
Remove screw in both sides to * Hereafter the procedure for Head
remove the head cover. 4 is described.
Damper Lock SP (M800894) x2
Turn toward you. Turn backward.
8b. ~ Remove back head ~ 9a. Remove Damper Lock SP (x2). 9b. ~ Remove Damper Lock SP ~
* To remove Heads 1 and 2, take off Quick Revolve the left and right ends Revolve the left and right ends
Valve in the near side. toward you to remove. toward back side to remove.
Caution: Be careful that pressing

Damper Assembly transparent film spills
ink.
Keep it from something

with sharp tip.
Don’t push
10a.Remove Damper Assembly. 10b.~ Caution for damper ~ 10c.Lay waste cloth
Pull up every Damper Assembly Lay waste cloth under dampers,
(x8) out of Head Unit. while ink won’t leak out of them,
since they are each equipped with
self top valve.
3- 10
Head Unit Holder B

(M507370)
Pull FPC (x2)
Head Unit Assembly

P3x10 SMW (x3)
11a.Remove Head Unit. 12. Remove Head Unit Holder B. 13. Disconnect FPC.
Loosen screws (x3) and remove
Head Unit from Head Base.
Remove connector
Head ID
3. Reassemble
Head Unit
14. Remove connector. Reverse the disassembly procedure * Write down the head ID (24 digits)
to Step8 for reassembly. before replace of head when a
head unit (without head memory
PCB) is replaced.
3 2
1
Notice: Align terminal sides to avoid
wrong side connection and insert Shift to right back
firmly at FPC connection
* Insert carefully not to be upside * Lightly shift Head to the right * Mount damper lock SP so that
down at connecting FPC (x2) to back and tighten the screws in the projrctions of both sides push up
the head. order shown above (diagonally). coupler of the damper.
Nozzle face side : 35 wire Be careful that too much shift
(one side 3 wires are not used) affects print quality.
Damper side : 32 wire
3- 11
4. BasisHEADheight
Manual adjusting of the head height. Set contents are stored in the system parameter.
<Basis head height operation sequence>

No. Item Content
1 Start 1.Cap OFF
2.Move the carriage to the head UP/Down position, and move to the top position of the head height.
3.Carriage Out
2 Manual adjusting Adjust the head height in manual. Read values of the position encoder during adjusting.
3 End Press [ENTER] to store position encoder values from the top to the adjusted position, and finish the
operation.
Head height top position

Place the head height on the position 1.5 mm from the platen face.
(Encoder value: distance from the head height top position: X mm)
X mm
(Position encoder value)
Head
1.5 mm
Platen face
Outline Adjust head height to the [ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON

standard height (1.5mm)
Height 1.5mm is
mechanically with the tool.
(Start with the Maintenance Open Mode)
adjusted by hand.
L.*> [JV5-01]
Tools 1.5mm Head gap check tool [ FUNCTION] #BasisHEADheight
(OPT-J0097) COMPLETED :ent
[ENTER] :adjust value stored
#ADJUST [ FUNCTION] [END] :the value not stored
HEAD ADJUST <ent> or [ ]
#ADJUST *Being Initialized*

1.5mm Head gap check tool BasisHEADheight<ent>
[ ENTER] PLEASE WAIT
(OPT-J0097) End operation after initialization
(Carriage moves over platen)
* Conduct this adjusting with 1. Execute “BasisHEADheight”. 2a. Adjust the gap 1.5mm from platen
keeping the clamp lever down Start with the Maintenance Open with manual operation
Mode and execute “BasisHead- [ENTER] : Store adjust value to end
height ”. [END] : Cancel to end
3- 12
Turn with hand

to up/down
carriage
Tool 1.5 mm
Platen face
2b. ~ Arrangement of tool ~ 3. Insert the tool from the side face 4. Push the head of the tool to the
head frame.
Arrange the tool as the following
* Place the tool so that it can contact

to metal frames in both sides of
the head.
3- 13
5. Capping adjusting
Adjusting capping, wiping position. adjusting values are stored in the system parameter.
<Capping adjusting >

No. Item Content
1 LOWER POS. Contents: The lowest point of the station is adjusted
Down the station to the lowest sensor detection
Adjusting operation: [ ], [] (Station up/down movement)
Adjust value: -20.0 ~ 20.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm)
2 CAPPING POS Contents: Adjust cap Y-position
Up the station to the cap Y-position adjusting height to adjust carriage position.
Adjusting operation: [], [] (Carriage horizontal movement)
Set value: -20.0 ~ 20.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm)
3 CAP HEIGHT Contents: Adjust cap height
Up the station to the gap height adjusting position to adjust
4 WipwePOS(X) Contents: Adjust wiping X position
Down the station to the lowest position, after moving the carriage to the wiping
adjusting position, the wiper ON to execute
Adjusting operation: [ ], [] (Wiper back and forth movement)
Press [FUNCTION] to execute wiping operation once.
Set value: -20.0 ~ 20.0mm (unit: 1.0 mm)
5 WiperHEIGHT Contents: Adjust wiper height
Up the station to the wiper height to adjust
Adjusting operation: [ ], [] (Station UP/DOWN movement)
6 WiperPOS(Y) Contents: Adjust wiping Y-position
Adjusting operation: [], [] (Carriage horizontal movement)
Press [ENTER] to determine adjusting value, and wiper OFF
7 NCU HEIGHT Contents: Adjust NCU height.
(Not executed when the NCU is not installed, “No.8 F.BOX height” starts.
Down the station to the Lowest position, and move the carriage to the NCU height
adjusting position.
Down the station until laser of NCU OFF, down the station at 2.5mm from that
position. (Automatic operation)
If adjusting is failed, “No.8 F.BOX height” starts automatically.
Press [ENTER] to return the carriage to the cap position to execute capping.
The cap moving amount at this moment is the NCU height based on the cap height.
8 F.BOX height Contents: Height of the flushing BOX is adjusted.
Execute when NCU is not installed or “No.7 NCU height” is failed.
Note1: Press [ENTER] to determine adjust value, then move to the following adjust item.
In this adjustment, as adjusting items form a chain of mutually related adjusting items, cor-
rect adjusting parameter values are not entered until adjusting is executed to the end. There-
fore, once adjusting is started, it must be done to the end.
3- 14
[ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON
(Start with the Maintenance Open Mode)
L.*> [JV5-01]
[FUNCTION]
#ADJUST [FUNCTION]
#ADJUST
CAPPING <ent>
[ENTER]
1. Execute “Capping”.
Start with Maintenance Open Mode
and execute“Capping ”.
Carriage
[END]
UP:^ v:DOWN
(-20.0 - +20.0)
#CAPPING
LOWER POS. = 0.0mm
NCU Station
[ ]/ [] : Station up/down
[ENTER] : Next item
[END] : Previous item
Adjust a chevalet to the low-

est position of lift slider
2. Adjust the lowest point of the
station.
Up and down the station to adjust to
the lowest position.
[END] Station height at adjusting is

the position where cap sen-
LEFT:< >:RIGHT sor “ON“
(-20.0 - +20.0)
#CAPPING Carriage
CAPPING POS= 0.0mm
[]/ [] : L/R move carriage
[ENTER] : Next item NCU
[END] : Previous item : Station
3. Adjust head Y position at capping.

Adjust with moving the carriage
horizontally so that center of cap
agree with center of head seeing
from front.
3- 15
Notice: Take care not to push too much

[END]
UP:^ v:DOWN
(-20.0 - +20.0)
Carriage
#CAPPING
CAP HEIGHT = 0.0mm
[ ]/ [] :Station Up/Down n
NCU Station
[ENTER] : Next item
[END] : Previous item Adjust to eliminate gap between all heads and caps.
After adjustiong, push at 3mm with F/W.
The position is “CAP HEIGHT POSITION”.
4. Adjust station cap height at

capping.
Adjust the position where cap con-
tacts to the head with moving the
station horizontally.
[END]
Head 1
REAR:^ v:FRONT
(-20.0 - +20.0)
Head to be adjusted is 1
#CAPPING Head 3
and 3.
WiperPOS (X)= 0mm
Wiper Adjust so that the center
[ ]/ [] : Wiper R/F move of wiper and center of
[FUNCTION]: Wiping head 1&3 agrees in side
NCU view.
[ENTER] : Next item
Station
5. Adjust wiper X position at wiping.

Adjust with moving the wiper rear * Position confirmation is allowed in
and front so that center of wiper wiping operation with
agree with center of head seeing [FUNCTION]
from side.
[END]
UP:^ v:DOWN
(-20.0 - +20.0) 1mm Carriage
#CAPPING
WiperHEIGHT= 0.0mm
[ ]/ [] : Up/Down stattion NCU Station
[FUNCTION]: Wiping operation
[ENTER] : Next item
6. Adjust station wiper height at

wiping.
Adjust so that wiper top contacts to * Position confirmation is allowed in
head at 1mm with moving the sta- wiping operation with
tion up and down. [FUNCTION]
3- 16
[END]
LEFT:< >:RIGHT
(-20.0 - +20.0)
#CAPPING Carriage
WiperPOS (Y)= 0.0mm
[]/ [] : Carriage L/R move
[FUNCTION]: Wiping operation NCU
[ENTER] : Next item Station
7. Adjusting head wiper Y position

at wiping.
Adjust carriage with moving hori- * Position confirmation is allowed in
zontally to the position that head wiping operation with
comes out at wiping operation. [FUNCTION].
~NCU~ Carriage Automatic adjusting to position

2.5mm at 2.5mm from laser beam.
[END]
** Being ADJUSTED **
PLEASE WAIT Laser beam
#CAPPING NCU Station
NCU HEIGHT = *.*mm
[ ]/ [] : Station Up/Down ~No NCU~ Adjust to position at 1mm
[ENTER] : Next item from cap claw. 1mm Carriage
* “F.BoxHEIGHT= 0.0mm ” is NCU
displayed at no NCU Station
8. Automatic adjusting of NCU

height .
* Adjust to position at 1mm from
claws on 4 corners of cap when no
NCU or at failure of automatic
adjusting.
#ADJUST
CAPPING <ent>
[ENTER] : Storing adjusted
value to end.
9. Storing adjusted values in system

parameters to end.
3- 17
[]/ [] :SW

(Start with Maintenance Open Mode)
#HEAD ID
L.*> [JV5-01] SELECT :HEAD-1 [ENTER]: Set
[FUNCTION]
#ADJUST [ENTER]
6. Enter Head ID #ADJUST [FUNCTION] HEAD ADJUST <ent>
#ADJUST [ENTER]
#ADJUST HEAD ID <ent>
HEAD ID <ent>
[ENTER]
* Execute only at replacement of 1. Execute “HEAD ID”. 2a. Choose Head.

head unit (without head memory Start with Maintenance Open Mode
PCB). Choose the substitute head and press
Head of JV-5 supports automatic and execute “HEAD ID ”. [ENTER] to fix it.
ID wntering.
37B7B454
#HEAD ID/HEAD-1(1/2)
******** ********
[]/ [] :Cursor Move
[ ]/ [] :NV input 1
1
3
2 #HEAD ID/HEAD-1(2/2)
******** 76065MW0
[]/ [] :Cursor Move 2
4 [ ]/ [] :NV input
#ADJUST
HEAD ID <ent> ZUTTQM03
[END] : End 3
(Front)
2b. ~ Head Layout ~ 3a. Enter Head ID (24 digits). 3b. ~ Head ID ~
* Input head ID without making a Head ID consists of 3 lines of 8-digit
mistake, and confirm the numeric string. The sequence is from left to
value. right and from upper to lower.
Notice: As updated head ID is overwrit-

ten at power OFF, turn the
power OFF after inputingID.
Turn the power OFF with the
remote SW (on front side).
If the power is turned OFF with
the main Power (on back side),
the head ID is not updated and
overwriting is not executed.
4. Turn the remote SW (front power

switch) to OFF to write the ID.
Turn the power OFF with front
power SW to update head ID.
3- 18
Main Power ON (Back) L.*> [JV5-01]

[FUNCTION]
Power SW ON
FUNCTION
Set Media
7. Filling of Ink MAINTENANCE
L.*> [JV5-01]
HD.MAINTENANCE <ent> [ENTER]
HD.MAINTENANCE
FILL UP INK <ent> [ENTER]
* Note: In order to save ink, use the 1. Set media and turn the power ON. 2. Execute “FILL UP INK”.
proper ink filling procedure and
improve the work efficiency.
FILL UP INK L.*> [JV5-01]

HEAD SELECT :12.34 width:****mm [TEST DRAW]
:12--
Draw Result
:--34 TEST DRAW
[] / []: Cursor Move <ENT> [ENTER] : Execute
[ ] / []: Head Choice Nozzle skip OK
** TEST DRAW **
FILL UP INK
*****---------------
Re-cleaning Power off
(Step. 5b)
HD.MAINTENANCE [END] :Endó¼
FILL UP INK <ent>
3. Choose Head and fill ink. 4. Execute test drawing. 5a. Confirm the result of draw.
* Choose a set of Heads 1 and 2 or * Repeat until nozzle skip is
Heads 3 and 4. removed.
L.*> [JV5-01] [CLEANING]

CLEANING Notice: [HARD] or [NORMAL] of clean-
CLEANING TYPE :NORMAL ing is selected according to noz-
HEAD SELECT 1234 TYPE :SOFT zle missing state.
12-- TYPE :HARD When the number of nozzle
--34 [ ] / [] : SW missing is a few, select[NOR-
[ ] / [] : SW [ENTER] : Set MAL].
[ENTER] : Set
CLEANING ACTIVE
*******-------------
5b. Conduct cleaning.

Select a set of [HARD] ⇒
[NORMAL].
3- 19
8. Adjustment of the head angle

General
A pattern for mechanical adjustment of head slanting is drawn.
Move the head height to the position of 1.5 mm print gap, and select a head to draw the adjusting
pattern.
The Pattern is drawn only with B & H rows. (In every other nozzle)
Head selection: 1234 (A head does not draw is indicated with “–” “123–”)
<Head side> <Adjusting pattern>
3- 20
(Start with Maintenance Open mode) #SLANT ADJUST

HEAD SELECT :1234
L.*> [JV5-01]
[FUNCTION] [ ] / []: For cursor
[] / []: For Head
[ENTER]: Fix (Next)
#ADJUST Set Media (or confirm)
HEAD ADJUST <ent> [ENTER]
#SLNT ADJ./HEAD=1234
#HEAD ADJUST PRINT START :ent
SLANT ADJUST <ent> [ENTER] [ENTER]: Printing start
[ ] : Carriage move
1. Select “SLANT ADJUST ”. 2. Select a head and execute “PRINT

Start with Maintenance Open mode START”.
and execute “SLANT ADJUST ”. * Drawing pattern varies according to
selected head.(See the drawing below)
Move carriage over platen after
pattern drawing to adjust.
Slant Adjustment: Printing samples
When all heads are selected

HEAD 1
HEAD 2
HEAD 3
HEAD 4
When an individual head is selected (at selecting head 1.3)
HEAD 1
HEAD 3
3- 21
Adjustment procedures
For fixing Example) In the case of Head 3 For fixing
Procedures
1. Loosen 3 screws (for fixing of slant)
indicatedby an arrow in the figure.
C line M line 2. Rotate a screw for adjustment to adjust
For fixing theslant. A color of Magenta is shifted by this
(For Head 1 adjustment) operation.
Reference : Adjustable range 30 ~ 50 µm /1 rotation
For
adjustment
Rotating direction of Adjusting screw

The followings are patterns seen through the scope. Adjust so that dots of cyan and magenta are layed on the
same line in the scan direction with wrapping over.
Good sample Bad sample 1 Bad sample 2
Bad sample 1 (Magenta dots are at the lower than cyanogen do ts.)
Rotate the adjusting screw clockwise. Magenta dots move
forward.
Bad sample 2 (Magenta dots are at the upper than cyanogen dots.)
Rotate the adjusting screw counter-clockwise. Magenta dots move
backward.
Caution: The moving direction of

magenta dots is assuming the
case of observation with a scope.
3- 22
9. Adjust Head Stagger

General
A pattern for mechanical adjustment of positional deviation of each head is drawn.
Move the head height to the position of 1.5 mm print gap, and select a head to draw the adjusting
pattern.
The pattern is drawn with only D (Black) raw of each head.
Head selection: 1-2, 2-3, 3-4, ALL
<Head side> <Adjusting pattern>
Align this line of

each head.
3- 23
Set Media
(or confirm)
#HEAD ADJUST
SLANT ADJUST <ent> [] #STAGGER ADJUST
HEAD SELECT :1-2 #STAG ADJ.
PRINT START :ent
#HEAD ADJUST
[] / []: For Head
[ENTER] [ENTER]: Fix (Next) [ENTER]: Print start
STAGGER ADJUST <ent> [ ] : Carriage move
*Head Set :1-2
2-3
3-4
ALL
1. Execute “STAGGER ADJUST”. 2. Select the head to be adjusted. 3a. Execute “PRINT START”.
* Printing pattern depends on the Moving the carriage over platen
head selected. after pattern drawing to adjust.
Stagger Adjustment: Printing samples
When all heads are selected;

HEAD 1
HEAD 2
HEAD 3
HEAD 4
When Head 1-2(2-3, 3-4) are selected;

HEAD 1
HEAD 2
3- 24
Adjustment procedures
For fixing For fixing
For fixing
For fixing
Procedures
1. Loosen 4 screws(for fixing of stagger) indicated by
an arrow in the figure.
2. Rotate a screw for adjustment to adjust the
stagger as shown in below.
For Reference: Adjustable range 30 ~ 50 µm /1 rotation
adjustment Moving direction by 1 rotation of screw
Counter-clockwise Clockwise
Rotating direction of Adjusting screw

There is a gap at the right end of pattern on the joint of each head. Adjust it using this gap. The joint of head is
observed by a scope as the following.
Head 2 Head 2 Head 2
Approx.
140 µm
Head 1 Head 1 Head 1
Good sample Bad sample 1 Bad sample 2
Bad sample 1 (The gap is wider than 140µm)

Rotate the adjusting screw counter-clockwise.
The position of Head 2 moves backward.
Bad sample 2 (The gap is narrower than 140µm)

Rotate the adjusting screw clockwise. The position of Head 2
moves forward.
3- 25
10. Drop Position Correction

General
Impact position between heads is adjusted. Setting values are stored in the CORRECT PARAM.
<Dot Position Adjust>
Item Set value
Selection of scan speed Set value: Normal-SCAN, HiSPEED SCAN
Selection of head gap Set value: Low 1.5 mm
High 2.5 mm
Selection of Y-base, mode Set value: Y BASE, DRAFT/FINE
Selection of adjusting item Set value: Y Si, Y Re, Y Bi, FINE Y Si, FINE Y Re, FINE Y Bi
This function can not be executed when head 1 is set to “HEAD1 is Not-USE” in
Head Selection or Machine Configuration.
(Take care that when there is an error on head 2 in the Machine Configuration, head
1 is also a head not to be conterolled.)
Y BASE
Head 1D raw is set to be standard; adjusting value for D raw of each head is input.
(Only D raw of each head is used for the pattern drawing)
Adjusting item: Head1-2, Head1-3,

Head1-4
Adjusting value: -50.0 ~ 50.0 dot
(unit: 0.1 dot)
3- 26
Y Si, Y Re
Adjusting patterns of Head 1-2, Head 1-3, Head 1-4 are drawn successively.
(Only D raw of each head is used for the pattern drawing)

Head1-4
Adjusting value: -50.0~ 50.0 dot
(unit: 0.1 dot)
Compensation value
Y Bi
Impact position adjusting value of approach route/backhaul route is input.
Only D raw of Head 1 is used for the pattern drawing.
Adjusting item: Head1-1

Adjusting value: -50.0~50.0 dot
(unit: 0.1 dot)
Back
Front
Compensation value
FINE Y Si, FINE Y Re

Only D raw of each head is used for the pattern drawing.

Head1-4
(unit: 0.1 dot)
3- 27
FINE Y Bi
Only D raw of Head 1 is used for the pattern drawing.
Adjusting item: Head1-1

(unit: 0.1 dot)
DROPposCONFIRM.
Drop impact of the same head is confirmed. When this is selected, the following pattern is drawn.
Impacts among each color at 4 color mode and impacts against the standard D line can be confirmed.
As they are patterns for confirmation, position compensation is not allowed.
Pattern diagram
Fine mode high speed back Fine mode high speed approach
Head Head
1 1
Head Head
2 2
Head Head
3 3
Head Head
4 4
Draft mode high speed back Draft mode high speed approach
Head Head
1 1
Head Head
2 2
Head Head
3 3
Head Head
4 4
3- 28
#HEAD ADJUST
SLANT ADJUST <ent> [ ]
#DROP POS. MODE #DROP POS. Hs
SELECT :HiSPEED SCAN GAP SELECT :Low
#HEAD ADJUST :Normal-SCAN :High
STAGGER ADJUST <ent> [ ]
[] / [ ]: For Scan Speed [] / [ ]: For Gap
#HEAD ADJUST [ENTER]: Fix (to Next) [ENTER]: Fix (to Next)
DROP.POS ADJUST<ent>
[ENTER]
1. Execute “DROP.POS ADJUST”. 2. Select a scan speed for the 3. Select a Head Gap for the
standard. standard.
* As of April 28, 2006, * As of April 28, 2006,
select “HiSPEED SCAN”. select “Low”.
HsLg: High speed scan/Low Select mode Available print mode

HsHg: High speed
scan/High Y-BASE All
SsLg: Normal speed scan/Low DRAFT Y-direction 540dpi
#DROP POS. HsLg *Standard Mode FINE-Lo Y-direction 720, 1440dpi
SELECT Y BASE
DRAFT
FINE
BASIS SET
[] / [ ]: For Mode
Caution: Effective adjustment values depend
on print modes. Conduct
[ENTER]: Fix (to Next) adjustment for every mode, or Y
Caution: First select Y-BASE, which Drop Position may be displaced in
is the base for all an unavailable print mode.
adjustments.
4a. Select the aimed correction mode 4b. ~ Print Mode List ~
to be adjusted.
#DROP POS. HsLg

SELECT Y BASE [ENTER]
1-4 1-3 1-2
10-1. Y Base Drop
Set Media
Position (or confirm)
Head1
Correction #DROP POS. HsLg Head2

Y BASE DRAW :ent
[ENTER]: Print (to Next) Head3
[]: Correction Head4
* Dot position correction at Y base. 1. Execute “Y BASE DRAW”. 2. Check pattern with scope.
(As this is the standard, execute
first.) Check gaps of Heads 2, 3 and 4 from
Head 1 as shown above.
3- 29
~OK~ ~NG~ Head 2 Head 1

Line Line
+
#DROP POS. HsLg
Y BASE 1-2 :0.0
[] / [ ]: Correction
*Correction: “1” for 1 dot [ENTER]: Fix
Head 2 Line Head 1 Line Head 2 Line Head 1 Line (Approx. 35µm)
~ OK: Lines are overlapped ~ ~ NG: Lines are shifted each other ~ 3. Conduct adjustment.
It is judged OK when the line of Conduct adjustment if the line of Enter a positive value when the shift
Head 2, 3 or 4 is agreed with one for Head 2, 3 or 4 is disagreed with one is as shown above.
Lead 1. for Head 1.
To “10-2. Drop Position Correction
for other than Y Base”
#DROP POS. HsLg

Y BASE DRAW :ent #DROP POS. HsLg
[ENTER] SELECT Y BASE
10-2. Drop
DRAFT
#DROP POS. HsLg FINE
Y BASE 1-2 :0.0 [ENTER] Position BASIS SET
[] / [ ]: For mode
#DROP POS. HsLg Correction for [ENTER]: Fix (to Next)
Y BASE 1-3 :0.0 [ENTER]
other than Y Base
#DROP POS. HsLg
Y BASE 1-4 :0.0 [ENTER]
4. Execute adjusting of 1-3, 1-4 * Drop Position Correction for 1. Change mode and fix it.
similarly, and draw pattern again. DRAFT, FINE and BASIS SET
Repeat this until lines are
wrapped over.
DRFT: DRAFT Mode Items Note: Hereafter describe correction

F-Lo: FINE-Lo
*Base + Correction Mode F-Hi: FINE-Hi DRAFT Y Si procedures for the following two
Y Re
modes. Procedures for others are
#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT
Y Bi
FINE Y Si common to them.
ADJUST :Y Si
FINE Y Re
FINE Y Bi • FINE Y Si & Re
:Y Re FINE-Lo Y Si • FINE Y Bi
Y Re
:Y Bi Y Bi
:FINE Y Si FINE Y Si
:FINE Y Re
FINE Y Si
FINE Y Re
:FINE Y Bi FINE Y Bi
[] / [ ]: Change item

FINE-Hi Y Si
Y Re
FINE Y Re
[ENTER]: Fix (to Next) Y Bi
FINE Y Si
FINE Y Re
FINE Y Bi FINE Y Bi
2a. Select the item to be corrected. 2b. ~ Correction Item List ~
Refer to the next table to adjust the * As of 2006.04.28,
items for each mode. correct only “FINE Y Si”, “FINE
Y Re” and “FINE Y Bi”.
3- 30
Set Media
~OK~
(or confirm)
1-4 1-3 1-2
FINE-Y Si DRAW :ent
Y Si DRAW Head1
Y Re DRAW
FINE-Y Re DRAW Head2
FINE-Y Bi DRAW
[ENTER]: Print (to Next) Head3
[ ] : Correction
Head4 Head 2 Line Head 1 Line

3. Execute drawing of Y forth 4. Check pattern with scope. ~ OK: Lines are overlapped ~
(back). It is judged OK when the line of
Check gaps of Heads 2, 3 and 4 from
* Hereafter, correction procedure is Head 1 as shown above. Head 2, 3 or 4 is agreed with one for
basically the same as for Y Base. Lead 1.
~NG~ Head 2 Head 1 #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT

Line Line FINE-Y Si DRAW :ent [ENTER]
#DROP POS. HsLg

Y Si H1-H2 : 0.0 [ENTER]
+
#DROP POS. HsLg
#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT Y Si H1-H3 : 0.0 [ENTER]
Y Si H1-H2 : 0.0
[] / [] : Correction
*Correction: #DROP POS. HsLg
“1” 1 dot (Draft: Approx. [ENTER]: Fix Y Si H1-H4 : 0.0 [ENTER]
Head 2 Line Head 1 Line 45µm, Fine-Lo/Hi: Approx. 35µm)
~ NG: Lines are shifted each other ~ 5. Execute Forth (back) adjust. 6. Execute adjusting of H1-3H, H1-
Conduct adjustment if the line of H4 similarly, and draw pattern
Enter a positive value when the shift again. Repeat this until lines are
Head 2, 3 or 4 is disagreed with one is as shown above.
for Head 1. wrapped over.
Set Media
~OK~
(or confirm) Forward
FINE-Y Bi DRAW :ent
Y Si DRAW
Y Re DRAW
FINE-Y Si DRAW
FINE-Y Re DRAW
[ENTER]: Print (to Next)
Return
[ ] : Correction
Forward line Return line

7. Conduct reciprocation printing. 8. Check pattern with scope. ~ OK: Lines are overlapped ~
Check the overlaps of forward and It is judged OK when forward and
return lines with scope. return lines are agreed.
Complete adjusting.
3- 31
~NG~ Forward line Return line

FINE-Y Re DRAW :ent [ENTER]
Execute drawing
+
#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT #DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT
Y Si H1-H2 : 0.0 Y Si H1-H2 : 0.0

[ENTER]
*Correction: [ ]/[ ] : Correction
“1” for 1 dot (Draft: Approx. [ENTER]: Fix
Forward line Return line 45µm, Fine-Lo/Hi: Approx.
~ NG: Lines are disagreed. ~ 9. Conduct adjustment. 10. Repeat pattern printing until the
Conduct adjustment if forward and lines are overlapped.
Enter a positive value when the shift
return lines are disagreed. is as shown above.
11. Reassemble
Covers
Reverse the disassembly procedure

for reassembly.
3- 32
3-2-2. S Pump Assembly
P4x12 SMW (x5)
1. Remove S Pump Cover T

(M507253)
Pump Assembly
Loosen (x3)
Raise Clamp Lever
1. Raise Clamp Lever. 2. Remove Pump Cover T.
S Pump Assembly
Ink Pump Washing Pump Pump Pump (M004868)
1 3
Pump Pump
2 4
Pump 1: Ink Pump

Pump 2: Ink Pump P3x6 SMW
Pump 3: Washing Pump
Pump 4: Washing Pump
3a. Take off Pump Tubes (x4). 3b. ~ Pump Layout ~ 4. Remove S Pump Assembly.
* Caution: Be careful not to dirty * Confirm the above layout to Loosen the screws to separate S
the periphery with waste or remove the aimed pump. Pump Assembly.
washing.
2. Reassemble L
Pump Assembly
to Sucker fan
box assy. from cleaning fluid cartridge
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Referring to the removed pump, * See the connection diagram above
for reassembly. cut the tubes in the same way. to certainly connect tubes.
* Conduct adjustment after
reassembly.
3- 33
Content Register No. of changed part [ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON

for S Pump Assembly and the (Start with Maintenance Open Mode)
date of the change.
Layout
3. Register Part
L.*> [JV5-01]
Pump Pump
1 3
[ FUNCTION]
Change Record Pump

2
Pump
4
FUNCTION
#ADJUST <ENT>
[ ]/[ ] :SW
[ENTER] : Fix
(to Next)
Tools – #ADJUST
EXCHANGE PARTS <ent>
[ ]/[ ] :SW
[ENTER] : Fix
(to Next)
Pump 1: Ink Pump 1. Enter into#ADJUST MODE

Pump 2: Ink Pump and select “EXCHANGE
Pump 3: Washing Pump PARTS”.
Pump 4: Washing Pump * Start with Maintenance Open
Mode.
#EXCHANGE PARTS [ ]/[ ] : SW

#EXCHANGE PARTS
HISTORY <ENT>
[ ]/[ ] : SW
REGISTRATION <ent> [ENTER] : Set [ENTER] : Set
#REGISTRATION [ ]/[ ] : SW
History indication
PARTS :PUMP [ENTER] : Set
*HEAD
[ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2
INPUT ITEM
Date, PumpNo.
[ ]/[ ] : SW
*PUMP
*PUMP
2006.08.?? :No.? [ 1] 06.09.15 : No.1

[ ]/[ ] : SW
[ ]/[ ] : Change
[ENTER] : Set
value
Push [END] several times to end
2. Select “PUMP” in 3. Confirm registered value.
“REGISTRATION”, and input
replaced date and pump number. After the confirmation, turn the
power OFF to end.
3- 34
3-2-3. Pump Motor Assembly
P4x12 SMW (x5)
1. Remove Pump Pump Cover T

(M507253)
Motor Assembly
Loosen (x3)
Raise Clamp Lever
Pump Pump
1 3
Pump Pump Ink Side Wash Side
2 4
Slide up for
Pump 1: Ink Pump motor P4x12 SMW (x2) removal.
Pump 2: Ink Pump motor
Pump 3: Washing Pump motor Loosen (x2)
Pump 4: Washing Pump motor
3. Confirm the pump mortar to be 4. Loosen the screws (x2) for General 5a. Remove General Pump Motor
removed. Pump Motor Assembly. Assembly.
* Remove corresponding pump Loosen the screws for the aimed Slide up the pump motor assembly
mortar with checking above pump motor assembly. and remove it together with bracket.
layout drawing.
Pump Motor Bracket

LOW (M507237)
Connector
P3x6 SMW (x2)
Pump Motor
Assembly (M007175)
5b. ~ General Pump Motor Assembly ~ 6. Remove the pump motor 7. Remove connector.
assembly.
Loosen the screws (x2) and remove
Pump Motor Assembly from Pump
Motor Bracket LOW.
3- 35
to BOX relay PCB

(CN3) to BOX relay PCB
(CN4)
2. Reassemble Pump
1
Pump
3
Pump Motor Pump
2
Pump
4
Assembly Pump 1: Ink Pump motor
Pump 2: Ink Pump motor
Reverse the disassembly procedure * When multiple pump mortars are
for reassembly. replaced, connect connectors
referring to above drawing.
3- 36
3-2-4. Cap Head assy.
Behind
Power ON.
L.*> [JV5-01]
1. Remove Cap [ST.MAINTE]
Head ST.MAINTENANCE

pected move.
off the power.
Maintenance Cover R (M601943) Care to loss & Cap head assy.

damage (1427776) Press to remove
Cap Tension Spring G

(M800862) Cap Base
2. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 3. Remove Cap Tension Spring G. 4. Release the joint between Cap
Head and Cap Base.
* Take care not to lose or give
damage on parts, and use tweezers Press Cap Head along the arrow to
or long-nose plier. remove.
Cap Stopper
(M700426) 2. Reassemble
Take off tubes Cap Head
5. Take off tubes (x2). 6. Remove Cap Stopper. Reverse the disassembly procedure
for reassembly.
* As the position of cap base is
adjusted, do not loosen or remove
screws.
3- 37
3-2-5. Cap Base 1H
Content When only cap base is Notice: Place the jig before removing the
replaced, place a jig before cap base.
replacement and conduct If the standard cap base position
positioning using the tool as a is lost before placing the tool
1. Remove standard after the replace-
ment.
because of removing another cap
bases and so on, conducting of a
large scale adjusting is required.
Cap Base Tools A Cap base positioning tool
(OPT-J0099) See “3. Cap Base Position
Adjusting”( p. 3 - 39)
* Remove Cap Head before

removing Cap Base.
(Removing of a cap space on head 3
position is described here.)
Behind
Power ON. Maintenance Cover R (M601943)
L.*> [JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
ST.MAINTENANCE

pected move.
1a. Execute Carriage Out. 1b. ~ Caution for Power-off ~ 2. Remove Maintenance Cover R.
off the power.
Care to loss Cap head

& damage (1427776)
Press to remove
A Cap base
positioning tool
Cap Tension Spring G
(M800862) Cap Base 1H
3. Plase the A Cap base positioning 4. Remove Cap Tension Spring G. 5. Release the joint between Cap
tool. Head and Cap Base.
* Take care not to lose or give
Moving the jig under left side of cap damage on parts, and use tweezers Press Cap Head along the arrow to
base and tighten screws (x4). or long-nose plier. remove.
3- 38
Take off tubes

P4x12 SMW (x2)
Cap Base
(M601839)
Cap Spring G ø27
(M800864)
6. Remove cap head. 7. Remove Cap Spring G ø27. 8. Remove Cap Base.
Rmove tubes (x2), and remove cap Loosen the screws (x2), and remove
head. Cap Base from Station Base.
2. Reassemble
Cap Base
Base
Reverse the disassembly procedure 1. Assemble with pushing the cap ~ Top View ~
for reassembly. base to the jig. Remove the Jig after tightening
* At replacing of front and back cap screws. Hereinafter, assemble with
bases at the same time or replacing Fit Cap Base to Changing Jig and
press the Base against the left corner. reversed procedures from Step 6.
whole, execute the following
adjusting.“3. Cap Base Position
Adjusting”( p. 3 - 39)
Content Conduct at replacing of

front and back cap bases at
3. Cap Base
the same time or replacing
whole, Right Cover (M507493)
or adjusting cap position
Position Tools
against head..
All Cap base positioning tool
Loosen (x2)
Adjusting (OPT-J0098)
P4x12 SMW (x2)
* This adjusting is conducted when 1a. Remove Right Cover.

positioning with A Cap base
positioning tool is not allowed. Lossen screws back and front screws
As this is the large scale adjusting, on bottom side to remove the fol-
positioning must be conducted the lowing screws.
method above mentioned as much Bottom side : 2qty
as possible.
3- 39
P4x12 SMW (x7) CW: Down
Bottom End
1b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ 2a. Lower Station to Bottom End. ~ Station Up/Down ~
Right side face: 4qty Up: CCW (Counterclockwise)
Right top side : 3qty Down: CW (Clockwise)
Head Base
Temporary (x2) Side
Block B(x2)
Loosen (x8) Block A

Caution: Protect Head Nozzle from Block B on
All Cap base positioning tool moving Head Base.
3. Loosen all screws for Cap Base. 4. Temporarily fix All Cap base 5a. Manually move Carriage (Head
positioning tool. Base) to Block A.
Mount the Jig to Station Base
Bracket, and tighten screws (x2).
Caution: Protect Head Nozzle from Block B on

moving Head Base.
Accessing
Contact Head
Base with Block
A at the side.
5b. ~ Front View ~ 6. Press the jig backward. 7. Up the station so that block B top
face approaches to carriage
bottom face.
* Take care that other parts do not
contact
3- 40
Caution: Protect Head Nozzle from Block B

on moving Head Base. Tighten (x2)
Contact
Lower Station to
move Carriage
8. Slowly pull the jig toward you to 9. Tighten the screws for temporary 10. Lower Station to Bottom End and
contact Block B with the back end fixing of the jig. move Carriage.
of Head.
* Keep the jig at the position on
tightening screws.
Tighten (x8)
Screw(x2)
11. Press Cap Base against the left 12. Loosen the screws (x2)to remove
corner to fix. the jig.
Press every Cap Base against the left
corner to fix with screws.
3- 41
3-2-6. Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly
Content
Method of replacing presense/near end sencor, solenoid, ink needle and ID terminal PCB that form a cartridge Assy, is
explained.
Tools and Jigs
•Syringe (for sucking ink)
•Tape (a little)
•Waste Cloth (Bemcot etc.)
•Gloves
Work Flow
2. Remove Presence & Near 3. Reassemble Presence &
End Sensors (P. 3- 45 ) Near End Sensors ( P. 3- 46 )
1. Remove Cartridge 4. Remove Solenoid and Nee- 3. Reassemble Presence & 8. Reassemble Cartridge 9. Supply and Confir-
Assembly ( P. 3- 42 ) dle ( P. 3- 47 ) Near End Sensors (P. 3- 46 ) Assembly ( P. 3- 49 ) mation of Ink ( P. 3- 49 )
6. Remove ID Point of Con- 7. Reassemble ID Point of Con-
tact PCB Assembly ( P. 3- 48 ) tact PCB Assembly ( P. 3- 48 ) 10. Reassemble Cov-
ers ( P. 3- 50 )
Behind ICU Cover F (M507574)
1. Remove
Cartridge P4x12 SMW (x2)
No need to
Assembly remove
Caution: Be sure to shut the main circuit

pected move.
1. Shut off the main power. 2a. Remove ICU Cover F and ICU
Cover R together.
Right side face : 2qty
Left side face : 2qty
Back face bottom : 2qty
Maintenance Cover R (M601943)

No need to P4x12 SMW (x2)
remove
ICU Cover R
(M507575)
2b. ~ Remove ICU Cover F & R ~ 2c. ~ ICU Cover F & R ~ 3. Remove Maintenance Cover R.
3- 42

Remove 2 cartridges
B3x6 (x2)
Turn toward you.

Right
4. Pull out the aimed Ink Cartridges 5. Remove the head cover. 6a. Remove Damper Lock SP (x2).
(x2).
Remove right and left screws to Revolve the left and right ends
Remove the aimed pair of ink remove the head cover. toward you to remove.
cartridges.
Caution: Do not push clear film to

avoid ink leakage.
Protect it from tools
with a sharp edge.
Do not press.
Turn backward. Damper Assembly
6b. ~ Remove Damper Lock SP ~ 7a. Remove Damper Assembly. 7b. ~ Caution for Damper ~
Revolve the left and right ends Pull the concerned Damper
backward to remove. Assembly out of Head Unit.
MMC C Y Y K K K K Y Y C CMM M M C C Lc Lc K K Y Y C C M M LmLm

Ink Cartridges Ink Cartridges
Fixing
syringe
Damper Damper
HEAD HEAD
7c. ~ Damper arrangement(4 color) ~ 7d. ~ Damper arrangement(6 color) ~ 8. Set a syrunge to the damper.
Arrangement layout of damper and Arrangement layout of damper and * This process is conducted for each
cartridgesat 4 colors in front view. cartridgesat 6 colors in front view. head (x4).
3- 43
Notice: Never push the syringe at ink

Tape suction. Ink will leak from the
needle and inside of slot will be
contaminated.
Suction with pushing
Fix Solenoids to “ON”.
9. Fix a lever of solenoid with tape. 10a.Suck ink in a tube 10b. ~ Caution at using syringe ~
Push down and fix corresponding Discharge ink in a tube with pulling
solenoid (x2) with tape to turn ON the syringe while pushing damper.
(valve open) in manual.
* Suck ink again at assembling
process.
Remove (x2) Cartridge Coupling Plate (M507201) x2
P3x6 SMW (x2)

RS O-ring P3x5 SMW (x32)
(M700326)
11. Remove the tubes (x2) for the 12. Remove Cartridge Coupling 13a.Remove Cartridge Assembly.
concerned cartridges. Plates (x2).
Loosen screws (x2), and remove the
* Be careful not to lose RS O-ring concerned Cartridge Assembly from
on removing tubes. IC Slot Bracket R.
Widen a little.
13b. ~ POINT ~ 13c. ~ Cartridge Assembly ~ * Ink Unit PCB Bracket must be
removed for some cartridge
To make the removal from IC Slot * Be careful of cables to place on position.
Bracket R easier, a little loosen the waste cloth.
screws for the left (keyboard side)
cartridge and widen it as shown
above.
3- 44
Presence Sensor
P.3-45
Near End Sensor
Solenoid Valve
P.3-47
Needle
ID Point of Contact PCB P.3-48
Assembly
* Hereinafter, steps are divided

according to parts.
Refer to corresponding parts.
2. Remove
Presence & Near
End Sensors Release cable.
* Presence sensor, near end sensor 1a. Disconnect the cable from Clamp. 1b. ~ Release cable. ~
Remove (connector included).
Connector and cable for Ink Unit PCB are

P3x10 SMW assigned numbers within 1-16 for each
Presence Sensor sensor and solenoid aside from CN No.
Assignment is as shown below.
16 15 14 ... ... 3 2 1
TP 2x8
Near End Sensor
2. Remove Presence Sensor. 3. Remove Near End Sensor. 4a. Remove connector from Ink Unit
PCB.
Identify No. of the concerned sensor
to remove from PCB.
3- 45
No. CN No. Destination
1 CN10 Presence/Near End Sensor 1
4b. Ink Unit PCB Connection List

(Presence/Near End Sensors)
* Each sensor has 4 pins and gray
cable. Connector is on the upper
left of PCB
3. Reassemble
Presence & Near
End Sensors
1. Split cable for each sensor. 2. Remove loosening of cable.
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Keep Near End Sensor Cable from
for reassembly. Cartridge Frame.
(See above photo.)
Keep from frame.
Keep from frame.
~ Cable Work 1 ~ ~ Cable Work 2 ~
3- 46
4. Remove
Solenoid and
Needle Release Clamp.
P3x6 SMW (x2)
* Remove in the order of valve 1. Remove the cable for ID Point of 2. Loosen the screws for Solenoid
solenoid, ink needle (valve base). Contact PCB from clamp. Valve.
Connector and cable for Ink Unit PCB are No. CN No. Destination
assigned numbers within 1-16 for each 1 CN28 Solenoid Valve 1
sensor and solenoid aside from CN No. 2 CN29 Solenoid Valve 2
Assignment is as shown below. 3
4
CN30
CN31
Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve
3
5 CN32 Solenoid Valve 5
16 15 14 ... ... 3 2 1 8
9
CN35
CN36
Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve
8
3. Remove Solenoid Valve Assembly 4a. Remove connector from Ink Unit 4b. Ink Unit PCB Connection Table
from Valve Base. PCB. (Solenoid Valves)
Identify No. of the concerned * Each solenoid has 2 pins and red
solenoid to remove connector from and black cable. Connector is on
PCB. the upper right of PCB
Fix nut and Solenoid Bracket

loosen screw (M507348)
B3x8 (x2)
TP3x8 F
4c. ~ Solenoid Valve ~ 5. Loosen nuts and screws (x2) for 6. Remove Solenoid Bracket.
Valve Base and Cartridge Frame
V.
3- 47
5. Remove
Solenoid and
Needle
Valve Base N-3 M6
Assembly (M007124)
7a. Remove Valve Base N-3 M6 7b. ~ Valve Base N-3 M6 Assembly ~ Reverse the disassembly procedure
Assembly. for reassembly.
Remove connector
6. Remove ID
Point of Contact
PCB Assembly Release clamp
1. Release Clamp. 2. Remove cable from ID Point of

Release the clamp for ID Point of Contact PCB.
Contact PCB Cable.
TP3x8 F (x2) ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly

Loosen (x2) (E103704)
7. Reassemble ID
Point of Contact
Slide out
PCB Assembly
OK NG
3a. Loosen the screws (x2). 3b. ~ ID Point of Contact PCB Reverse the disassembly procedure
Assembly ~ for reassembly.
Loosen the screws (x2) for ID Point
of Contact PCB Assembly, and slide * Replace Contact PCB if the head
it out to remove from Cartridge of either contact is worn.
Frame.
3- 48
Tube Retaining
Screw M6
(1033482)
8. Reassemble RS O-ring
Cartridge (M700326)
Assembly
Tighten as pressing O-ring
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Caution: Be sure to tighten Tube
for reassembly. Retaining Screw as pressing O-
ring. If O-ring is hanging out,
tighten over again. It is too tight.
9. Supply and Set 2 cartridges Fixing
Confirmation of Syringe
Ink
After ink suction with a syringe, 1. Set removed ink cartridge (x2). 2. Set a syringe to damper.
execute cleaning and test drawing to Set 2 removed ink cartridge.
make sure that there is no nozzle * Execute this process for each head
missing. (x4).
Notice: Never push the syringe at ink

Tape suction. Ink will leak from the
needle and inside of slot will be
contaminated.
Suck with pushing
Fix Solenoids to “ON”.
3. Fix lever of solenoid with tape 4a. Suck ink to fill damper (x4) with 4b. ~ Caution at using syringe ~
ink
Push down and fix corresponding
solenoid (x2) with tape to ON ‘valve Pull syringe to fill dampers with ink
open) in manual. while pushing the dampers.
3- 49

Set Media Check result
CLEANING [ ] / [] : SW (or confirm)
HEAD SELECT 1234 [ENTER] : Set
12-- L.*> [JV5-01]
--34 width:****mm [TEST DRAW] Nozzle skip OK
CLEANING [ ] / [] : SW
TYPE :HARD [ENTER] : Set TEST DRAW
<ENT> [ENTER] : Execute
Cleaning Power OFF
:NORMAL (Execute several goto “10. Reassem-
:SOFT times) ble Covers”( p. 3 -
** TEST DRAW ** If not improved 50)
CLEANING ACTIVE goto “9-1. Check Ink
*******------------- Route”( p. 3 - 50)
5. Execute hard cleaning 6. Set media to execute test drawing. 7. Check the result of drawing.
Turn the main power (back side) to * Repeat Test Draw until nozzle skip
ON to execute hard cleaning. is removed.
9-1. Check Rear Cover R

(M507496)
Ink Route P4x12 SMW (x11)
Loosen (x4)
* When there is problems on print 1. Remove Rear Cover R. 2a. Visually check tubes.
quality such as nozzle missing,
check ink supply path Visually check whether tubes are
(in a tube). filled with ink and free of air
bubbles.
10. Reassemble
Covers
2b. Check the loosening of fittings. Reverse the disassembly procedure

for reassembly.
* Check 5 couplers at each of 4
branchesx 8 = 40 parts.
3- 50
3-2-7. Major Parts for Wash Cartridge Assembly
Content
Method of replacing presense/near end sencor, solenoid, ink needle that form a cleaning cartridge Assy, is explained. As for ID
terminal PCB, see “ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge)”( p. 3 - 101).
Tools and Jigs
•Gloves
Work Flow
3. Remove Presence 4. Reassemble Presence

& Near End Sensors & Near End Sensors
1. Drain Washing 2. Remove Wash car- ( P. 3- 53 ) ( P. 3- 54 )
7. Reassemble Wash cartridge
tridge Assembly ( P. 3- 52 ) Assembly ( P. 3- 56 )
( P. 3- 51 )
5. Remove Solenoid 4. Reassemble Presence

and Needle ( P. 3- 54 ) & Near End Sensors
( P. 3- 54 ) 8. Filling Washing ( P. 3- 56 )
Power SW ON
HD.MAINTENANCE
L.*> [JV5-01] FIll UP INK <ent> [ ]/[]
[ST.MAINTE]
1. Drain MAINTENANCE
HD.MAINTENANCE
MaintWashLiquid<ent> [ENTER]
Washing ST.MAINTENANCE <ent>
MAINTENANCE
[ ]/[]
MaintWashLiquid
FILLING UP <ent> [ ]/[]
MaintWashLiquid
DISCHARGE <ent> [ENTER]
1. Turn the power of JV-5 ON to 2. Select “DISCHARGE” of

enter the Maintenance Menu. maintenance washi liquid.
Remove a maint.wash.
liquid cartridge.
There is a CARTRIDGE
Remove washi fluid cartridge
PLEASE WAIT
******--------------
3. Remove washi fluid cartridge to

discharge washi fluid.
3- 51

Behind
2. Remove
Wash cartridge
Assembly
pected move.
1. Shut off the main power. 2. Remove Maintenance Cover R.
Right Cover (M507493)

Release clamp (x3)
Loosen (x2)
P4x12 SMW (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)
Side Relay PCB

3a. Remove Right Cover. 3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ 4. Disconnect cable from Clamp.
Loosen back and front screws on the Right side face : 4qty Release the clamps (x3) for Side
bottom side to remove the following Right top side : 3qty Relay PCB Cable.
screws.
Bottom side : 2qty
P4x12 SMW (x3) Tube Retaining

Screw M6
(1033482)
RS O-ring
Lay protection sheet. (M700326)
5a. Remove Wash Cartridge. 5b. 6. Disconnect tube.

* Caution: Lay protection sheet to
Remove Wash Cartridge Assembly protect cover from flaw or dirt, Loosen fitting screw and disconnect
together with Base to temporarily and place Wash Cartridge tube from Valve Base.
place to the position shown above. Assembly there. * Caution: Be careful not to lose RS
O-ring.
3- 52
Presence Sensor
P.3-52
Near End Sensor
Solenoid Valve
P.3-54
Needle
* Hereinafter steps are divided

according to parts.
Rferer to corresponding parts.
3. Remove
Presence & Near
End Sensors Release cable
* Remove presence sensor and near 1. Release cable from clamp. 1b. ~ Release cable. ~
end sensor
(connector included).
Side Relay PCB

P3x10 SMW (E104352)
Presence Sensor
TP 2x8
Near End Sensor
Disconnect CN7
2. Remove Presence Sensor. 3. Remove Near End Sensor. 4. Disconnect connector (CN7).
Disconnect the connector from Side
Relay PCB.
3- 53
4. Reassemble
Presence & Near
End Sensors
1. Split cable for each sensor. 2. Remove loosening of cable.
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Keep Near End Sensor cable from
for reassembly. Cartridge Frame.
(See above photo.)
Keep from frame.
Keep from frame.
~ Cable Work 1 ~ ~ Cable Work 2 ~
5. Remove
Solenoid and
Needle Release clamp
P3x6 SMW (x2)
1. Remove ID Point of Contact PCB 2. Loosen screws for Solenoid Valve.

Cable from clamp.
3- 54
Side Relay PCB

(E104352)
Disconnect CN6
3. Remove Solenoid Valve Assembly 4a. Disconnect the connector (CN6) 4b. ~ Solenoid Valve ~
from Valve Base. from Side Relay PCB.
Fix nuts and Solenoid Bracket

loosen screws (M507348)
B3x8 (x2)
TP3x8 F
Valve Base N-3 M6
Assembly (M007124)
5. Loosen nuts and screws (x2) for 6. Remove Solenoid Bracket. 7a. Remove Valve Base N-3 M6
Valve Base and Cartridge Frame Assembly.
V.
6. Remove
Solenoid and
Needle
7b. ~ Valve Base N-3 M6 Assembly ~ Reverse the disassembly procedure
for reassembly.
3- 55
Tube Retaining
Screw M6
7. Reassemble RS O-ring
Wash cartridge (M700326)
Assembly
Tighten as pressing O-ring.
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Caution: Be sure to tighten Tube
for reassembly. Retaining Screw as pressing O-
ring. If O-ring is hanging out,
tighten over again. It is too tight.
Main Power ON (Back)
HD.MAINTENANCE
Power SW ON FIll UP INK <ent> [ ]/[]
8. Filling L.*> [JV5-01]

[ST.MAINTE]
HD.MAINTENANCE
Washing MAINTENANCE
ST.MAINTENANCE <ent> [ ]/[]
MaintWashLiquid
FILLING UP <ent> [ENTER]
MAINTENANCE Execute washi liquid filling

1. Turn the power of JV-5 ON to 2. Washi liquid filling.

enter the Maintenance Menu.
* As for detailes of screen
transitions at filling, see the
Instruction Manual.
3- 56
3-2-8. Damper Assembly
Power ON.
Behind
1. Remove L.*> [JV5-01]

[ST.MAINTE]
Damper ST.MAINTENANCE
Assembly CARRIDGE OUT <ent> [ENTER]

pected move.
off the power.
Right

Move fulcrum pin inword, and
remove it from pin hole.
Right Right
Assy.
Take out fulcrum pin on the left side Open the cover, move right side ful-
Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and of cover from from frame to remove crum pin to inword and remove it
remove left side of the cover. open/close cover. from pin hole.
Front Cover L (M601940/41)

Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right Left Head Cover (M507559)
B3x6 (x2)
Y Cover F (M507498/7501) Right
3b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~ 4. Remove Y Cover F. 5. Remove the head cover.
Remove a pin from left sgaft hole to Remove right and left screws (x6) to Remove right and reft screws to
remove the front cover. remove Y cover F. remove the head cover.
Operation with more than 2
persons
3- 57
1
Lay Media. 2
3
4
(Front)
6. Lay media on Platen to prevent 7a. Identify the Head to be removed. 7b. ~ To remove back Damper ~
from dirt. * To remove Dampers for Heads 1 and 2,
disconnect quick valve for the front head
for servicing.
Joint Valve Assembly

(M006954)
Turn toward you. Turn backward.
8a. Remove Damper Lock SP (x2). 8b. ~ Remove Damper Lock SP ~ 9. Turn coupler screw to remove a
tube from coupler valve Assy.
Revolve the left and right ends Revolve the left and right ends
toward you to remove. backward to remove. * Conduct the operation with
placing waste cloth, though there
is no ink dropping basically.
Caution: Do not push clear film to avoid ink

leakage.
Protect it from tools with a sharp
edge.
Damper Assembly
Do not press.
10a.Remove Damper Assembly. 10b.~ Caution for Damper ~

Remove damper Assy with coupler * As the damper is filled with ink,
valve Assy. take care not to contaminate other
parts with ink dropped from the
damper.
3- 58
Caution: Protect film from a sharp edge of a

tool.
2. Reassemble Not to cut

Damper Assembly
Reverse the disassembly procedure * ~ Caution for Damper ~ * Place damper lock SP so that
for reassembly. protrusions on both sides push up
coupler part of the damper.
Main Power ON (Back) L.*> [JV5-01]

[FUNCTION]
Power SW ON
FUNCTION
Set Media (or confirm)
3. Filling Ink L.*> [JV5-01]
MAINTENANCE
HD.MAINTENANCE
FILL UP INK <ent> [ENTER]
* Caution: Take the right procedure 1. Set media and turn the power ON. 2. Execute “FILL UP INK”.
to save ink and improve work
efficiency.
FILL UP INK L.*> [JV5-01]

HEAD SELECT :12.34 width:****mm [TEST DRAW]
:12--
Draw Result
:--34 TEST DRAW
[ ] / []: Cursor Move <ENT> [ENTER] : Execute
[] / []: Head Choice Nozzle skip OK
** TEST DRAW **
FILL UP INK
*****---------------
Re-cleaning Power off
(Step. 5b)
HD.MAINTENANCE [END] : End
FILL UP INK <ent>
3. Choose Head and fill ink. 4. Execute test drawing. 5a. Confirm the result of draw.
* Choose a set of Heads 1 and 2 or * Repeat until nozzle skip is
Heads 3 and 4. removed.
3- 59
L.*> [JV5-01] [CLEANING] Notice: Select [HARD] or [NORMAL] of

CLEANING cleaning according to nozzle
CLEANING TYPE :NORMAL missing state.
HEAD SELECT 1234 TYPE :SOFT Select [NORMAL] at a few noz-
12-- TYPE :HARD zle missings.
--34 [] / [] : SW
[] / [] : SW [ENTER] : Set
[ENTER] : Set
CLEANING ACTIVE
*******-------------
5b. Conduct cleaning.

Select a set of [HARD] ⇒
[NORMAL].
Content Register No. of changed

Damper Assembly and the 1
date of the change. 2
Layout See below. 3
4
4. Register Part Tools –
(Front side)
Change Record
A B C D E F G H
~Head Top View~

~ Damper Layout ~
* Designate Head No. (1-4) - Nozzle
Row (A-H)
(Start with Maintenance Open Mode ) #EXCHANGE PARTS [] / [] : SW #EXCHANGE PARTS [] / [] : SW
REGISTRATION <ent> [ENTER] : Set HISTORY <ENT> [ENTER] : Set
L.*> [JV5-01]
[FUNCTION] #REGISTRATION [] / [] :SW History indication
PARTS :DAMPER [ENTER] : Set
*HEAD
FUNCTION [] / [] : SW [ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2
#ADJUST <ENT> [ENTER] : Set INPUT ITEM
Date. HeadNo.-NzlNo.
[] / [] : SW
*DAMPER
[] / [] : SW *DAMPER
[ ] / [] : SW
#ADJUST [ 3] 06.07.23:No.3-E
[ENTER] : Set 2006.08.31:No.1-H
EXCHANGE PARTS <ent>
[] / [] : Change
value Push [END] several times to
[ENTER] : Set
1. Select “EXCHANGE PARTS“ in 2. Select “DAMPER“ in 3. Confirm registrations.
#ADJUST MODE “REGISTRATION”, and input
exchange date and No. After the confirmation, turn the
* Start with the Maintenance Mode. power OFF to end.
3- 60
3-2-9. Sucker BOX
P4x12 SMW (x5)
1. Remove Pump Cover T

(M507253)
Sucker BOX
Loosen (x3)
Raise Clamp Lever
TP4x50 (x4) Pinch Screw (x2)
Pump Tube Holder U

(M601993)
FB Box Fan Assembly
(ME104398)
3. Remove cables of FB fan from 4. Remove FB Box Fan Assembly. 5. Remove pump tube holding
clamp. member U.
Remove screws (x4), remove FB
BOX fan Assy with a fan guard.
TB4x10 (x3)
Fan BOX Stay A

(M507541) x2
Turn stay at 90°.
Notice: Place waste cloth not to contaminate

other parts with waste liq g.
uid droppin Fan BOX Stay B (M507542)
6. Remove pump tube (x4) from the 7. Remove screws (x3) of fan BOX 8. Loosen screws (x3) of fan BOX
suction fan BOX. stay (A&B) fixing suction fan stay (A&B) and turn at 90° to
BOX. down.
3- 61
Sucker BOX
(M601848)
9. Keep lifting Sucker BOX and pull

toward you to remove.
* Take care not to contaminate the
floor with waste ink.
Notice: Take care not to cut film with

tools having sharp head.
2. Reassemble
Sucker BOX
Reverse the disassembly procedure * ~ Cautions for Handling ~

for reassembly.
3- 62
3-2-10. NCU
Content
After replacement of NCU, reset NCULD, register the history of parts exchange, and executetest of NCU.
Tools and Jigs
• Mini-driver (having short handle)
Work Flow
1. Remove NCU 2. Reassemble NCU 3. Reset NCU LD 4. Register Part Change Record 5. NCU Test ( P. 3- 67 )
( P. 3-63 ) ( P. 3-65 ) ( P. 3- 65) ( P. 3- 66 )
* The order of NCU LD reset and exchange history regis-

tration can be changed.
Behind
Power ON.
L.*> [JV5-01]
[ST.MAINTE]
1. Remove NCU ST.MAINTENANCE


pected move.
off the power.
Right Left P4x12 SMW (x6)

Right
Move fulcrum pin to inward, and

remove it from pin hole. Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
2a. Remove Front Cover L. 2b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~ 3. Remove Y Cover F.
Open the cover, move the fulcrum Remove a pin from the left shaft Remove right and left screws (x6),
pin to inward and remove it from pin hole to remove the front cover. and remove Y cover F.
hole. * Take care not to drop the cover.
persons.
3- 63
Maintenance Cover R (M601943) Down Clamp Lever
Rear Cover R
(M507496)
P4x12 SMW (x11)
Loosen (x4)
4. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 5. Remove Rear Cover R. 6. Down Clamp Lever
Left Right Left Left

P4x12 SMW
Loosen (x4) Tilt Loosen (x3)
Front cover
P4x12 SMW sensor L P4x12 SMW
KB Cover
(M601945) KB Cover
(M601945)
Loosen
Not to hit
P4x12 SMW
7a. Remove KB Cover. 7b. ~ Removeing KB Cover 2 ~ 7c. ~ Removing KB Cover 3 ~

Loosen 4 screws on the right side. Remove screw on front cover sensor Loosen screws (x3), take out KB
R, loosen a screw on bottom side, tilt Cover with taking care not to hit the
to front, and remove lower screws dryer unit.
fixing KB cover in the drwaing
above.
CN2
Dot detection PCB
P4x12 SMW (x4)

8. Disconnect connector from Dot 9a. Loosen screws (x4) for NCU. 9b. ~ Loosen NCU screws ~
detection PCB.
Loosen the screws for NCU.
Release the clamp for NCU cable
and disconnect connector (CN2)
from Dot detection PCB.
3- 64
NCU
(E300469)
10. Remove NCU. 10b. ~ NCU ~ 10c. ~ Interior after NCU has
removed ~
2. Reassemble
NCU

for reassembly.
Content Initialize LD consumption [ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON

current value of NCU (Start with Maintenance Open Mode)
As JV-5 issues NCU
exchange message or stops
operation from the LD con- L.*> [JV5-01]
[FUNCTION]
3. Reset NCU LD sumption current value, not
to forget to reset after
exchange. NCU
NOZZLE CHECK <ent> [ ] / [] : SW
Tools –
#NCU
NCU LD RESET <ent> [ENTER] :Fix
(to Next)
* Make sure that JV-5 is in the 1. Select “NCU LD RESET” in

Local Idling State (initializing FUNCTION Menu.
operation is completed and being
capped) before conducting this * Start with the Maintenance Open
adjustment. Mode.
3- 65
Error Out- If NCU reset is not conducted

#NCU LD RESET [ENTER] :Fix !! RESET FAILURE !!
line in capping state after starting
LDcons.ELcurr.:RESET (to Next) the system and initialization
#NCU LD RESET operation is completed,
** Being LD-reset ** LDcons.ELcurr.:RESE “RESET FAILURE” error
PLEASE WAIT arises.
Ex.) When reset is executed
**RESET COMPLETION** in cover open state, it does
not end in normal.
#NCU LD RESET
LDcons.ELcurr.:RESE [END] : End Action Check initializing operation
and capping are in normal.
2a. Press [ENTER] to reset LD con- 2b. ~ Error Display ~ 2c. ~ Action at Error ~
sumption current.
Above error display indicates that
After normal end, press [END] sev- reset is not completed in normal.
eral times to end. Make sure that JV-5 starts with the
Maintenance Open mode, and reset
again.
Content Register the date of NCU [ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON

change. (Start with Maintenance Open Mode)
Tools –
4. Register Part
L.*> [JV5-01]
[FUNCTION]
Change Record FUNCTION

#ADJUST
[ ] / [] :SW
<ENT> [ENTER] :Fix
(to Next)
#ADJUST [ ] / [] :SW
EXCHANGE PARTS <ent> [ENTER] :Fix
(to Next)
1. Select “EXCHANGE PARTS“ in

#ADJUST Mode
* Start with the Maintenance Open
Mode.
#EXCHANGE PARTS [ ] / [] :SW

#EXCHANGE PARTS [ ] / [] :SW
REGISTRATION <ent> [ENTER] :Fix HISTORY <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix
(to Next) (to Next)
History indication
#REGISTRATION [ ] / [] :SW
PARTS :NCUsensorUNIT [ENTER] :Fix
(to Next) *HEAD
[ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2
INPUT ITEM
Date
[ ]/ [] : SW
*NCUsensorUNIT *NCUsensorUNIT
2006.08.31 [] / [] :SW [ 4] 06.07.23
[ ] / [] :Change
Value Push [END] several times to
[ENTER] :Fix
2. select “NCUsensorUNIT” in 3. Confurm Registrations.
REGISTRATION and input
exchanged date. After the confirmation, turn the
power OFF to end.
3- 66
Content Make sure that replaced NCU

functions in normal with L.*> [JV5-01]
NCU FUNCTION in FUNC- width:****mm [TEST DRAW]
TION MENU.
As this function assumes that TEST DRAW
there is no nozzle missing, <ENT> [ENTER] : Execute
5. NCU Test nozzle missing check must be
done beforehand. ** TEST DRAW **
Tools –
1. Execute test drawing

Notice: Select [HARD] or [NORMAL]of
CLEANING
[ ]/ [] :SW cleaning according to nozzle
Draw Result HEAD SELECT 1234 [ENTER] :Fix missing state.
12-- (to Next) Select [NORMAL] at a few noz-
--34 zle missing.
Nozzle skip OK CLEANING
[ ]/ [] :SW
TYPE :NORMAL [ENTER] :Fix
Re-cleaning Power off TYPE :SOFT (to Next)
TYPE :HARD
(Step. 2b)
CLEANING ACTIVE
*******-------------
2a. Confirm the result of draw. 2b. Conduct cleaning.

* Repeat until nozzle skip is Select a set of [HARD] ⇒
removed. [NORMAL].

[ENTER] : Execute [ENTER] : Exec
(Start with Maintenance Open Mode) [ ] / [] : SW [ ] / [] : SW
#TEST #TEST
NOZZLE CHK TEST<ent> LINE VOLTAGE <ent>
[END] : To Menu [END] : To Menu
L.*> [JV5-01] [ENTER]Execute [ENTER] : Exec
[ ] / [] : SW [ ] / [] : SW
#TEST #TEST
[FUNCTION] SDRAM CHECK <ent> LD&SensorTEST <ent>
NCU [ENTER] : Exec
NOZZLE CHECK <ent> [ ] / [] : SW #TEST [ENTER] : Exec
[ ] / [] : SW
#TEST
[ ] / [] : SW
F-ROM CHECK <ent> SERIAL CHECK <ent>
#NCU [ENTER] : Exec
[ENTER] : Exec
[ ] / [] : SW
#TEST #TEST
TEST <ent> [ENTER] :Fix
LDconsu.ELcurr.<ent> [ ] / [] : SW LASER TEMP.CHK <ent>
(to Next) [END] : To Menu [END] : To Menu
3. Select “TEST“ in NCU 4a. Execte tests of above 8 items. 4b. ~ NCU Test Screen Configuration 2 ~
FUNCTION Of FUNCTION
MENU. * As for detailes of operation flow, After the test is completed, press
see p.2- 54. [END] several times to turn the
* Start with the Maintenance Open As for detailes of NCU, see .
p.2- 23 power OFF.
Mode.
3- 67
3- 68
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3. Overhaul of PCBs
PCBs to be used for JV5-130S/160S are shown below.
3-3-1. Main PCB p. 3 - 70 3-3-10. Keyboard PCB p. 3 - 92
3-3-2. HDC PCB p. 3 - 77 3-3-11. Dot Detection PCB p. 3 - 96
3-3-3. IO PCB p. 3 - 78 3-3-12. Ink Unit PCB p. 3 - 98
3-3-4. USB PCB p. 3 - 79 3-3-13. Side Relay PCB p. 3 - 99
3-3-5. Head Relay PCB p. 3 - 81 3-3-14. ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge) p. 3 - 101
3-3-6. Slider PCB p. 3 - 82 3-3-15. LED PCB p. 3 - 103
3-3-7. Power PCB p. 3 - 85 3-3-16. Take-up PCB p. 3 - 105
3-3-8. Heater PCB p. 3 - 88 3-3-17. Drying Fan Fork PCB p. 3 - 106
3-3-9. BOX Relay PCB p. 3 - 90
~ Left ~
Ink Unit PCB ~ Head Assy ~
Slider PCB
Head Relay PCB (x4)
LED PCB (x2) Keyboard PCB
ID Point of Contact
PCB (Wash Cartridge)
Heater PCB
HDC PCB (x4) Side Relay PCB
Drying Fan Fork PCB (x2) Dot Detection PCB
Power PCB
Take-up PCB
IO PCB
BOX Relay PCB
Main PCB USB PCB
3- 69
3-3-1. Main PCB
Content
In changing Main PCB, parameters must be registered to Main PCB ROM after the change. In the view of work efficiency and
print quality and to save the time for re-adjusting and re-setting them, make a copy of (upload) the parameters before the
change in PC and write (download) them into the new Main PCB after the change.
Tools & jigs
•PC
•F/W Upload Tool
•USB Cable
Work Flow
1. Upload Parame- 2. Remove Main PCB 3. Reassemble Main 4. Download Parameters 5. Adjust Main PCB Motor
ters ( P. 3- 70 ) ( P. 3- 71 ) PCB ( P. 3- 73 ) ( P. 3- 73 ) Current ( P. 3- 75 )
* If upload of parameters is unavailable, conduct Parameter Draw to note the values. Then manually register them after
changing Main PCB.
[
] + [ ] + Power ON
(Start with parameter Up/Down

load Mode)
1. Upload
Parameters
Up& Download Ready!
1. Start JV5 with parameter Up/ 2a. Start F/W Upload Tool.
Down load Mode.
Turn the power ON with pressing
[ ]+[].
2b. ~ F/W Upload Tool Menu ~ 3. Select [Upload] Tab. 4. Select interface.
In [Device] section, check the inter-
face connecting printer.
3- 70
Overhaul of PCBs
PC
JV5
***UPLOADING***
5. Select [JV5.PRM]. 6a. Execute [Upload!!]. 6b. ~ Indication during upload ~

Select [JV5.PRM] in [PRM File]. * Click [Abort] Button to cancel.
Note :
If upload is failed or
impracticable, conduct
Parameter Draw to note the
Up & Download END
parameter values and
Power Off manually register them after
the work is completed.
Power OFF
7. Save Parameter File. 8. Turn off the power of JV5.

Parameter Save Window automati- Confirm the above indication on
cally appears when Upload is suc- Operation Panel of JV5 before shut-
cessfully completed. ting down.
Enter file name to save parameters.
Behind
2. Remove MF Cover R
(M507164)
Main PCB Loosen (x6)
Caution: Be sure to shut the main circuit P4x12 SMW (x8)

pected move.
1. Shut off the main power. 2. Remove MF Cover R.
Don’t take off the screws (x6) but
just loosen, and reassembly will be
easier.
(Be careful not to fall Cover.)
3- 71
USB Protection Bracket

(M507828)
P4x12 SMW (x4)
B3x6
Surface Cover RS
P3x10 SMW (x2) (M507507)
IF Bracket (M507318)
3. Remove USB Protection Bracket. 4. Remove Surface Cover RS. 5. Remove IF Bracket.
Release HDC PCB connector
P3x10 SMW (x8)
Release connectors
Release connector.
6. Release HDC PCB Connectors. 7a. Disconnect Main PCB Connec- 7b. ~ Release connectors (Upper) ~
tors.
Loosen the screws (x8) for HDC
PCBs (x4) and pull a little toward
you to disconnect from Main PCB.
P3x10 SMW (x4) IF Relay PCB
P3x10 SMW (x8)
USB PCB Assembly SQ-30 (x4)

USB PCB Assembly (E103711)
(E103711)
8. Loosen the screws (x4) for USB 9. Remove USB PCB Assembly. 10a.Remove Main PCB Assembly.
PCB Assembly.
Remove USB PCB Assembly from Loosen the screws (x8) and the
Main PCB Connector together with hexagon studs (x4) to take laterally
IF Relay. out of printer.
3- 72
Overhaul of PCBs
MemoryPCB Assy MemoryPCB

(E104090) x2 Assy (E104090) Main PCB Assy
(E104082)
10b.Remove memory PCB Assy (x2). 10c. ~ Memory PCB Assembly ~ 10d. ~ Main PCB Assembly ~
Remove memory PCB Assy(x2)
from main PCB.
OK NG
3. Reassemble
Main PCB
A washer of screw A washer of screw
is outside of the is inside of the
cover cover.
* To connect USB PCB (IF Relay * Put cover inside of loosened

PCB) with Main PCB, certainly fit screws to tighten them.
the connector to the bottom.
[
] + [ ] + Power ON
(Start with parameter Up/Down load

Mode)
4. Download
Parameters Up& Download Ready!
1. Start JV5 with parameter Up/ 2a. Start F/W Upload Tool.
Down load Mode
Turn the power ON with pressing
[ ]+[].
3- 73
2b. ~ F/W Upload Tool Menu~ 3. Select [Download] Tab. 4. Select Interface.
In [Device] section, check the inter-
face connecting printer.
5. Select [JV5.PRM]. 6. Select the file to be downloaded. 7a. Execute [Download!!]

Select [JV5.PRM] in [PRM File]. Click [Browse] Button to select the
file uploaded before PCB change.
PC
Up & Download END

Power Off
JV5
Power OFF
***DOWNLOADING***
7b. ~ Indication during download ~ 8. Confirmation of success 9. Shut down JV5.

* Click [Abort] Button to cancel. Above dialog appears when down- Confirm the above indication to
load is successfully completed. appear on JV5 Operation Panel
Click [OK] Button. before shutting off the power.
3- 74
Overhaul of PCBs
Content Adjust electric current of X-

motar and Y-motor. STOP ADJUST
3 adjust items are shown in
5. Adjust Main the right. 2 adjustments are
conducted on each motor.
Y MOVING ADJUST
PCB Motor Adjusting

contents
Set to minimum motorHunt-
ing noise at operation of each X MOVING ADJUST
Current
motor.
Tools – On X-Motor: Stop adjust
X moving adjust
On Y Motor: Stop adjust
Y moving adjust
~ Motor Current Adjust Outline ~
* Adjust value varies on each motor
and each machine
* Adjustable range is within
130~160 on each motor.
(Start with Maintenance Open Mode) #MOTOR CURRENT #MOTOR CURRENT

STOP ADJUST <ent> [ENTER] : Set STOP ADJUST <ent> [ ]/[ ] : SW
L.*> [JV5-01]
[ FUNCTION] [^] CurrentValueUP #MOTOR CURRENT
[V] CurrentValueDOWN
X MOVING ADJUST<ent> [ENTER] : Set

[ ]/[ ] : CV
#ADJUST X = 0 Y = 0 [ ]/[ ] :SW
HEAD ADJUST <ent> [ ]/[ ] : SW

(****) (****) [ENTER] : Ret
#X MOVING ADJUST
0 ~255 (Input Range)

[ ]/[ ] : CV
#ADJUST S= 10mm/s A=0.20G [ ]/[ ] :Set
MOTOR CURRENT <ent> [ENTER] : Set

X= 100mm [ENTER] : Return
1. Select “MOTOR CURRENT” in 2. Execute “STOP ADJUST”. 3a. Execute “X MOVING ADJUST”.
#ADJUST MODE
Adjust electric current value of X-
* Start with the Maintenance Open motor and Y-motor so that Hunting
Mode. noise of both motor is minimized on
the station in not carriage out.
(At X-motor drv.)

#X MOVING ADJUST #XmovingADJUST *RUN* [ ]/[
] : VC #MOTOR CURRENT
xxx (xxxx) [END] : Ret
STOP ADJUST <ent>

[ ]/[ ] : CV [ ]/[ ] : SW
S= 10mm/s A=0.20G [ ]/[ ] : Move S= 10mm/s A=0.20G
X= 100mm [ENTER] : Exec X= 100mm
[END] : Return #MOTOR CURRENT
Y MOVING ADJUST<ent>
X-axis consecutive drive Input values with target- [ENTER] : Set
(X-mortar drive) ting 130~160 .

[END]
(Input range 0~255) #Y MOVING ADJUST
* * Not Cap OFF

[ ]/[ ] : CV
#MOTOR CURRENT S= 10mm/s A=1.00G [ ]/[ ] : SW
STOP ADJUST <ent> Y= 100mm [ENTER] : Return
3b. Input test conditions to execu te 3c. With listening to Hunting noise at 4a. Execute “Y MOVING ADJUST”.
X-motor driving, adjust value to
* Input the following conditions. minimize the noise.
Speed (S) : 5 ~ 10 mm/s
Acceleration (A) : 0.2 G Check the noise of X-motor at the
Length (X) : approx. left back side of JV-5.
50 ~ 100 mm
3- 75
(At Y-motor drv.)

#Y MOVING ADJUST #YmovingADJUST *RUN* [ ]/[ ] : CV
xxx (xxxx) [END] : Return

#MOTOR CURRENT
STOP ADJUST <ent>
[ ]/[ ] : CV
S= 10mm/s A=1.00G [ ]/[ ] : Move S= 10mm/s A=1.00G [END] :Return
Y= 100mm [ENTER] : Exec Y= 100mm

[END] : Return
Input values with target- End

(Carriage out) ting 130~160 .
[END] (Input range 0~255)
Y-axis consecutive drive
(Y-motor drive) #MOTOR CURRENT
STOP ADJUST <ent>
4b. Input test conditions to execute 4c. With listening to Hunting noise at 5. Press [END] prulal of times to end.
Y-motor driving, adjust value to
Speed (S) : 5 ~ 10 mm/s
Acceleration (A) : 1.0 G Check the noise of Y-motor at the
Length (Y) : approx. right back side of JV-5.
50 ~ 100 mm
3- 76
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-2. HDC PCB
Behind
(M507164)
HDC PCB Loosen (x6)

pected move.
easier.
HDC4 (CN14)
HDC2 (CN12)
P3x10 SMW (x2)
HDC3 (CN13)
Release clamp. Remove FPC(x4)
HDC1 (CN11)
Loosen screws and draw out.

3. Release FPC Clamp. 4. Loosen the screws (x2) and slide 5. Remove FPC(x4) to take out.
HDC toward you.
Loosen the screws (x2) for the
aimed HDC and draw out HDC
toward you to release connector.
HDC PCB Assembly

(E104083)
OK NG
2. Reassemble
P4x12 SMW (x2)
HDC PCB
A screw washer Screw washer is
is outside of the inside of the
cover. cover.
HDC Bracket (M507162)
6. Remove HDC Bracket from HDC Reverse the disassembly procedure * Put cover inside of loosened
PCB Assembly. for reassembly. screws to tighten them.
3- 77
3-3-3. IO PCB
Behind
IO PCB
(M507164) Loosen (x6)

pected move.
easier.
IO PCB
Assembly
(E104085)
Clamp
Clamp P3x10 SMW (x5)
2a. Release clamps (x2) to remove 2b. ~ Remove clamps and connectors. ~ 3a. Remove IO PCB Assembly.
connectors.
Release upper and lower clamp to
disconnect all connectors for II/O
PCB.
OK NG
2. Reassemble
IO PCB
cover. cover.
3b. ~ IO PCB Assembly ~ Reverse the disassembly procedure * Put cover inside of loosened
for reassembly. screws to tighten them.
3- 78
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-4. USB PCB
Behind
(M507164)
USB PCB Loosen (x6)

pected move.
easier.
USB Protection Bracket

(M507828)
P4x12 SMW (x4)
B3x6
Surface Cover RS
P3x10 SMW (x2) (M507507)
IF Bracket (M507318)
2. Remove USB Protection Bracket. 3. Remove Surface Cover RS. 4. Remove IF Bracket.
P3x10 SMW (x4) IF Relay PCB
USB PCB Assembly USB PCB Assembly

(E103711) (E103711)
IF Relay PCB
(E103701)
5. Loosen the screws (x4) for USB 6. Remove USB PCB Assembly. 7a. Remove IF Relay PCB.
PCB Assembly.
Remove USB PCB Assembly from
Main PCB Connectors together with
IF Relay PCB.
3- 79
USB PCB Assembly (E103711)
7b. ~ USB PCB Assembly ~
OK NG
2. Reassemble
USB PCB
cover. cover.
Reverse the disassembly procedure * To connect USB PCB (IF Relay * Put cover inside of washers for
for reassembly. PCB) with Main PCB, certainly fit loosened screws to tighten them.
the connector to the bottom.
3- 80
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-5. Head Relay PCB
Behind
1. Remove Head
Relay PCB
pected move.
Release upper & lower clamps.
Head Head Head Head

1 3 2 4
Head Relay PCB
(E104237)
Inter-board Connector
2a. Release 2 Clamps (upper left, 2b. ~ PCB Layout ~ 3. Remove Head Relay PCB.
lower right).
Remove Head Relay PCB from
Release the clamps for the aimed Slider PCB Assembly.
Head Relay PCB from Slider PCB. (Inter-board Connector)
Connector
2. Reassemble
Head Relay PCB
FPC (x2) Right bottom first
4. Disconnect connectors and FPCs. Reverse the disassembly procedure * To fix Head Relay PCB to Slider
for reassembly. PCB, first hang the lower right
Disconnect the connector (CN3) and clamp as shown above.
FPCs (CN1,2) from Head Relay
PCB.
3- 81
3-3-6. Slider PCB
Behind Maintenance Cover R (M601943)
1. Remove
Slider PCB
pected move.
Rear Cover R B3x6 (x2)

(M507496)
P4x12 SMW (x11)
Loosen (x4) Fix with tape.

Right
2. Remove Rear Cover R. 3. Remove the head cover. 4. Fix FPCs with tape.
Remove right and left screws to Bind 2 places shown in the picture
remove the head cover. with tape for avoiding a mess at
removing FPC.
Release U/L Clamps.
Head Relay PCB

(E104237)
Disconnect FPC
Inter-board Connector
5. Disconnect all FPCs. 6a. Remove all of Head Relay PCBs. 6b. ~ Remove Head Relay PCB~
Release clamps (upper left & lower Disconnect Head Relay PCB from
right) on Slider PCB fixing Head Slider PCB Assembly.
Relay PCB. (Inter-board Connection)
3- 82
Overhaul of PCBs
P3x10 SMW (x6)

Release connectors
Disconnect grounding wire.
Grounding Wire
7. Release all connectors. 8a. Loosen the screws (x6) for Slider 8b. ~ Disconnect grounding wire. ~
PCB.
Release all connectors and ground-
ing wires from the lower left of Loosen all the screws including
Slider PCB. grounding wire on the lower left of
Slider PCB.
9a. Remove Slider PCB. 9b. ~ Slider PCB ~

Shift Slider PCB left to remove.
CN6 CN9 CN12 CN15

CN7 CN10 CN13 CN16
CN8 CN11 CN14 CN17
2. Reassemble Head Head Head Head

Slider PCB HDC1 HDC3 HDC2 HDC4
1 3 2 4
Head1 Head3 Head2 Head4

Reverse the disassembly procedure * Caution: To connect FPC, align * Layout of each Head Relay PCB is
for reassembly. the surface of terminal and shown above. Be careful of wrong
certainly insert to the bottom. Be connection.
careful of wrong connection.
There are many connectors.
3- 83
OK NG

Remove tape (x2) cover. cover.
Right bottom first
* To fix Head Relay PCB to Slider * Do not forget to remove tape * Put cover inside of washers for
PCB, first hang the lower right applied on FPCbefore placing the loosened screws to tighten them.
clamp as shown above. cover.
3- 84
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-7. Power PCB
Behind
MF Cover C 160/130
Loosen (160:8, 130:6)
1. Remove
Power PCB Warning: Start operation after 5 min-
utes elapssing from the
main power OFF. P4x12 SMW (160:12, 130:10)
Residual high voltage may
cause electric shock.
1. Shut off the main power. 2. Remove MF Cover C.
* Be sure to shut the main circuit Take off Cap Station Covers behind
breaker on the back to prevent the printer.
unexpected move. 130S: MF Cover C 130 (M507418)
160S: MF Cover C 160 (M507165)
P3x10 SMW (x9)
Power PCB Assembly

(E300428)
Warning: Take care not to get electric

shock!!
Never touch to solder
behind power PCB.
Residual high voltage may
cause electrick shock.
3. Release all connectors. 4a. Remove Power PCB Assembly. 4b. ~ Warning st Removing the PCB ~
Remove 3 connectors(CN 1, 4, 5) Remove screws (x9), and remove
connected to the Power PCB. the PCB with taking care not to get
electrich shock.
4c. ~ Removing PCB ~ 4d. ~ Power PCB Assembly ~

* Hold the PCB as shown in the
picture above not to touch the
back surface of the PCB.
3- 85
Content Use volume for each power

source for adjustment.

Volume No. +42V : VR4
+24V : VR1
2. Adjust Power
L.*> [JV5-01]
+5V : VR2 [ FUNCTION]
+3.3V : VR3
PCB Voltage Tools Slotted screwdriver
Warning: The power in ON at this
#TEST
CHECK PATTERN <ent> [ ]/[ ] : SW
adjust. Use above tools, and #TEST

touch only instructed parts. VOLTAGE CHECK <ent> [ENTER] : Set
1. Select “VOLTAGE CHECK” in

#TEST MODE
* Start with the Maintenance Open
Mode.
VR2 VR4 VR1

VR1:: +24V
+24V
3.3V -> 3.3V (****)

5V -> 5.0V (****)
24V -> 24.0V (****)
42V -> 42.0V (****)
VR3
VR1
2a. Adjust volume with checking dis- 2b. Turn volume checking LCD. VR1 Adjustment
plays on LCD.
VR2: +5V VR3: +3.3V VR4: +42V
VR2 Adjustment VR3 Adjustment VR4 Adjustment
3- 86
Overhaul of PCBs
Sliding must be smooth. OK NG
3. Reassemble
Power PCB
Roll Base Possible same height cover. cover.
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Caution: Reassemble MF Cover C * Put cover inside of washers for
for reassembly. in the same height so that adjacent loosened screws to tighten them.
Guide Rails come into flat. And
check whether Roll Base slides
smoothly.
3- 87
3-3-8. Heater PCB
Behind Maintenance Cover L (M601944)
1. Remove
Heater PCB
Warning: Take care not to get electric
shock!! Be sure to turn the

power OFF with rear power
SW.
1. Shut off the main power. 2. Remove Maintenance Cover L.

* As the front power switch does not
stop the power to the heater PCB,
there is a fear of getting electric
shock.
P4x12 SMW (x7)
P4x12 SMW (x11)

Rear Cover L
Left Cover (M507497)
(M507494)
Loosen (x2) Heater PCB Assembly

Loosen (x3) (E104043)
3. Remove Left Cover. 4. Remove Rear Cover L. 5. Disconnect all connectors.
Loosen screws (x2) on bottom side Loosen screws (x3) on bottom side,
to remove the cover. and remove screws shown in the pic-
ture above to remove the cover.
Locking Guard
Spacer
Pinch to release
Heater PCB Assy
(E104043)
6a. Remove Heater PCB Assembly. 6b. ~ Heater PCB ~
Release the hook on the top of Lock-
ing Guard Spacer (x4) to remove.
3- 88
Overhaul of PCBs
Upper: To SSR
2. Reassemble Any of
same
colors
Heater PCB will do.
Lower: To thermostat of each

Heater Assembly
Red: Pre-heater Blue: Black:
Printheater After-heater
Reverse the disassembly procedure * See the above illustration for right ~ Connection ~
for reassembly. connection.
OK NG

cover. cover.
* Put cover inside of washers for

loosened screws to tighten them.
3- 89
3-3-9. BOX Relay PCB
Behind
1. Remove
BOX Relay PCB
Raise Clamp Lever.
pected move.
1. Shut off the main power. 2. Raise Clamp Lever.
P4x12 SMW (x5)

Pump Cover T
(M507253)
Loosen (x3)
BOX Relay PCB Assembly
(E104351)
3. Remove Pump Cover T. 4. Remove connectors (x2) on 5. Disconnect all connectors (x7).
bottom side of the printer.
Loosen bottom side screw (x3), and
remove top right and left screws Remove connectors for the dryer fan
(x3). and the exhaust duct connected
to the relay BOX.
L: Exhaust duct R :Dryer FAN

Assy side Assy side
P4x12 SMW (x4)
6a. Remove BOX Relay PCB Assem- 6b. ~ BOX Relay PCB ~ 6c. ~ BOX Relay PCB (Connector) ~
bly.
3- 90
Overhaul of PCBs
L: Exhaust duct
Assy side (white)
OK NG
2. Reassemble
BOX relay PCB
R :Dryer FAN is outside of the inside of the
Assy Side (black) cover. cover.
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Connector connections on the * Put cover inside of washers for
for reassembly. bottom side of the printer are loosened screws to tighten them.
shown in the picture above.
3- 91
3-3-10. Keyboard PCB
Behind Right
1. Remove
Keyboard PCB
breaker on the back to prevent unex- Move flucrum pin to inward and
pected move. remove it from the pin hole
1. Shut off the main power. 2a. Remove Front Cover L.

Open the cover, move the right ful-
crum pin to inward and remove it
from the pin hole.
Left P4x12 SMW (x6)

Right
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
Remove the pin from the left shaft Remove right and left screws (x6),
hole to remove the front cover. and remove Y cover F.
persons.
Right Left
P4x12 SMW
Loosen (x4) Tilt
Front cover
P4x12 SMW Sensor R
KB Cover
(M601945)
Loosen
Down Clamp Lever
P4x12 SMW
5. Down Clamp Lever 6a. Remove KB Cover. 6b. ~ Removing KB Cover 2 ~

Loosen right 4 screws. Remove ascrew over thr front cover
sensor R, loosen a bottom screw, and
remove lower screws fixing the KB
cover shown in the picture above.
3- 92
Overhaul of PCBs
Left KB Panel (M601980)

Disconnect connectors.
Loosen (x3)
P4x12 SMW
KB Cover
(M601945)
Not to hit P4x12 SMW (x4)
6c. ~ Removing KB Cover 3 ~ 7a. Remove KB Panel. 7b. ~ Disconnect connectors of KB

Panel. ~
Loosen screwa (x3), remove the KB Loosen the screws (x4) and discon-
cover with taking care not to hit the nect connectors from Keyboard Turn KB Panel 180° toward you to
dryer unit. PCB. disconnect connectors (x4).
TP3x8 F (x6)
Keyboard PCB
Assembly (E104089)
8a. Remove Keyboard PCB Assembly. 8b. ~ Behind KB Panel ~ 8c. ~ Keyboard PCB Assembly ~
* Caution: Lay KB Panel down to
remove Keyboard PCB so as to
prevent KB Top from losing or
falling.
Keep from dust or dirt.
2. Reassemble
Keyboard PCB
Keyboard PCB
Behind KB Panel Assembly
* Caution: Check the surface and 1. Reassemble Keyboard PCB
within window of LCD for dirt Assembly.
and dust before reassembly.
* Point: Lay thick things left and
right under KB Panel to make
fixing of KB Top easier.
3- 93
KB Panel (M601980)
Join connectors.
P4x12 SMW (x4)
2. Check clicking touch of buttons. 3a. Reassemble KB Panel. 3b. ~ Reassemble KB Panel. ~
Press each button to check clicking Join connectors (x4) to Keyboard Tighten the screws (x4).
touch. PCB Assembly.
Error Action
Cover Open Error Check the designated sensor
(Rear) Power switch ON appears. to keep “ON”.
3. Test No indication on
LCD
Check connectors to LCD.
Keyboard and [ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON

Doesn’t enter
Maintenance
Mode.
Wrong recognition of any key
due to excess tightening
LCD Key entry isn’t recognized

→(See Table3-2. )
* Execute test of a keyboard and 1. Turn on the power in Maintenance Table3-1.Troubleshooting

LCD with “TEST“ of Mode.
“MAINTENANCE MODE”. If JV-5 can not be started or an error
[REMOTE] + [FUNCTION] + Power is displayed, see the table above.
ON
L.*> [JV5-01] #TEST Press all keys including JOG,

[ FUNCTION]
[ FUNCTION] and finally [END].
CHECK PATTERN <ent> or [ ] x10
#KEYBOARD TEST [ END] :
Key->[ENTER] to close
[ FUNCTION]
FUNCTION or [ ] x6
#TEST
SET UP <ENT> KEYBOARD TEST <ent> [ ENTER]
[ ] x2
Test is finished.
FUNCTION Indication of a name #KEYBOARD TEST

[ ENTER] Press all [END] :
#TEST <ENT> of the pushed key. [END]-> END TEST
keys includ- to close
#KEYBOARD TEST ing JOG.
Key-> NONE
#TEST (Test Mode Menu) #TEST
CHECK PATTERN <ent> KEYBOARD TEST <ent>
2. Call Test Mode Menu. 3. Start “KEYBOARD TEST”. 4. Close “KEYBOARD TEST”.
Press any key, and the name will be
displayed on LCD. (“NONE” is dis-
played if no key is pressed.)
3- 94
Overhaul of PCBs
Failure Action Failure Action #TEST

[ FUNCTION]
Firmware failure? Restart JV-5 to reconfirm the Connector Check the connection (CN5). KEYBOARD TEST <ent> or [ ] x1
same trouble occurs. disconnection (See P.3- 70 )

Update firmware. (Main PCB)
Cable failure Check Keyboard Cable #TEST
Connector Check the connection (CN3). Assembly for disconnection. LCD TEST <ent> [ ENTER]
disconnection
(Keyboard PCB) Part failure Replace parts below.
• KB Top
KB Top mounting Check key touch. if any is • Keyboard Cable Assembly (Test Start)
failure rubbing, disassemble KB Top (E104362) !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
to assemble over. • Keyboard PCB Assembly
Keyboard PCB Directly press SW on (E104087)
SW failure Keyboard PCB to • Main PCB Assembly
(E104082) !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
check.recognization.
””””””””””””””””””””
Table3-2. Troubleshooting 1 Table3-3. Troubleshooting 2 5. Start “LCD TEST”.

LCD TEST automatically scrolls
strings within 0x21~0xFF line by
line.
Failure Action Failure Action

Firmware failure? Restart JV-5 to reconfirm the Part failure Replace parts below.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! same trouble occurs. • Keyboard Cable Assembly
”””””””””””””””””””” Update firmware. (E104362)
####################
• Keyboard PCB Assembly
Connector Check the connection (CN3). (E104087)
disconnection • Main PCB Assembly
(Keyboard PCB) (E104082)
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
”””””””””””””””””””” Connector Check the connection (CN5).
####################
disconnection (See P.3- 70 )
[ END ] (Main PCB)
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
to end test
Cable failure Check Keyboard Cable
Assembly for disconnection.
#TEST
LCD TEST <ent>
6. End “LCD TEST”. Table3-4. Troubleshooting 1 Table3-5. Troubleshooting 2
OK NG
4. Reassemble
Covers
cover. cover.
Reverse he disassembly procedure * Put cover inside of washers for

to Step 7 for reassembly. loosened screws to tighten them.
3- 95
3-3-11. Dot Detection PCB
Behind Right
1. Remove
Dot Detection
PCB
breaker on the back to prevent unex- Move fulcrum pin to inward
pected move. and remove it from pin hole

Open the cover, move right fulcrum
pin to inward, and remove it from
the pin hole.
Left P4x12 SMW (x6)

Right
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
Remove the pin from the left shaft Loosen right and left screws (x6), to
hole to remove the cover. remove Y cover F.
persons.
Right Left
P4x12 SMW
Loosen (x4) Tilt
Front cover
P4x12 SMW Sensor R
KB Cover
(M601945)
Loosen
Down Clamp Lever
P4x12 SMW
5. Down Clamp Lever 6a. Remove KB Cover. 6b. ~ Removing KB Cover 2 ~

Loosen right screws (x4). Remove a screwover of the front
cover sensor R, loosen lower screw,
and remove a lower screw fixing the
KB cover shown in the drawing
above.
3- 96
Overhaul of PCBs
Left
P3x10 SMW (x4)
Loosen (x3)
P4x12 SMW
KB Cover Dot Detection PCB

(M601945) Assembly (M507497)
Not to hit
6c. ~ Removing KB Cover 3 ~ 7. Disconnect connectors (x2). 8a. Remove Dot Detection PCB
Assembly.
Loosen screws (x3), remove the KB
cover with taking care not to hit the
dryer unit.
Dot Detection PCB

Assembly (E104091)
8b. ~ Dot Detection PCB Assembly ~
2. Reassemble
Dot Detection
PCB
for reassembly.
3- 97
3-3-12. Ink Unit PCB
Behind P4x12 SMW (x6)
1. Remove Ink
Unit PCB
breaker on the back to prevent unex- ICU Cover R (M507575)
pected move.
1. Shut off the main power. 2a. Remove ICU Cover R.
Right side face : 2qty
Top face side : 4qty
P4x12 SMW (x4) Pinch to release
Locking Guard
Spacer
Ink Unit PCB Assembly (M507497)

2b. ~ Removing ICU Cover~ 3. Disconnect all connectors. 4a. Remove Ink Unit PCB Assembly.
Left side face : 2qty Release the hook on the top of Lock-
Rear face bottom : 2qty ing Guard Spacer (x4) to remove.
2. Reassemble
Ink Unit PCB
Ink Unit PCB Assembly (E104086)
4b. ~ Ink Unit PCB ~ Reverse the disassembly procedure * Be careful of right connection.
for reassembly. There are many connectors.
3- 98
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-13. Side Relay PCB
1. Remove
Side Relay PCB
pected move.
Loosen (x2)
P4x12 SMW (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)
3a. Remove Right Cover. 3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ 4a. Disconnect all connectors.
Loosen bottom back and front Right side face : 4qty
screws, and remove screws Right top face : 3qty
described below.
Bottom side : 2qty
Side Relay PCB

(E104352)
Pinch to release
Locking Guard
Spacer (x4)
Side Relay PCB assy. (E104352)

4b. ~ Disconnection of connectors ~ 5a. Remove Side Relay PCB. 5b. ~ Side Relay PCB ~
Release the hook on the top of Lock-
ing Guard Spacer (x4) to remove.
3- 99
OK NG
2. Reassemble
Side Relay PCB
cover. cover.
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Put cover inside of washers for

for reassembly. loosened screws to tighten them.
3- 100
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-14. ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge)
1. Remove
ID point of
Contact PCB
pected move.
Release clamp.
Loosen (x2)
P4x12 SMW (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)
3a. Remove Right Cover. 3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ 4. Release clamp.
Loosen screws on bottom side back Right side face : 4qty Release the clamp for ID Point of
and front, and remove screws Right top face : 3qty Contact PCB.
described bwlow.
Bottom side : 2qty
TP3x8 F (x2)
Loosen (x2)
Disconnect connector.
Slide
ID Point of Contact PCB

Assembly (E103704)
5. Disconnect connector. 6a. Remove ID Point of Contact PCB 6b. ~ ID Point of Contact PCB ~
Assembly.
Disconnect the connector of ID
Point of Contact PCB. Loosen the screws (x2) and slide lat-
erally to remove from Cartridge
Frame.
3- 101
ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly

(E103704) OK NG
2. Reassemble
ID point of
Contact PCB A screw washer Screw washer is
OK NG is outside of the inside of the
cover. cover.
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Replace Contact PCB if the head * Put cover inside of washers for
for reassembly. of either contact is worn. loosened screws to tighten them.
3- 102
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-15. LED PCB
Behind
1. Remove
LED PCB
breaker on the back to prevent unex- Maintenance Cover L (M601944)
pected move.
P4x12 SMW (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x2) P4x12 SMW (x2)
2a. Remove ICU Covers F and R 2b. ~ Loosen the screws on the right side. ~ 2c. ~ Loosen the screws on the bot-
together. tom of back side. ~
Loosen 6 screws:
2 on left side, 2 on right side,
2 on bottom of back side
P4x12 SMW (x6)

2d. ~ ICU Covers F and R ~ * POINT: Lift a little and pull 3a. Remove IC Slot Bracket F.
toward you for easy removal.
Loosen the screws (x6) to remove IC
Slot Bracket F.
3- 103
IC Slot Bracket F (M507203)
P3x10 SMW (x3)
LED PCB Assembly (E104088)
3b. ~ Remove IC Slot Bracket F. ~ 4a. Remove LED PCB Assembly. 4b. ~ LED PCB Assembly ~
Loosen the screws (x3) to remove * Procedure is common to 2 sets of
LED PCB Assembly. LED PCB.
2. Reassemble
LED PCB
Reverse the disassembly procedure * After reassembly, check whether

for reassembly. every LED illuminates on startup.
3- 104
Overhaul of PCBs
3-3-16. Take-up PCB
Behind
P3x6 SMW
(x3)
Take-up Cover
1. Remove (M507538)
Take-up PCB
pected move.
1. Shut off the main power. 2. Remove Take-up Cover.
P3x10 SMW (x4)
P4x12 SMW (x2)

3. Disconnect all connectors. 4. Remove Take-up PCB. 5a. Remove Take-up PCB.
Loosen the screws and remove Take- Loosen the screws (x4) and remove
up PCB Assembly (E104087) Take-up PCB Assembly from Take-
together with Take-up PCB Bracket up PCB Bracket.
(M507584).
2. Reassemble P4x12 SMW
Take-up PCB
Take-up PCB Assembly (E104087) Tighten with
ground
5b. ~ Take-up PCB ~ Reverse the disassembly procedure * When winding PCB BKT to the
for reassembly. winding unit, do not forget to
place ground wire on the place
shown in the picture above, and
fasten together.
3- 105
3-3-17. Drying Fan Fork PCB
Behind
1. Remove
Drying Fan Fork
PCB
pected move.
1. Shut off the main power. 2. Remove a black connector on
lower part of the printer.
Remove a connector for the dryer
fan connected to BOX relay PCB.
Left
Belt Screw x2 (M400140)

Mini knob x2
(KS-15x16-A)
Right Right
3a. Remove Open and close cover 3b. ~ Remove Open/Close cover~ 4a. Remove dryer FAN Assy from
Assy. right and left stays.
Take out fulcrum pin on the left side
Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and of cover from from frame to remove Remove right and left mini-knobs,
remove left side of the cover. open/close cover. and remove a belt lock screw.
Fan cover reinforcement plate Drying fan cover 130/160 R

(M507907) x2 (M504817/5285)
B3x6 (x12)
Mini knob
Right B3x6 (x2/4)

4b. ~ Removing Druer FAN Assy ~ 5a. Remove right and left FAN cover 6. Removing Dryer FAN Cover R
reinforcer plates.
* Take care not to drop the dryer Remove screws to remove the FAN
FAN Assy. Operation with 2 label side cover.
persons.
3- 106
Overhaul of PCBs
Remove connectors
Drying Fan Fork PCB Assembly
P3x6 SMW (x2) (E103646) x2
7. Removing All Connectors 8a. Removing Dryer FAN Fork PCB 8b. ~ Dryer FAN Fork PCB ~
Remove all connectors for the dryer
FAN from the dryer FAN fork PCB.
* 2 same PCBs are placed on both
sides.
Front Back
without fan label without fan label
2. Reassemble
Drying Fan
Fork PCB
Reverse the disassembly procedure * At assembling Dryer FAN Assy,
for reassembly. confirm the front side, and
assemble with 2 persons with
taking care that the front fase
comes top.
3- 107
3- 108
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4. Overhaul of Sensors
Sensor parts for JV5-130S/160S are shown below.
3-4-1. Origin Sensor p. 3 - 110 3-4-10. Head Up/Down Encoder p. 3 - 132
3-4-2. Wiper Sensor p. 3 - 112 3-4-11. Paper Sensor p. 3 - 136
3-4-3. Clamp Sensor p. 3 - 113 3-4-12. Media Rotary Encoder Assembly p. 3 - 139
3-4-4. Bottom Point Sensor p. 3 - 115 3-4-13. Front Cover Sensor L p. 3 - 147
3-4-5. Cap Sensor p. 3 - 117 3-4-14. Front Cover Sensor R p. 3 - 149
3-4-6. Paper Width Sensor p. 3 - 119 3-4-15. Maintenance Cover Sensor L p. 3 - 151
3-4-7. Jam Sensor p. 3 - 121 3-4-16. Maintenance Cover Sensor R p. 3 - 152
3-4-8. Paper Thickness Encoder p. 3 - 125 3-4-17. Ink Leakage Sensor p. 3 - 153
3-4-9. Y Encoder p. 3 - 129 3-4-18. Waste Tank Sensor p. 3 - 158
~ LEFT ~ ~ Head Assy ~

Head Up/Down Encoder
Y Encoder
Jam Sensor
Ink Leakage Sensor L
Paper
Thickness
Cap Sensor
Maintenance Paper Width Sensor
Cover Sensor L
Front Cover Sensor L Paper Sensor

Media Rotary Ink Leakage Sensor R
Encoder Assembly
Maintenance Cover Sensor
Clamp Sensor
Front Cover Sensor
Origin Sensor
Wiper Sensor Bottom Point Sensor
Ink Leakage Sensor S
Waste Tank Sensor (x2)
3- 109
3-4-1. Origin Sensor
Behind
Power ON.
L.*> [JV5-01]
1. Remove [ST.MAINTE]
Origin Sensor ST.MAINTENANCE


pected move.
off the power.

Connector
P4x12 SMW
Origin Sensor
(0J-6505-N2)
2. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 3. Remove Origin Sensor. 4. Disconnect connector from Origin
Sensor.
Loosen the screw to remove Origin
Sensor.
Sensor
2. Reassemble
Origin Sensor
Origin sensor shade plate
(M507222)
Reverse the disassembly procedure * On reassembling the sensor,

for reassembly. confirm that the sensor is kept
from Origin Sensor Shade Plate
on Carriage.
When it contacts, loosen a screw to
adjust.
3- 110
Overhaul of Sensors
(Start with Maintenance Open Mode) #TEST

CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ] / [] :SW
L.*> [JV5-01]
3. Test [FUNCTION]
#TEST
SENSOR TEST <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix
(to Next)
Origin Sensor FUNCTION
SET UP <ENT> [ ] / [] : SW #SENSOR TEST
SET LEVER :OFF [ ] / [] : SW
FUNCTION
#TEST <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix #SENSOR TEST
(to Next) Y-ORIGIN :OFF
* Checking with “SENSOR TEST” 1. Select “TEST ” 2. Select “SENSOR TEST” to

of “TEST” (MAINTENANCE Start with the Maintenance Open display “Y-ORIGIN”.
MODE) Mode.
Sensor
#SENSOR TEST
Y-ORIGIN :OFF
Carriage is not on the origi-
nal position
#SENSOR TEST
Y-ORIGIN :ON
Carriage is on the original
position Origin sensor shade plate
(M507222)
3a. Checking ON/OFF Display 3b. ~ Confirmation at Abnormal ~

Move the carriage manually to If there is a problem on LCD dis-
check the sensor display on LCD. play, make sure that fixing of sensor,
positioning of a shade plate and the
* When it is normal, pussh [END] sensor, and connection of connectors
several times to end. are correct.
3- 111
3-4-2. Wiper Sensor
Maintenance Cover R (M601943) P4x12 SMW
1. Remove
Wiper Sensor
Wiper Sensor
(0J-6505-N2)
1. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 2. Remove Wiper Sensor.
Connector
Sensor
Shade Plate
2. Reassemble
Wiper Sensor
3. Disconnect connector from Wiper Reverse the disassembly procedure * On reassembling Wiper Sensor,
Sensor. for reassembly. confirm that the sensor is kept
from Shade Plate of Wiper Holder
Base.

L.*> [JV5-01] (to Next)
[FUNCTION]
3. Test
#SENSOR TEST
FUNCTION
<ENT> [ ] / [] : SW
Wiper Sensor
SET UP
#SENSOR TEST
WIPER :OFF
FUNCTION
#TEST <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix Move wiper to check
(to Next) ON/OFF
#TEST #SENSOR TEST
CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ] / [] : SW WIPER :ON
* Checking with “SENSOR TEST” 1. Select “TEST ”. 2. Check ON/OFF display on LCD
of “TEST” (MAINTENANCE Start with the Maintenance Open with “WIPER”.
MODE). Mode, and select “TEST”. Move the wiper manually, and check
sensor display on LCD.
3- 112
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-3. Clamp Sensor

1. Remove Loosen (x2)
Clamp Sensor P4x12 SMW (x2)
1. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 2a. Remove right cover and rear

cover R.
Loosen back and front screws on
lower part of right cover, and
remove screws shown in the picture
above.
Rear Cover R
(M507496)
P4x12 SMW
Loosen (x4) Connector

P4x12 SMW (x16)
2b. ~Remove Right Side Cover ~ 3. Loosen the screw and remove the 4. Disconnect connector from Clamp
Remove screws in the picture and
sensor together with Clamp Sensor.
take out from the right cover. Sensor Bracket.
* Take care not to drop the cover at
removing.
Clamp Sensor (PE01130)
B4x10
Clamp Sensor Bracket

(M507806)
5. Remove Clamp Sensor .
3- 113
OK NG
Shade Plate
2. Reassemble
Clamp Sensor
A washer of screw A washer of screw
Sensor cover cover.
Reverse the disassembly procedure * After reassembling Clamp Sensor, * Put cover inside of loosened
for reassembly. confirm that the sensor is kept screws to tighten them.
from CL Link.

L.*> [JV5-01] (to Next)
[FUNCTION]
3. Test
#SENSOR TEST
SET LEVER :OFF
FUNCTION
<ENT> [ ] / [] : SW Up/Down lever to check
Clamp Sensor
SET UP
ON/OFF
FUNCTION #SENSOR TEST
#TEST <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix SET LEVER :ON
(to Next)
#TEST
CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ] / [] : SW
* Check eith “SENSOR TEST” of 1. Select “TEST ” 2. Confirm ON/OFF display on LCD
“TEST” (MAINTENANCE Start with the Maintenance Open with “SET LEVER”.
MODE) Mode, and select “TEST”. Up/Down lever to check ON/OFF.
3- 114
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-4. Bottom Point Sensor
1. Remove Right Cover (M507493)
Bottom Point Loosen (x2)
Sensor P4x12 SMW (x2)
1. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 2a. Remove right cover and rear

cover R
Loosen front and back screws on
lower part of the right cover, and
remove screws shown in the picture.
P4x12 SMW
Rear Cover R
(M507496) Bottom Point Bottom Point
Sensor Bracket Sensor (0J-6505-N2)
(M507239)
P4x12 SMW (x16) Loosen (x4)

P4x12 SMW (x2)
2b. ~Remove Right Cover ~ 3. Remove Bottom Point Sensor 4. Disconnect connector to remove
together with Bracket. Bottom Point Sensor from
Remove screws shown in the pic- Bracket.
ture, and take out them from the Remove Bottom Point Sensor on the
right cover. back side of printer together with
* Take care not to drop the cover. Bracket.
Bottom Point Sensor

2. Reassemble
Bottom Point Bottom Point
Sensor Bracket
Sensor Bottom Point
Sensor Shade
(M507239)
Plate
P4x12 SMW (x2)
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Caution: On reassembling Bottom 1. Temporarily fix Bottom Point
for reassembly. Point Sensor Bracket, fix the Sensor Bracket.
bracket so that Shade Plate on
Station comes in the center of
sensor.
(Procedure is described next.)
3- 115
Shade Plate
Down
CW
Sensor
2. Turn the pulley and vertically shift 3a. Trim the position of the bracket so 3b.
Shade Plate (Station) to the height that Shade Plate comes in the cen-
as high as the sensor. (CW: down) ter of sensor, and fix with a screw.
OK NG
A washer of A washer of
screw is outside screw is inside of
of the cover the cover.
* Put cover inside of loosened

screws to tighten them.

L.*> [JV5-01]
3. Test
(to Next)
[FUNCTION] #SENSOR TEST
Bottom Point FUNCTION

SET UP <ENT> [ ] / [] : SW
#SENSOR TEST
Sensor FUNCTION
#TEST <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix
(to Next)
STATION :OFF
Up/Down the station to
check ON/OFF
#TEST #SENSOR TEST
CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ] / [] : SW STATION :ON
* Check with “SENSOR TEST” of 1. Select “TEST ”. 2. Check ON/OFF display on LCD
“TEST” (MAINTENANCE Start with the Maintenance Open with “STATION”.
MODE) Mode, and select “TEST”. Up/Down the station manually to
check the sensor display on LCD.
3- 116
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-5. Cap Sensor
Behind
Power ON.
L.*> [JV5-01]
Cap Sensor ST.MAINTENANCE


pected move.
off the power.
Maintenance Cover R (M601943) P3x10 SMW
Cap Sensor
(0J-6505-N2)
B3x10
Station Sensor Protection
Cover (M507412)
2. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 3. Remove Station Sensor Protection 4. Remove Cap Sensor and
Cover. disconnect the connector.
Head Height Sensor

Shield Plate (M507243)
2. Reassemble
Cap sensor
Sensor
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Caution: Fix Cap Sensor so as to

for reassembly. keep from Head Height Sensor
Shield Plate.
3- 117

CAP SENSOR <ent> [ENTER] : Set
L.*> [JV5-01]
3. Test
[FUNCTION]
CAP OFF (Station lowest position)
FUNCTION
Cap Sensor SET UP
FUNCTION
<ENT> [ ] / [] : SW #CAP SENSOR
OFF (001)
#TEST <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix Sensor read value

(to Next)
#TEST Sensor state
CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ] / [] : SW (OFF, ON, Error)
* Checking with “SENSOR TEST” 1. Select “TEST ” 2a. Check display on LCD with “CAP
of “TEST” (MAINTENANCE Start with the Maintenance Open SENSOR”
MODE) Mode, and select “TEST”. When “CAP SENSOR” is executed,
the station moves to the lowest posi-
tion.
#CAP SENSOR
OFF (001) [END] : End
CAP ON
#TEST
CAP SENSOR <ent>
Press [END] several times to end
2b. ~ Cap OFF State ~ 3a. Check LCD display and actual 3b. ~ Cap ON State ~
state, and press [END] plural of
times to end. [END]
3- 118
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-6. Paper Width Sensor
Behind
Power ON.
1. Remove L.*> [JV5-01]

[ST.MAINTE]
Paper Width ST.MAINTENANCE
Sensor CARRIDGE OUT <ent> [ENTER]

pected move.
off the power.
Right

Move fulcrum pin to inward,
and remove it from pin hole
Right Right
Assy.
Take out fulcrum pin on the left side Open the cover, shift fulcrum pin to
Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and of cover from from frame to remove inward, and remove it from pin hole.
remove left side of the cover. open/close cover.
Left P4x12 SMW (x6)

B3x6 (x2)

Remove a pin from the left shaft Remove right and left screws (x6) Remove roght and left screws to
hole to remove the front cover. and remove Y Cover F. remove the head cover.
persons.
3- 119
Remove connector
Insert driver
P3x10 SMW
Cutter Unit Assy. Paper Width Sensor

(M006952) (E103960)
6. Remove a Screw of Paper Width 7. Remove Paper Width Sensor 8. Remove the connector
Sensor
Remove the paper width sensor from
Insert a driver into a place on the the cutter Assy.
Cutter Assy shown in the picture to
remove a screw fixing the sensor.
2. Reassemble
Paper Width
Sensor
for reassembly.
3- 120
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-7. Jam Sensor
Behind
Power ON.
L.*> [JV5-01]
Jam Sensor ST.MAINTENANCE


pected move.
off the power.
Right

Move fulcrum pin to inward
Right Right
Assy.
Take out fulcrum pin on the left side Open the cover, move the fulcrum
Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and of cover from from frame to remove pin to inward and remove it from pin
remove left side of the cover. open/close cover. hole.
Left P4x12 SMW (x6)

B3x6 (x2)

Remove the pin from the keft shaft Remove right and left screws (x6) Remove right and left screws to
hole to remove the front cover. to remove Y Cover F. Take care not remove the head cover.
to drop the cover.
* Operation with more than 2 persons.
3- 121
JAM Unit Support

Bracket (M507257) P3x10 SMW (x2)
Jam Sensor
(0J-6505-N2)
JAM Unit B4x10
6. Remove JAM Unit 7. remove Jam Sensor

Remove screws (x2) of JAM Unit Remove a screw and take out the
Holder BKT, and remove the Jam Jam sensor from the head Protection
sensor with the head protection BKT.
BKT.
Sensor
2. Reassemble
Jam Sensor
Shielding
Reverse the disassembly procedure * After assembling the Jam sensor

for reassembly. to the Head protection BKT,
confirm that shielding part of the
Head protection arm does not
touch to the sensor.
Content Adjust assembling positions

of JAM unit (vertical) and Temp. joint
cutter unit (vertical, horizon-
3. JAM Tools
tal) using a jig.
Height adjust jig (Media Jam/
UNIT&CUTTER Cutter unit height position-
ing tool)
UNIT HEIGHT : OPT-J0108
Note: When only JAM unit is replaced,

adjust the cutter unit at the same
time JAM Unit Cutter Unit
* If the jig can not be arranged, 1. Set screws of both units at tempo-
using of an intervenient having rary joint state.
height of 7.5mm in the JAM unit
side and height of 7.0mm in the * Temporary joint state is that both
cutter unit side is allowed. units are held lightly.
3- 122
Overhaul of Sensors
Set bosses(x4) in platen slot
Down clamp lever
Notice: Keep clamp lever down at adjust-

ing.
PG setting should be 1.5mm.
Push to end
2. Down Clamp Lever 3. Set the Jig to Platen 4. Push the jig to the end
Set 4 bosses of the jig in slots in After setting, slide the jig to head
slots back and front for platen media side to the end (to stop).
plate as shown in the drawing above.
Push down
cutter tool
JAM Unit Cutter Unit
Height adjust jig

Slot for cutter tool
Height adjust jig Height adjust jig

5. Adjust JAM unit height and fix 6a. Adjust cutter unit height 6b. Adjust the cutter unit position
fith screws (x2). back-front.
* Adjust JAM unit position only Decide the unit position so that the
vertically. Back-front adjust is not cutter tool meets the slot (with push
required. down the cutter tool), anf fix it with
a screw.
Note : Cutter tool positioning slot has Note : On rare occasions, the tool comes
width wider than that of the tool. out of the slot because of assem-
Adjust the position within the Head Unit bling accident errors or deiffer-
range. ences of part accuracies.
Note : When there is no jig, push down In such a case, adjust again to the
the cutter toolAssy to the platen back-front optimum position
face and adjust using the cutter where the tool always in whole
slot of platen. L end Center R end slot on the platen.
Check cutter tool position at 3 points
6c. ~ Cutter Position Adjust Supplement ~ 7a. Cutter Tool Position Check 7b. Re-adjusting of the Cutter Tool
* Execute the following cutter tool back-front positioning.
Move the head unit to each right,
position check manually before center and left end on the platen, and
turning the power ON. push down the cutter tool Assy to
check back-front positioning.
3- 123

L.*> [JV5-01] (to Next)
[FUNCTION]
4. Test FUNCTION
#SENSOR TEST
Jam Sensor SET UP
FUNCTION
<ENT> [ ] / [] : SW
#SENSOR TEST
MEDIA JAM :OFF
#TEST <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix Push head protection arm to
(to Next) check ON/OFF.
#TEST #SENSOR TEST
CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ] / [] : Sw MEDIA JAM :ON
* Execute “SENSOR TEST” of 1. Select “TEST ”. 2a. Confirm ON/OFF display of the
“TEST” (MAINTENANCE Start with the Maintenance Open LCD with “MEDIA JAM”.
MODE). Mode and select “TEST”. Check the sensor display of LCD
with pushing the head protection
arm manually.
Push to confirm
sensor ON
Head protection arm

2b. ~ Confirm JAM sensor ON/OFF
~
4. Reassemble
Covers

for reassembly.
3- 124
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-8. Paper Thickness Encoder
Behind
Power ON.
1. Remove L.*> [JV5-01]

[ST.MAINTE]
Paper Thickness ST.MAINTENANCE
Encoder CARRIDGE OUT <ent> [ENTER]

pected move.
off the power.
Right

and remove it from pin hole.
Right Right
Assy.
Take out fulcrum pin on the left side Open the cover, move the right ful-
Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and of cover from from frame to remove crum pin to inward, and remove it
remove left side of the cover. open/close cover. from pin hole.
Left P4x12 SMW (x6)

B3x6 (x2)

Remove the pin from the left shaft Remove right and left screws (x6) to Remove roght and left screws to
hole to remove the front cover. remove Y cover F. remove the head cover.
* Take care not to drop the cover. Oper-
ation with more than 2 persons.
3- 125
P3x10 SMW (x2)
Cutter Unit
Assembly
(M006952)
P2x8 SMW (x2)
Paper Thickness Encoder
PCB (E103961)
6. Remove the Cutter Assy 7a. Remove the Paper Thickness 7b. ~ Paper Thickness Encoder PCB ~
Encoder PCB
Remove screws (x2), and remove
the paper thickness encoder from
Cutter Sensor Bracket
Paper Thickness Encoder

Encoder Scale
2. Reassemble
Paper Thickness
Encoder
Caution: Be careful not to damage Encoder
Scale.
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Assemble the encoder as shown in
for reassembly. the drawing in which it does not
contact to the encoder scale.
(Set the encoder scale at the center
position.)
Content Adjust fixing position of cut-

ter unit (vertically, horizon- Temp. joint
tally) using a jig.
3. Cutter Unit Tools Height adjust jig (Media Jam/
Cutter unit height position-
Positioning ing tool)
: OPT-J0108
Cutter Unit
* After assembling the paper * When the jig can not be arranged, 1. Set the screw of cutter unit to tem-
thickness encoder, execute the using an intervenient having poral joint state.
following adjustments. 7.0mm of cutter unit side height is
alloed. * Temporary joint state is that the
units is held lightly.
3- 126
Overhaul of Sensors
Down clamp lever
Notice:Keep the clamp lever down at

adjusting.
PG setting should be 1.5mm. Push to the end
2. Down the Clamp Lever. 3. Set the Jig to Platen 4. Push the Jig to the head side to the
end.
Set 4 bosses of the jig in slots in
slots back and front for platen media After setting, slide the jig to head
plate as shown in the drawing above. side to the end (to stop).
Push down Note : Cutter tool positioning slot has

cutter tool width wider than that of the tool.
Adjust the position within the
range.
Cutter Unit Note : When there is no jig, push down
the cutter toolAssy to the platen
face and adjust using the cutter
slot of platen.
Height adjust jig Cutter tool slot

Height adjust jig
5a. Adjust the Cutter Unit Height 5b. Adjust the Cutter Unit position 5c. ~ Cutter Position Adjust Supplement ~
back-front.
* Execute the following cutter tool
Decide the unit position so that the position check manually before
cutter tool meets the slot (with push turning the power ON.
down the cutter tool), anf fix it with
a screw.
Note : On rare occasions, the tool comes

out of the slot because of assem-
Head Unit bling accident errors or deiffer-
ences of part accuracies.
In such a case, adjust again to the
back-front optimum position
where the tool always in whole
L end Center R end slot on the platen.
6a. Check the Cutter Tool Position 6b. Re-adjusting of the Cutter Tool
back-front positioning.
center and left end on the platen, and
push down the cutter tool Assy to
3- 127
Content Measure each of media pres- [ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON
ence position and no presence (Start with Maintenance Open Mode)

position with downing..
4. Encoder Tools • Media
L.*> [JV5-01]
[FUNCTION]
Test FUNCTION
SET UP <ENT> [ ] / [] : SW
FUNCTION
(to Next)
#TEST
* Execute “ENCODER TEST” of * If the media is too thin to read, use 1. Select “TEST ”
“TEST” (MAINTENANCE a media within the specifications Start with the Maintenance Open
MODE) range. Mode and select “TEST”.
#TEST #CUTTER ENCODER

ENCODER TEST <ENT> [ENTER] : Set Result of a test.
THICK = 0.5mm
#ENCODER TEST Pr=-247 Mr=-231 [END] :End
LINEAR ENCODER <ent> [ ] / [] : Sw
Pr : Measurement of platen
#ENCODER TEST Mr : Measurement on media
CUTTER ENCODER <ent> [ENTER] : Fix
#CUTTER ENCODER
CHECK :ent [ENTER] : Exce.
2. Execute “CUTTER ENCODER”. 3. Check the test results and if there

is no error, finish the test.
Select “CUTTER ENCODER” of
“ENCODER TEST” to execute.
5. Reassemble
Covers

for reassembly.
3- 128
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-9. Y Encoder
Behind
Power ON.
L.*> [JV5-01]
Y Encoder ST.MAINTENANCE

pected move.
off the power.
Right

Right Right
Assy.
Left P4x12 SMW (x6)

B3x6 (x2)

Remove the pin from the left sgaft Remove right and left screws (x6), Remove right and left screws to
hole to remove the front cover. and remove Y cover F. remove the head cover.
Operation with more than 2 per-
sons.
3- 129
Y Encoder Sensor Linear encoder PCB

Bracket (M507221) assy. (E103961)
Remove connector
P4x12 SMW
P2x8 SMW (x2)
6. Remove Y encoder BKT. 7. Remove connector of the encoder. 8. Remove Y Encoder

Remove screws to remove Y
encoder sensor with Y encoder sen-
sor BKT.
Fix Y scale at the senter

of the sensor.
2. Reassemble Encoder
Y Encoder
Y Scale
Reverse the disassembly procedure * On reassembly of Y Encoder, fix Y

for reassembly. Scale at the position shown above.
Content Check the height of Y

Encoder.
Confirm that Y Scale is
set in the working area of
3. Y Encoder Tools
Y Encoder.
• Pen Light
Visual Inspection
* Caution: Be careful not to dirt or 1. Make sure that the scale locates at
damage Y Scale. the center of encoder reading part
watching from the side face.
3- 130
Overhaul of Sensors
5. Encoder
4. Reassemble Test
Covers
Y Encoder Sensor
Bracket (M507221)
* When the sensor contacts to the Reverse the disassembly procedure * Execute “ENCODER TEST” of
scale, adjust the position of for reassembly. “TEST” (MAINTENANCE
bracket. MODE)
Push Y encoder sensor BKT in
slightly, loosen or remove a fixing
screw to adjust.
Content Execute the following tests [ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON

1. ERROR CHECK L.*> [JV5-01]
ENCODER TEST <ENT> [ENTER] : Set
(MAINTENANCE#TEST) [FUNCTION]
2. VIsual Check #ENCODER TEST
LINEAR ENCODER <ent> [ENTER] : Set
3. PQ check (Test drawing) FUNCTION
SET UP <ENT> [ ] / [] : SW
#LINEAR ENCODER
Tools Media (for test drawing) ActiveWIDTH:****mm [ENTER] : Exec.
FUNCTION
#TEST <ENT> [ENTER] :Fix * Value of operation width
(to Next) is default at execution.
#TEST (Execute test:3 to&fro)
1. Select “TEST ” 2. Execute “LINEAR ENCODER”.

Start with the Maintenance Open Select “LINEAR ENCODER” of
Mode and select “TEST“. “ENCODER TEST” to execute.
Drawing Settings
#LINEAR ENCODER Y Encoder
Result of a test. Head Unit 6.25 %
Hi 4Pass Uni
MC 720 x 720
M =****.* E = ****.*
(Drawing only 2nd pass
Mc= 0.0 Ec= 0.0 [END] :End
Drawing
L end Center R end
Check PQ
Check that enoder does not contact Make sure that pinstripe does not appear
Pr : Measurement on Platen to the scale in visual. at a few mm pitch (about 2 - 4mm)
Mr: Measurement on Media (If not, finish the test.)
3. Check the test results and if there 4. Check contact of encoder 5. Execute drawing with the settings
is no erro, finish the test. above to check Print Quality.
Moving the head unit to each right,
center and left on the platen manu- * The pinstripe may appear accord-
ally, and check that encoder does not ing to encoder fixing position.In
contact to the scale in visual. this case, confirm the fixing posi-
tion and fix again.
3- 131
3-4-10. Head Up/Down Encoder
Power ON.
Behind
1. Remove Head L.*> [JV5-01]

[ST.MAINTE]
Up/Down ST.MAINTENANCE
Encoder CARRIDGE OUT <ent> [ENTER]

pected move.
off the power.
Right

remove it from pin hole.
Right Right
Assy.

Left
P4x12 SMW (x6)
Right Left
Head Cover (M507559)
B3x6 (x2)
Remove the pin from the left shaft Remove right and left screws (x6) to Remove right and left scews to
hole to remove the front cover. remove Y cover F. remove the head cover.
sons.
3- 132
Overhaul of Sensors
UD Encoder Sensor Linear encoder PCB

Bracket (M507224) assy. (E103961)
P4x12 SMW
P4x12 SMW
P2x8 SMW (x2)
Head UD Scale UD Encoder Bracket
Assy. (E300472) (M507223)
6. Remove UD Encoder Bracket 7. Remove UD Encoder Sensor 8. Remove Head Up/Down Encoder
Bracket
Remove screws and remove UD Remove a connector, remove screws
Encoder Bracket with the scale. Loosen the screw to remove Head (x2) fixing to UD Encoder Sensor
Up/Down Encoder together with UD Bracket and remove the Head UD
Encoder Sensor Bracket . encoder.
UD Scale must be
within the range.
2. Reassemble
Head Up/Down Encoder
Encoder
UD Scale
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Fix the encoder so that the scale is
for reassembly. at the position shown in the draw-
ing at assembling the encoder.
[ ENTER ] + [END] + Power ON
(Start with System parameter Input Mode) ----> 330

SYSTEM PARAMETER
016:HGLOPOS = 330 [ ]/[ ] : SW
000:COMP. X = 0 *Change to 150

3. Clear
[ ]/[ ] : SW
----> 150
SYSTEM PARAMETER
Systemparameter
016:HGLOPOS = 330
016:HGLOPOS = 330 [ENTER] : Set
[ENTER] : Reg.
SYSTEM PARAMETER
016:HGLOPOS = 150 [END] : End
Confirm value on LCD screen,

push [END] plural of times to end.
* Before executing “HEAD 1. Display the system parameter 2. Set initial value 150 to the value
HEIGHT ADJUST” for the next No.16
process, system parameter No.16 Set initial value 150 to value of sys-
is reset to initial value (150) in this Start with the System Parameter tem parameter No.16, confirm and
step. Input Mode, and display No.16 finish the step.
with [ ]/[].
3- 133
Content Adjust head height to the [ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON

standard height (1.5mm) (Start with maintenance Open Mode)
mechanically using a jig.
L.*> [JV5-01]
Tools 1.5mm Head gap check tool
4. Head Height
[ FUNCTION]
(OPT-J0097)
Adjust #ADJUST
HEAD ADJUST <ent>
[ FUNCTION]
or [ ]
#ADJUST
Head gap check jig 1.5 BasisHEADheight<ent>
[ ENTER]
(OPT-J0097)
(Carriage moves to over platen)
* As for the detail of head height * Keep the clamp down at conduct- 1. Execute “BasisHEADheight”
adjust, see p.3- 12. ing this adjustment. Start with the Maintenance Open
Mode, and execute
“BasisHEADheight”.
Height 1.5mm is
adjusted by hand.
#BasisHEADheight
COMPLETED :ent
[ENTER] : Save adjust value
Up/Down car-
riage with rotat-
ing manually
[END] : Not save adjust value
*Being Initialized*
Jig 1.5 mm
PLEASE WAIT
(After initialization, adjust is finished) Platen face
2a. adjust 1.5mm of gap from platen 2b. ~ Arrangement of Jig ~ 3. Slip the jig in from side face.
manually.
Arrange the jig on the following plo-
[ENTER] : Save adjust value to sition.
end.
[END] : Cancel to end.
4. Push the head of jig to the frame. * Push the jig to contact to metal
frame in right and left of head.
3- 134
Overhaul of Sensors
Content Execute “POSITIONen- [ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON
coder” in “ENCODER (Start with Maintenance Open Mode)
TEST” of MAINTENANCE L.*> [JV5-01]

MODE.
Back and forth operation
[ FUNCTION]
5. Encoder Test from head top position to bot-

tom position is executed, and
returned to the position
FUNCTION
SET UP <ENT> [ ]/[ ] : SW
before the test to end. FUNCTION

#TEST <ENT>
Tools – [ENTER] : Fix
(to Next)
#TEST
CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ]/[ ] : S
* Exexcute “ ENCODER TEST ” of 1. Select “TEST ”.

“TEST” (MAINTENANCE Start with the Maintenance Open
MODE) Mode and select “TEST”.
#TEST
ENCODER TEST <ENT>
~ Check Operation ~
[ENTER] : Set
(Head to&fro)
#ENCODER TEST #POSITIONencoder
LINEAR ENCODER <ent> [ ]/[ ] : SW
Result of a test.
St=330
#ENCODER TEST Mv=0 Rt=330 [END] : End
POSITIONencoder<ent> [ENTER] : Set
#POSITIONencoder St : Start position(Top)

CHECK :ent [ENTER] : Exec. Mv : Move position(Bottom)
Rt : End position (Top)
2. Execute “POSITIONencoder”. 3. When the screen above is dis-
played after the check operation,
Select and execute the test is end. Press [END] plural
“POSITIONencoder” of
“ENCODER TEST” of times to finish.
6. Reassemble
Covers

for reassembly.
3- 135
3-4-11. Paper Sensor
Behind Maintenance Cover L (M601944)
1. Remove
Paper Sensor
Warning:Electric Shock!!
Turn OFF the rear power
switch.

* As front switch does not cut the
power to heater PCB, there is a
fear of getting electric shock.
P4x12 SMW (x7)

Rear Cover L
Left Cover (M507497) PR-guide 130/160
(M507494) (M507425/7308)
Loosen (x2)
Loosen (x3)
3. Remove Left Cover. 4. Remove Rear Cover L. 5a. Remove PR guide 130/160.
Loosen lower side screws (x2), and Loosen lower side screws (x3), and Remove roght and left screws (x4).
removescrews ahown in the picture removescrews ahown in the picture
above to remove the cover. above to remove the cover.
P4x12 SMW (x2)
Connector color qty

Red 2
Heater PCB Assembly Red(Heater side) 1
(E104043)
5b. ~ Remove PR Guide ~ 6a. Remove connectors shown in the 6b. ~ Connectors ~
right from the heater PCB.
Operation with more than 2 per- Remove connectors (CN7, CN15,
sons. CN16).
3- 136
Overhaul of Sensors
P4x12 SMW Loosen screw
7. Remove Relay Connector 8. Remove screws on lower side of R 9. Loosen acrews on upper part of R
Heater Cover Assy Heater Cover Assy in Printer
Remove the relay connector of ther- front side.
mistor at station side. 130S : 4qty
160S : 5qty 130S : 6qty
160S : 7qty
R Heater Cover 130S/160S assy.

(M006926/M006924) Paper Sensor
(PS-R11L-B)
P3x12 (SMW)
Paper Sensor R Bracket

(M507156)
10. Remove cables from the frame 11. Remove RHeater Cover 12. Remove connector and Paper Sen-
sor
Remove cables before removing R * Take care not to give damage on
Heater Cover so that cables will not the cover or other parts. * Do not remove Paper Sensor R
to be mess. Bracket. It is the base for
positioning Media Encoder.
Any of same colors will do. OK NG
2. Reassemble
Paper Sensor
Bottom:Connected to thermostat of heater Assy A screw washer A screw washer
is inside of the is inside of the
Red: Pre-heater Blue: Black: cover. cover.
Printheater After-heater
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Caution: See the above illustration * Put cover inside of washers for
for reassembly. for right connection. loosened screws to tighten them.
3- 137

SENSOR TEST <ENT>
L.*> [JV5-01] [ENTER] : Fix
3. Test
(to Next)
[ FUNCTION]
#SENSOR TEST
SET LEVER :OFF
R. PAPER
[ ]/[ ] : SW
FUNCTION
SET UP <ENT> [
]/[ ] :
#SENSOR TEST
Sensor FUNCTION
#TEST <ENT> [ENTER] : Fix
(to Next)
R.PAPER :OFF
Shield light around sensor part
to check ON/OFF
#TEST #SENSOR TEST
CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ]/[
] : SW R.PAPER :ON
* Check with “SENSOR TEST” of 1. Select “TEST ” 2. Check ON/OFF display of LCD
“TEST” (MAINTENANCE Start with Maintenance Open Mode with “R.PAPER”.
MODE) and select “TEST”. Shield light around sensor part and
check sensor display of LCD.
3- 138
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-12. Media Rotary Encoder Assembly
Content
Remove Media rotary encoder under the platen (Print heater).
Major scale operation. Conduct with more than 2 oersins.
Tools & jigs
•Fixing pin (for roll screen)
•Glove
Work Flow
1. Remove Drying fan 2. Remove Media Rotary Encoder Assembly ( P.3- 141 )
3. Reassemble Rotary Encoder
Assembly ( P. 3- 139 ) A Heater Cover P Heater Media Rotary Assembly ( P. 3- 144 )
Assy. Assy. Encoder Assembly
4. Rotary Encoder Decenter-

ing Compensation ( P. 3- 145 )
1. Remove
Drying fan
Assembly
Right
1. Remove connectors (x2) on lower 2a. Remove Open and close cover
side of the printer. Assy.
Remove connectors for dryer fan Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and
and exhaust duct connected to the remove left side of the cover.
BOX relay PCB.
Roll screen Notice: If a spring of roll screen is

released, winding becomes dif-
ficu-lut. Take care until it is
Loosen (x2) fixed with a pin.
Right Right Left

2b. ~ Remove Open/Close cover~ 3a. Loosen screws (x2) shown in the 3b. Release lock of stop plate for
picture. holder plate in the left side.
of cover from from frame to remove Loosen screws (x2) fixing right roll
open/close cover. holder plate.
3- 139
Left Right
Exhaust cover R holder
Loosen (x2)
Exhaust cover L
(M507882)
CS 6x15 P4x12 SMW
Right
4. Remove roll screen from shaft 5. Remove exhaust cover L. 6a. Remove exhaust cover R.
bush of support fitting.
Remove lower screw with hexago- Remove screw to fix exhaust cover
* When the roll screen is removed, nal wrench, and tighten upper R to exhaust cover R holde.
the spring is released. screws (x2) to remove cover.
Wind up the spring at assembling.
Left
Loosen (x2) Drying fan Assy. 130/160
Belt Screw x2 (M400140) (M007141/40)
Exhaust cover R
(M507881)
Mini knob x2 Mini knob

(KS-15x16-A)
Right
6b. ~ Remove exhaust cover R. ~ 7a. Remove Dryer FAN Assy from 7b. ~ Remove Dryer FAN Assy ~
stayes in both sides.
Loosen upper screws (x2) to remove * Conduct with 2 persons not to
exhaust cover R. Remove right and left mini-knobs drop the Dryer FAN Assy.
and remove the belt lock screw.
Left Left
P4x12 SMW (x2)

Exhaust cover Screw (x2) Drying fan stay R
bracket (M507883) (M507879)
P4x12 SMW (x5)
Drying fan stay L

(M507880) Right
8. Remove exhaust cover bracket. 9. Remove drying fan stay L. 10. Remove drying fan stay R.
* As the part is heavy, work with
more than 3 personnel.
3- 140
Overhaul of Sensors
Behind
2. Remove
Media Rotary
Encoder
Assembly Warning:Electric Shock!!
switch. Maintenance Cover L (M601944)

* As the front switch does not cut
the power to the heater PCB,
there is a fear for getting electric
shock.
P4x12 SMW (x7)
P4x12 SMW (x11)

Rear Cover L
(M507494) MF Cover R
(M507164)
Loosen (x6)
P4x12 SMW (x8)

Loosen (x2)
Loosen (x3)
3. Remove Left Cover. 4. Remove Rear Cover L. 5. Remove MF Cover R.
Loosen lower screws (x2) and Loosen lower screws (x3) and Don’t take off the screws (x6) but
remove the screws shown in the pic- remove the screws shown in the pic- just loosen, and reassembly will be
ture to remove the cover. ture to remove the cover. easier.

Right

and remove it from pin hole Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
Open the cover, move the fulcrum Remove the pin from the left sgaft Remove right and left screws (x6) to
pin to inward, and remove it from hole to remove the front cover. remove Y Cover F.
the pin hole. * Take care not to drop the cover.
sons.
3- 141
P4x12 SMW (x3) Maintenance Space

P4x12 SMW (x4) Cover (M507182)
H Harness Cover
(M507183) Heater PCB Assembly
Remove in arrow direction. (E104043)
8. Remove H Harness Cover. 9. Remove Maintenance Space 10a.Remove the connectors shown
Cover. right from Heater PCB.
Loosen the screws (x4) to remove
Maintenance Space Cover in the
arrow direction.
Release clamps (x8)
P3x10 SMW (x4)
Body Color Qty

Black 4
Blue 4
Blue (Heater Side) 1
10b. ~ Connector List ~ 11. Release cable clamps (x8). 12a.Loosen the screw for A Heater
Cover Assembly.
Print Heater: Blue Connector
After Heater: Black Connector Upper: P3 x 10 SMW (x4)
Lower: P4 x 12 SMW (x4)
Take out cable. Left Right
Release connector.
Loosen (x4)
P4x12 SMW (x4)
Caution: Hold A Heater Cover with a hand on
loosening screws to prevent cover
from falling.
12b. ~ A Heater Cover Assembly ~ 13a.Remove A Heater Cover Assem- 13b.Release Heater Connector.
bly.
130S: A Heater Cover 130 Assembly * Be careful not to damage the
(M006927) Take cable out of clamp. surface of A Heater Cover.
160S: A Heater Cover 160 Assembly
(M006925)
3- 142
Overhaul of Sensors
P Heater Assembly Lead through bush after

releasing all clamps.
B3x10 Ni (x24)
Release clamp (x8)
Media Plate (M507157) Lead through bush.
14. Loosen the screws (x24) for P 15a.Process Heater Cable. 15b. ~ Process Heater Cable. ~
Heater Assembly.
Release all clamps for Heater cable
* Slide Media Plate and certainly (Blue) on the left of printer to lead
loosen the lower screws. through bush.
Release connector
Media Rotary Encoder
Assembly (E300468)
Put through bush Release clamps(x2)
Release connector and

clamps to lead through bush. P Heater Assembly
16. Process Thermistor Cable. 17. Remove P Heater Assembly. 18a.Loosen the screws (x4) for Media
Rotary Encoder.
Release connector of Thermistor and * Carefully use both hands to
cable from clamps to lead through handle cables so as to prevent
bush. them from hanging.
P4x12 SMW (x4)
CN9
Media Rotary Encoder

Assembly (E300468)
18b. ~ Loosen the screws. ~ 19. Disconnect the connector (CN9) of 20. Remove Rotary Encoder
Rotary Encoder. Assembly.
Remove connector of CN9 from the
Main PCB.
3- 143
Fix screws with pushing

Media Plate
3. Reassemble (M507157)
Rotary Encoder
Assembly
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Be sure to reassemble Media Plate 1. Tighten the upper screws pressing
for reassembly. on reassembling P Heater Plate against the back.
Assembly. Follow the next
procedure to smoothly reassemble.
Pull plate
Left
Smooth moving
Push slide bar Right
2. To tighten the lower screws, pull 3. Put on the other in the same way. * Run Heater Cables (Blue) around
Plate toward you and press Slide each clamp on each end in front of
Bar against the back. * After assembling, confirm that it printer.
moves smoothly with sliding it
horizontally.
Any of same color will do.

L: Exhaust duct
Assy side (White)
Lower:Connect to Thermostat
of each Assembly R : Dryer FAN
Red: Blue: Black:
Assy side (Black)
Pre-heater Printheater After-heater
* Remove loosening of cables * Caution: Refer to the above * Connector connection printer
referring to the above to connect illustration to ensure right lower side is shown in the picture
to Heater PCB. connection. above.
3- 144
Overhaul of Sensors
OK NG Front Side
Without fan label

Back Side
With fan label
A screw washer A screw washer

cover. cover.
Left
* Put cover inside of washers for * Check front side and back side at * Wind the spring and fix it with a
loosened screws to tighten them. assembling the Dryer FAN Assy pin, and after fixing to hold fitting,
and set that front side comes top. take the pin out at assembling the
Operation with 2 persons. roll screen.
Roll screen
Fix with pushing
Right
* At fixing loosen roll screen hold
fitting, fix the screw with pushing
the roll screen to inward.
Content Execution of automatic [ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON
decentering compensation (Start with Maintenance Open Mode)

4. Rotary Tools The following media* is rec-
ommended
L.*> [JV5-01]
Encoder
[ FUNCTION]
Premium Photo paper

(SPC-0213) FUNCTION

Decentering
SET UP <ENT>
Pet Gloss [ ]/[ ] : SW
(SPC-0111)
Compensation
FUNCTION
* If corresponding media can not be #ADJUST <ENT> [ENTER] : Set
arranged, use firm paper as much as pos-

sible,. paper hard to feed such as arpaulin #ADJUST
is not allowed. HEAD ADJUST <ent> [ ]/[ ] : SW
* Execute “MEDIA ENCODER” of * Use cut sheet media instead of roll 1. Select “ADJUST”.
“ADJUST” (MAINTENANCE paper as using of the roll paper
MODE) for Desentering may cause bad influence on Start with the Maintenance Open
Compensation(Automatic). decentering compensation because Mode and select “ADJUST”.
of back tension. * Execute after completing Media
Use media having more than Detection.
800mm of feed direction.
3- 145
#ADJUST 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 End screen at

MEDIA ENCODER <ENT> [ENTER] : Set 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 normal
8:0 9:0
#MEDIA ENCODER COMPLETED :ent
ADJUST START :ent [ENTER] : Exec. [ENTER] / [END] :End
[END] : Ret.
**** ADJUST NOW ****
PLEASE WAIT
#MEDIA ENCODER
ADJUST START :ent (Displayed at
compensation)
(Approx. 2 min.)
2. Select “MEDIA ENCODER” to 3. After confirming normal end,
execute compensation. press [END] plural of times to
turn the power OFF.
* Do not touch JV-5 during the
decentering compensation. Correct
adjust values can not be obtained
because of vibration or tension.
3- 146
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-13. Front Cover Sensor L
Behind Right
1. Remove
Front Cover
Sensor L
Open the cover, move the fulcrum
pin to inward and remove it from the
pin hole.

P 4 x 12 SMW
P2 x 12 SMW
Front Cover Sensor Front Cover Sensor L

Bracket L (M507521)
2b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~ 3. Remove Front Cover Sensor BKT 4. Remove the front Cover Sensor L.
L
Remove the pin from the left sgaft Release the connector, and remove
hole to remove the front cover. Remove the screw to remove the screws fixing the Front cover sensor
front cover sensor BKT L with the L.
sensor.
Switch dog L
(M507519)
2. Reassemble
Front Cover
Sensor L Front Cover Sen-
sor Bracket L
Reverse the disassembly procedure * After assembling the front cover,

for reassembly. make sure that SW dog does not
contact to the front cover sensor
BKT.
3- 147

L.*> [JV5-01]
3. Test
(to Next)
Front Cover FUNCTION

SET UP <ENT> [ ] / [] :SW
#SENSOR TEST
Sensor FUNCTION
(to Next)
FRONT COVER :OFF
Open/Close Front cover
to check ON/OFF
#TEST #SENSOR TEST

CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ] / [] : SW FRONT COVER :ON
* Check with “SENSOR TEST” of 1. Select “TEST ” 2. Confirm ON/OFF display of LCD
“TEST” (MAINTENANCE Start with the Maintenance Open with “FRONT COVER”
MODE) Mode and select “TEST”. Open/close the front cover to sensor
display of LCD.
3- 148
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-14. Front Cover Sensor R
Behind Right
1. Remove
Front Cover
Sensor R
Open the cover, move the fulcrum
pin to inward and remove it from the
pin hole.
P 2 x 12 SMW (x2)
P 4 x 12 SMW
Front Cover Sensor R

Front Cover Sensor
Bracket R (M507520)
2b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~ 3. Remove the Front Cover Sensor 4. Remove the Front Cover Sensor
BKT R R.
Remove the pin from the left sgaft
hole to remove the front cover. Remove the screw to remove the Release the connector, and remove
front cover sensor BKT R with the the screw fixing the front cover sen-
sensor. sor R.
Front Cover Sen-
Switch dog R sor Bracket R
2. Reassemble
(M507518)
Front Cover
Sensor R
Reverse the disassembly procedure * After assembling the front cover,
for reassembly. make sure that SW dog does not
contact to the front cover sensor
BKT.
3- 149

L.*> [JV5-01]
3. Test
(to Next)
Front Cover FUNCTION

SET UP <ENT> [ ] / [] : SW
#SENSOR TEST
Sensor FUNCTION
(to Next)
FRONT COVER :OFF
Open/Close front cover
to check ON/OFF
#TEST #SENSOR TEST

CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ] / [] :SW FRONT COVER :ON
* Check with “SENSOR TEST” of 1. Select “TEST ” 2. Confirm ON/OFF display of LCD
“TEST” (MAINTENANCE Start with the Maintenance Open with “FRONT COVER”
MODE) Mode and select “TEST”. Open/close the front cover to con-
firm sensor display of LCD.
3- 150
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-15. Maintenance Cover Sensor L
Left
P 4 x 12 SMW
1. Remove
Maintenance
Cover Sensor L
Maintenance Switch Bracket
Maintenance Cover L (M601944) (M507534/7918)
1. Remove Maintenance Cover L. 2. Remove the screw fixing the

Maintenance SW BKT.
* After removing the screw, take
care not to drop the Maintenance
SW BKT.
Left
Positioning Boss
2. Reassemble
Maintenance
P2 x 10 SMW (x2)
Cover Sensor L
Maintenance Cover Maintenance
Sensor L Switch Bracket
3. Remove the Maintenance Cover Reverse the disassembly procedure * When the Maintenance SW BKT
Sensor L. for reassembly. is assembled to the main body
frame, use the positioning boss for
Release the connector and remove positioning.
screws (x2) of the Maintenance
Cover Sensor L.
Power ON
L.*> [JV5-01]
3. Test * If no error in usual

Maintenance start, OK
Cover Sensor L
1. Usual start of JV-5
If an error is not displayed on LCD,
OK.
If an error is displayed, check sensor
assembling.
3- 151
3-4-16. Maintenance Cover Sensor R
P 4 x 12 SMW
Right
1. Remove
Maintenance
Cover Sensor R Maintenance Switch Bracket
(M507534/7918)
1. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 2. Remove Screws Fixing the

Maintenance SW BKT.
* After removing screws, take care
not to drop the Maintenance SW
BKT.
Positioning Boss
2. Reassemble
Maintenance
P2 x 10 SMW (x2)
Cover Sensor R
Maintenance Switch
Maintenance Cover
Bracket
Sensor R
3. Remove Maintenance Cover Reverse the disassembly procedure * When the Maintenance SW BKT
Sensor R. for reassembly. is assembled to the main body
frame, use the positioning boss for
Release the connector, and remove positioning.
screws (x2) of the Maintenance
Cover Sensor R.
Power ON
L.*> [JV5-01]
3. Test * If no error in usual

Maintenance start, OK.
Cover Sensor R
1. Usual start of JV-5
If an error is not displayed on LCD,
OK.
If an error is displayed, check sensor
assembling.
3- 152
Overhaul of Sensors
3-4-17. Ink Leakage Sensor
Content
JV5-130S/160S uses total 3 of the same type ink leak sensors on right and left cable bears and on the station.
At ink leak error, as no position of leaking is displayed though occurrence of leaking is displayed, corresponding sensor must
be identified at first. Here, only replacement method of sensors is described. (Replace after taking mesaures for cause of ink
leaking .)
Tools & jigs
•Gloves
•Conductive block (for sensor check)
Work Flow
2. Remove Ink Leakage 3. Reassemble Ink Leakage
Sensor L ( P. 3- 154 ) Sensor L (P. 3- 154 )
Identify Cleaning 8. Test Ink Leak
1. Identifying Sensor 4. Remove Ink Leakage cause adjacent 5. Reassemble Ink Leakage
( P. 3- 153 ) Sensor R ( P. 3- 154 ) and take place Sensor R ( P. 3- 155 ) Sensor ( P. 3- 157 )
action
6. Remove Ink Leakage 7. Reassemble Ink Leakage 9. Reassemble Cov-
Sensor S ( P.3- 155 ) Sensor S ( P. 3-156 ) ers ( P. 3-157 )
Behind
Power ON.
L.*> [JV5-01]
1.
[ST.MAINTE]
Identifying Sensor
ST.MAINTENANCE

pected move.
off the power.
Sensor Name Sensor Position

Maintenance Cover R (M601943) Ink Leakage Sensor L Bear Guide L end
Ink Leakage Sensor R Bear Guide R end
Ink Leakage Sensor S Station
Ink trayè„
Note : Here replacement procedure of ink

leak sensor is described.
Replace sensor after taking measures
for the cause of ink leaking according
Maintenance Cover L (M601944) to the situation.
2. Remove Maintenance Cover L. 3. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 4. Hereinafter the step is branched.
Remove corresponding sensor
Make sure that there is no ink leaking on Make sure that there is no ink leaking on with referring to the table above.
the left side of Bear Guide. the right side of Bear Guide, or on ink
tray of the station. * When ink leaking position can not
be identified, execute check of
each sensor.
3- 153
Left
2. Remove Ink detection PCB

bracket (M507833)
Release connector
Ink Leakage
Sensor L Loosen
Ink Leakage Sensor L
(E104534)
Procedure for replacing a ink leak 1. Loosen screws (x2) of the ink 2. Remove the connector to remove
sensor on the left end of the bear detection PCB. the ink leak sensor L.
guide is described.
Loosen screws f(x2) ixing the ink * Take care not to stick ink to the
leak sensor L. connector.
If ink stuck to the connector,
replace harnes at the same time.
3. Reassemble
Cleaning Ink Leakage
Sensor L
Do not touch pad faces
3. Ink detection PCB Conduct cleaning aroung ink leak- Reverse the disassembly procedure
ing. for reassembly.
* Do not touch pad faces (x2). If
touched, conduct cleaning with
alchohl
If ink sticks to the PCB, replace
the PCB.
Ink detection PCB

bracket (M507833)
4. Remove Rear Cover R

Ink Leakage (M507496) Loosen
Sensor R P4x12 SMW (x11)
Loosen (x4)
Right
Procedure for replacing a ink leak 1. Remove Rear Cover R. 2. Loosen screws (x2) of the ink
sensor on the right end of the bear Loosen lower screws (x4) and detection PCB.
guide is described. remove the screw shown in the Replace the connector, and loosen
picture to replace the cover. screws (x2) fixing the ink leak sen-
sor L.
3- 154
Overhaul of Sensors
Release connector
Ink Leakage Sensor R

(E104534) Do not touch pad faces
3. Remove the connector to remove 4. Ink detection PCB.
the ink leak sensor R.
* Do not touch pad faces (x2). If
* Take care not to stick ink to the touched, conduct cleaning with
connector. alchohl.
If ink stuck to the connector, If ink sticks to the PCB, replace
replace harnes at the same time. the PCB.
5. Reassemble
Cleaning Ink Leakage
Sensor R
Conduct cleaning aroung ink leak- Reverse the disassembly procedure

ing. for reassembly.
Ink Leakage Sensor S

(E104534)
6. Remove TP3x8 F
Ink Leakage
Sensor S
Ink Tray Ink Tray
(M601968) (M601968)
Procedure for replacing a ink leak 1. Loosen screws of ink detection 2. Replace the connector to remove
sensor on the station part is PCB. the ink leak sensor S.
described.
Remove the screw fixing the ink * Take care not to stick ink to the
leak sensor S to ink tray. connector.
If ink stuck to the connector,
replace harnes at the same time.
3- 155
P4x25 SMW (x4)
Cleaning
Ink Tray
Do not touch pad faces (M601968)
3. Ink Detection PCB * Conduct cleaning of ink tray and 1. Remove ink tray
replacement of station absorber Remove screws (x4) to remove the
* Do not touch pad faces (x2). If according to degree of ink leak.
touched, conduct cleaning with Hereinafter the procedure is ink tray from the station.
alchohl described.
If ink sticks to the PCB, replace
the PCB.
B4x25 (x4)
Soak Up Pad
Holder
(M507890) x3
Station Soak Up Pad

(M904829) x2
2. Remove the station absorber 3. Conduct cleaning of ink tray.

Remove screws (x3) and absorber Clean inside of the tray with clean-
binding boards (x3) to remove sta- ing fluid.
tion absorbers (x2).
* If dirt is significant , replace them.
~ R side ~ ~ Printer rear ~ Cable is streched

lightly
7. Reassemble
Ink Leakage
Sensor S CCW : Up
Make a circle
Notice: Cable slack is not allowed.

Reverse the disassembly procedure 1. Set the station at capping. 2. Make a circle around the clamp
for reassembly. while the zone of cable shown in
Elevate the station to cap with turn- the picture above is streched
* When sensor cable is replaced or ing the power ON or the method lightly.
removed, check the followings. shown in the picture above. * Considering up/down move of the
station, slack of cable is not
allowed.
3- 156
Overhaul of Sensors
~ Printer rear ~ ~ R side ~
3a. Arrange cable on clamp position 3b. ~ Cabling and Connection ~

shown in the drawing above, and
connect the connector (CN9) to
the side relay PCB.
Adjust Out- In sensor test, short-circuit [ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON
line the right and left pad with the (Start with Maintenance Open Mode)
following method, and check
8. Test
L.*> [JV5-01]
ON/OFF display of LCD. [FUNCTION]
Adjust Place a conductive block on
Ink Leak Method pad faces on PCB to short-
circuit, and check LCD dis-
FUNCTION
SET UP <ENT> [ ] / [] : SW
Sensor play.
LCD change : OK
LCD no change : NG
FUNCTION
(to Next)
Tool, Jig Conductive block #TEST
* Check with “SENSOR TEST” of 1. Select “TEST ”

“TEST” (MAINTENANCE Start with the Maintenance Open
MODE) Mode, and select “TEST”.
#TEST OK NG
(to Next)
#SENSOR TEST
SET LEVER :OFF [ ] / [] : SW 9. Reassemble
#SENSOR TEST
INK LEAK :OFF
Covers
#SENSOR TEST cover. cover.
INK LEAK :ON
2. Check ON/OFF display of LCD Reverse the disassembly procedure * Put cover inside of washers for
with “INK LEAK”. for reassembly. loosened screws to tighten them.
Short-circuit right and left pads and
check LCD display. When there is a
change in display, finish with [END] .
3- 157
3-4-18. Waste Tank Sensor
Loosen
1. Remove Remove Waste

Waste Tank Ink Tank
Sensor Waste Ink Tank

Bracket Assy.
(M007128)
1. Remove the Waste Tank 2a. Remove the Waste Tank Assy.
* Take care not to contaminate Loosen the screw shown in the pic-
ambit with waste fluid. Place a cap ture above.
on the tank or discharge waste
fluid from the tank before the
operation.
P4x12 SMW (x3) Connector
Plug coupler
2b. Remove screws (x3) 2c. Remove the Connector. 3. Plug the Waste Tank Relay Pipe
with waste cloth.
* At removing the screw, take care
not to drop the Waste Ink Tank
Bracket Assy, and conduct opera-
tion with holding it with one hand.
B4x10
P4x12 SMW (x2)
Waste Tank Sensor Waste Tank Sensor

Bracket (M507299) (OJ-796021-702F) x2
4. Remove the Waste Tank Sensor 5. Remove the Waste Tank Sensor
BKT
Release the connector and remove
Remove screws (x2), and remove the screw fixing the Waste Tank
the Waste Tank Sensor BKT from Sensor.
the Waste Tank Sensor Assy
3- 158
Overhaul of Sensors
Waste Tank Detection

Shield Plate (M507322)
2. Reassemble
Waste Tank
Sensor
Sensor
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Fix the sensor on the position * At assembling the Waste Tank
for reassembly. where it does not contact to the Sensor Assy, set the metal plate
Waste Tank Detection Light shown in the picture inside of a
Shield Plate. washer of loosen screw.
L.*> [JV5-01]
3. Test [ FUNCTION]
Waste Tank FUNCTION

SET UP <ENT> [ ]/[ ] : SW
Sensor FUNCTION
#TEST <ENT> [ENTER] : Fix
Not to pinch (to Next)
#TEST
CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [ ]/[ ] : SW
* At assembling the Waste Tank * Check with “SENSOR TEST” of 1. Select “TEST ”
Sensor Assy, take care not to give “TEST” (MAINTENANCE Start with the Maintenance Open
damage on the cable caused by MODE)
rolling the cable inside or pinching. Mode and select “TEST”.
(Make sure that the cable comes out
from the right side of the Main
body.)
#TEST #SENSOR TEST No waste tank
SENSOR TEST <ENT> WasteTANK :OFF/OFF (or tank full)
[ENTER] : Fix
(to Next)
#SENSOR TEST
SET LEVER :OFF [
]/[ ] : SW #SENSOR TEST Near Full
WasteTANK :OFF/ON (Tank presence
#SENSOR TEST
WasteTANK :OFF/OFF
:OFF/ON #SENSOR TEST Waste tank pres-
:ON /OFF WasteTANK :ON/ON ence
:ON /ON
2. Switch to “WasteTANK” 3. Assemble the waste Tank and up/

down it to check LCD display.
3- 159
3- 160
3-5. Overhaul of Driving Parts
Driving parts for JV5-130S/160S are shown below.
Part Reference page
3-5-1. X-axis Motor Assembly p. 3 - 162
3-5-2. X Pulley, X Belt p. 3 - 165
3-5-3. Y-axis Motor Assembly p. 3 - 167
3-5-4. Y Drive Pulley Assembly, Y-Drive Transmission Belt p. 3 - 171
3-5-5. Y Drive Belt p. 3 - 175
3-5-6. Wiper Motor p. 3 - 179
3-5-7. Station Motor p. 3 - 182
3-5-8. Head UD Motor p. 3 - 184
3-5-9. M Motor p. 3 - 186
~ LEFT ~
X Pulley
Y-axis Motor Assembly
Wiper Motor
Y Drive Pulley
Head UD Motor
Y-axis Motor
Assembly
Station Motor
M Motor
3- 161
3-5-1. X-axis Motor Assembly
Behind
1. Remove
X-axis Motor
Assembly
pected move.

Loosen (x3)
P4x12 SMW (x11)
Rear Cover L
(M507494)
Loosen (x2) XM Bracket

Loosen (x3) (M507266)
3. Remove Left Cover. 4. Remove Rear Cover L. 5. Loosen the screws (x3) for XM
Bracket.
Loosen lower side screws (x2), and Loosen lower side screws (x3), and
remove the screws shown in the pic- remove the screws shown in the pic-
ture to remove the cover. ture to remove the cover.
X-axis Motor Assembly

(M507266) P3x10 SMW (x2)
2. Reassemble
X-axis Motor
Assembly
Release connectors.(x2)
6. Release the connectors (x2) to X- 7. Remove X-axis Motor Assembly. Reverse Steps 6 and 5 for reassem-
axis Motor. bly.
the motor assembly. Be careful of
the assembly falling.
3- 162
Content Adjust the tension of X Belt

(between X-axis Motor and X
OK Put horizontally in the
middle of pulleys.
Pulley).
Wrong tension could slip
3. Adjust X Belt motor or result in breakage of
motor or belt due to rotation NG Belt is vertically shifted.
Tension obstruction, or cause failure in

media feed unit.
Target 2-2.5 mm of flexure on
applying force of 300gf with NG Belt is slantingly engaged.
gage
Tools • Tension Gage (x Kg)
1. Engage X Belt between X Pulley
and X-axis Motor Pulley.
* Put the belt horizontally in the
middle of pulleys.
Check bending amount

Push perpendicular to ( 2~ 2.5 mm )
the belt center at300gf.
XM bracket
2a. Apply Tension Gage with the force 2b. Adjust XM Bracket so that the 2c. ~ Tension Adjustment ~
of 300gf perpendicular to the belt flexure of the belt comes within 2-
in the center between the pulleys. 2.5 mm. Laterally shift XM Bracket to adjust
the tension to the proper value, and
tighten the screws (x3).
Content Execute current adjust of X-

motor Stopr Adjust
Adjust 2 items
Adjust Minimize Hunting noise of Y Moving Adjus ← No need
4. Adjust Motor
t
Contents X-motor at operation.

Tools –
Current
X Moving Adjustt
Execute Item on X-motor :
Stop Adjust
X-operation Adjust
Execute Item on X-motor :
Stop Adjust
Y-operation Adjust
* If buzz is found on motor, conduct ~ Motor Current Adjust Outline ~
the following adjustment. * Adjust value varies on each motor
and each machine
3- 163

L.*> [JV5-01]
X MOVING ADJUST<ent> [ENTER] : Set

[ ]/[ ] : VC
#ADJUST X = 0 Y = 0

[ ] SW
HEAD ADJUST <ent> [ ]/[ ] : SW

(****) (****) [ ] :[ENTER] : Ret
#X MOVING ADJUST
0~255 (Input range)

[ ]/[ ] : XC
#ADJUST S= 10mm/s A=0.20G [ ]/[ ] :SW
MOTOR CURRENT <ent> [ENTER] : Set

X= 100mm [ENTER] : Ret.
1. Select “MOTOR CURRENT” in 2. Execute ”STOP ADJUST” 3a. Execute “X MOVING ADJUST”
#ADJUST MODE
Adjust electric current value of X-
* Start with the Maintenance Open motor and Y-motor so that Hunting
Mode noise of both motor is minimized on
(At Xmotor drv.)

#X MOVING ADJUST #XmovingADJUST *RUN* [ ]/[ ] : VC
#MOTOR CURRENT
xxx (xxxx) [END] : Ret.
STOP ADJUST <ent>

[ ]/[ ] : VC
S= 10mm/s A=0.20G [ ]/[ ] : Move S= 10mm/s A=0.20G [END] : Ret.
X= 100mm [ENTER] : Exec. X= 100mm

[END] : Ret.

X-axis consecutive drive ting 130~160 .
(X-mortar drive) [END]
(Input range 0~255)
* Not cap OFF
#MOTOR CURRENT
STOP ADJUST <ent>
3b. Input the following conditions and 3c. With listening to Hunting noise at 4. Presss [END] plural of times to end.
execute X-motor driving, adjust value to
Speed (S) : 5 ~ 10 mm/s
Acceleration (A) : 0.2 G Check the noise of X-motor at the
50 ~ 100 mm
OK NG
5. Reassemble
Covers
cover. cover.
Put on covers after adjustment. * Put cover inside of washers for

3- 164
3-5-2. X Pulley, X Belt
Behind
1. Remove
X pulley and
X belt
pected move.

Loosen (x3)
P4x12 SMW (x11)
Rear Cover L
(M507494)
Loosen (x2) XM Bracket

Loosen (x3) (M507266)
3. Remove Left Cover. 4. Remove Rear Cover L. 5. Loosen the screws (x3) for XM
Bracket.
Loosen lower side screws (x2), and Loosen lower side screws (x3), and
remove the screw shown in the pic- remove the screw shown in the pic-
ture to remove the cover. ture to remove the cover.
P4x12 SMW (x3) SSWP 4x4 (x2) P3x10 SMW (x2)
X Pulley Bracket (M507267)

X Pulley (M203155)
6. Remove X Pulley Bracket. 7. Remove X Pulley. 8. Remove X Belt.
Loosen the screws (x3) to remove X Loosen the screws (x2) to remove X Loosen the screws (x2) for X-axis
Pulley Bracket. Pulley from X axis. Motor Assembly to carefully
remove the belt so as to prevent fall.
3- 165
Content Adjust the tension of X Belt

(between X-axis Motor and X
Pulley).
2. Reassemble 3. Adjust X Belt
motor or result in breakage of
X-axis Motor Tension

motor or belt due to rotation
obstruction, or cause failure in
Assembly
media feed unit.
Target 2-2.5 mm of flexure on
applying force of 300gf with
gage
Tools • Tension Gage (x Kg)
Reverse the procedure of Steps 8 to
6 for reassembly.
OK Put horizontally in the

middle of pulleys.
Check bending amount
Push perpendicular to the ( 2~ 2.5 mm )
belt center at300gf.
NG Belt is vertically shifted.
NG Belt is slantingly engaged.
1. Engage X Belt between X Pulley 2a. Apply Tension Gage with the force 2b. Adjust XM Bracket so that the
and X-axis Motor Pulley. of 300gf perpendicular to the belt flexure of the belt comes within 2-
in the center between the pulleys. 2.5 mm.
* Put the belt horizontally in the
middle of pulleys.
OK NG
4. Reassemble
Covers
XM bracket is outside of the is inside of the
cover. cover.
2c. ~ Tension Adjustment ~ Put on covers after adjustment. * Put cover inside of washers for
Laterally shift XM Bracket to adjust
the tension to the proper value, and
tighten the screws (x3).
3- 166
3-5-3. Y-axis Motor Assembly
Behind
1. Remove
Y-axis Motor
Assembly
pected move.
Loosen (x2) Release clamps. (x2)
P4x12 SMW (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)
3a. Remove Right Cover. 3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ 4. Release the clamps (x2) shown
above.
Loosen lower side screws and Right side face : 4
remove the following screws. Right top side : 3 Release the clamps (x2) for Wash
Lower side : 2 Cartridge Assembly.
P4x12 SMW (x3) Be careful of tube disconnection
Caution: Lay Protection Sheet and put Wash

Cartridge Assembly on it to keep
from flaw or damage.
Caution: Be careful of tube disconnection at
the joint above to handle Wash Car-
tridge Assembly.
Lay Protection Sheet.
5a. Remove Wash Cartridge Assembly. 5b. Mount Wash Cartridge Assembly
to the position shown above.
Wash Cartridge & Stay.
* Keep Wash Cartridge as joined
with Stay.
3- 167
Y-axis Motor Assy.

P4x12 SMW (x2) (E300475)
Release clamp.
YM Top Plate YM-spacer

(M507260) (M202665) x2
Release connectors. (x2)
6. Remove YM Top Plate. 7. Remove YM-spacers (x2). 8. Release clamp and connectors.
Release the clamp for Y-axis Motor
Cable and disconnect the connec-
tors (x2).
Y drive transmission belt Y-axis Motor

Assembly (E300475)
2. Reassemble
Y-axis Motor
P4x12 SMW (x2) Assembly
YD Bracket D
(M507154)
9a. Remove Y-axis Motor Assembly. 9b. ~ Y-axis Motor Assembly ~ Follow the next procedure to reas-
semble Y-axis Motor Assembly.
* Be careful of Y-axis Motor
Assembly falling to loosen the
screws (x2).
Y drive transmission belt OK

Horizontal in middle
OK
Horizontal but upper
NG Shifted lower
P4x12 SMW (x2)
YD Bracket D NG
(M507154) Slanting
1. Temporarily fix Y-axis Motor 2. Engage the belt between Y Drive 3. Reverse the steps 9 to 6 to
Assembly to YD Bracket D with Pulley and DM Pulley. reassemble YM Top Plate, and
the screws (x2). conduct the following adjustment.
* Belt must be horizontal in the
middle of pulley width. (Upper
shift is allowable.)
3- 168
Content Adjust the tension of y-drive

transmission belt (between Y-
axis Motor and Y Drive Pulley
3. Adjust Y-Drive Assembly).
Transmission Belt motor or result in breakage of
Tension Target
media feed unit.
Press in middle
Tools • Tension Gage (x Kg) at right angle.
1. Apply the gage at right angle in

the middle between Y-axis Motor
Pulley and Y Drive Pulley
Assembly to measure tension.
* Target: XXX ± xx kg
P4x12 SMW (x2)
2a. Laterally shift Y-axis Motor 2b. Tighten the screws (x2) after Y-
Assembly until tension becomes axis Motor is positioned.
right.
Content Adjust electric current of Y-

motor Stop Adjust
Adjust items are the following
2. YMoving Adjust
4. Adjust Motor Adjust
Contents
Minimise Hunting noise at Y-
motor driving.
← No need
Current
X Moving Adjust
Tools –
Execute item on X-motor: Stop Adjust
X Move Adjust
Execute item on Y-motor: Stop Adjust
Y Move Adjust
* If buzz is found on motor, conduct ~ Motor Current Adjust Outline ~

the following adjustment.
* Adjust value varies on each motor
and each machine
3- 169
[REMOTE]+[FUNCTION]+PowerON
L.*> [JV5-01]
Y MOVING ADJUST<ent> [ENTER] : Set

[ ]/[ ] : VC
#ADJUST X = 0 Y = 0

[ ]/[ ] :SW
HEAD ADJUST <ent> [ ]/[ ] : SW (****) (****) [ENTER] :Ret.

#Y MOVING ADJUST
0~255 (Input Range)

[ ]/[ ] : VC
#ADJUST S= 10mm/s A=1.00G [ ]/[ ] :SW
MOTOR CURRENT <ent> [ENTER] : Set Y= 100mm [ENTER] : Ret.
1. Select “MOTOR CURRENT” in

#ADJUST MODE. 2. Execute ”STOP ADJUST” 3a. Execute “Y MOVING ADJUST”
* Start with the Maintenance Open Adjust electric current value of X-
Mode. motor and Y-motor so that Hunting
noise of both motor is minimized on
(At Y-motor driving)

#Y MOVING ADJUST #YmovingADJUST *RUN* [ ]/[ ] : VC
#MOTOR CURRENT
xxx (xxxx) [END] : Ret.
STOP ADJUST <ent>

[ ]/[ ] : VC
S= 10mm/s A=1.00G [ ]/[ ] : Move S= 10mm/s A=1.00G [END] : Ret
X= 100mm [ENTER] : Exec. X= 100mm

[END] :Ret.

(Carriage Out) ting 130~160 .
[END]
(Input range 0~255)
Y-axis consecutive drive #MOTOR CURRENT
(Y-mortar drive) STOP ADJUST <ent>
3b. Input test conditions to execute 3c. With listening to Hunting noise at 4. Press [END] plural of times to end.
* Input the following conditions. Y-motor driving, adjust value to
Speed (S) : 5 ~ 10 mm/s minimize the noise.
Acceleration (A) : 0.2 G Check the noise of Y-motor at the
50 ~ 100 mm
OK NG
5. Reassemble
Covers
cover. cover.

3- 170
3-5-4. Y Drive Pulley Assembly, Y-Drive Transmission Belt
Behind
1. Remove
Y Drive Pulley
and Y-Drive
Transmission Belt Caution: Be sure to shut the main circuit
pected move.
Loosen (x2)
P4x12 SMW (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)
Maintenance Cover L (M601944)
3a. Remove Right Cover. 3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ 4. Remove Maintenance Cover L.
Loosen lower side back and front Right side face : 4
screws and remove the following Right top side : 3
screws.
Lower side : 2
Left Right
Y-T SP Plate (M507262)
P4x12 SMW (x11)
Left Cover
(M507494)
Loosen (x2)
Loosen (x2) B4x60 (x2) Y Drive Belt
(M800885/6) Y-axis Motor
5. Remove Left Cover. 6. Remove Y-T SP Plate to release 7. Loosen the screws (x2) for Y-axis
tension. Motor Assembly.
Loosen lower side screws (x2), and
remove the screws shown in the pic- * Loosen the screws alternately.
ture to remove the cover. Loosening only a screw could
heavily burden the other to break
spring.
3- 171
Right Y Drive Pulley Assembly (M006891)

P4x12 SMW (x2) O-ring
Y Drive Belt
D Bracket U
(M502708)
Notice: Take care not to lose the O-ring on

Y Drive TransmissionBelt the pulley.
YD Bracket Y Drive Transmission Belt
8. Remove D Bracket U. 9a. Remove Y Drive Pulley Assembly. 9b. ~ Notices at Removing Pulley ~
Loosen the screws (x2) to remove D Remove Y Drive Pulley Assembly
Bracket U. from the axis of YD Bracket D.
Y Drive Pulley Assembly (M006891) OK
2. Reassemble Horizontal in middle
Y Drive Pulley
OK
and Y Drive NG
Transmission Belt NG
Shifted lower
Y Drive TransmissionBelt Slanting

Follow the next procedure to reas- 1. Reassemble Y Drive Pulley 2. Reassemble D Bracket U, and
semble Y Drive Pulley and Y Drive Assembly, and engage Y Drive adjust Y Drive Transmission Belt
Transmission Belt. Transmission Belt. position. *Put the belt horizontally
in the middle of pulley width.
(Upper shift is allowable.)
Content Adjust the tension of YDrive

Transmission Belt (between
Y-axis Motor and Y Drive
3. Adjust Y Drive Pulley Assembly).
Transmission Belt motor or result in breakage of
Tension Target
media feed unit.
Tools • Tension Gage (x Kg) Press in middle at

right angle.
1. Apply the gage at right angle in
the middle between Y-axis Motor
Pulley and Y Drive Pulley
Assembly to measure tension.
* Target: XXX ± xx kg
3- 172
P4x12 SMW (x2)
2a. Laterally shift Y-axis Motor 2b. Tighten the screws (x2) after Y-
Assembly until tension becomes Axis Motor is positioned.
right.
Content Check and adjust the

OK
alignment of Y Drive Belt
(between Y Drive Pulley Horizontal in middle
4. Adjust Assembly - Y-T pulley).

Improper assembling may
OK
Y Drive Belt cause belt dropping, motor

idle running or bad print
Alignment
quality. NG
Tools Shifted lower
NG
Slanting
1a. Place Y Drive Belt on Y Drive Pul-
ley and confirm that fitting is cor-
rect.
* Place the belt on the position
shown in the drawing horizon-
tally at placing the belt.
Fix E-ring outside (Top/Bottom)

3 ± 2.0 mm
Y-T pulley bracket Y-T SP Plate (M507262)
B4x60 (x2) Y Drive Belt

Left Y-T pulley assy. (M006977) (M800885/6)
1b. ~ Check Pulley ~ 2. Tighten screws (x2) of Y-T SPplate 3. Check Belt tension Part
to increase the belt tension.
* Place E-rings on top and bottom The gap between line A of Y-T pul-
of the pulley outside of the blacket * Loosen the screws alternately. ley and Y-T BKT is 1 - 5mm, as a
at fixing the pulley. Loosening only a screw could target.
spring.
3- 173
OK NG
5. Reassemble
Covers
cover. cover.

3- 174
3-5-5. Y Drive Belt
Behind
1. Remove
Y Drive Belt
pected move.
Loosen (x2)
P4x12 SMW (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)
Maintenance Cover L (M601944)
3a. Remove Right Cover. 3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ 4. Remove Maintenance Cover L.
Loosen screws lower side back and Right side face : 4
front and remove the following Right top face : 3
screws.
Lower side : 2
P4x12 SMW (x11)

Left Cover
(M507494)

Loosen (x2)
Right Right
5. Remove Left Cover. 6a. Remove Open and close cover 6b. ~ Remove Open/Close cover~
Assy.
Loosen lower side screws (x2) and Take out fulcrum pin on the left side
remove screws shown in the picture Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and of cover from from frame to remove
to remove the cover. remove left side of the cover. open/close cover.
3- 175

Right

Open the cover, move the fulcrum Remove the pin from the left shaft Remove right and left screws (x6) to
pin to inward and remove it from the hole to remove the front cover. remove the Y Cover F.
pin hole. * Take care not to drop the cover.
Operations with 2 persons.
P4x12 SMW (x2)

B3x6 (x2)
CW: Down
Right
9. Manually lower Station to move 10. Remove the head cover. 11. Separate the belt from the
Carriage. carriage.
Remove the right and left screws to
Up: Counterclockwise (CCW) remove the head cover. Remove screws (x2) shown in the
Down: Clockwise (CW) picture and pull out the belt connec-
tion part in the Y-direction(the right
of the carriage is the left)
Left Y-T Pulley Bracket (M507315)

Y-T SP Plate (M507262)
Do not loosen.
Belt Holder 1
B4x60 (x2) Y Drive Belt Y-T Pulley Belt Holder (M400161)
(M800885/6) (M205123)
12. Remove Y-T SP Plate to release 13. Remove Y-T Pulley. 14. Remove the left and right Belt
tension. Holders 1 from Belt Holder.
* Loosen the screws alternately.
Loosening only a screw could
spring.
3- 176
B4x8 Loosen Pick with Slotted Screwdriver Slide to remove.
Belt Holder 1
(M400160)
Belt Holder S
(M503786)
15. Loosen the screw. 16. Disconnect Belt Holder S and Belt 17. Slide Belt Holder S to remove.
Holder 1.
* Remove Belt Holders S on both
Insert Slotted Screwdriver to pick. ends.
* See reassembly procedure for
further steps.
Fix with tape.
2. Reassemble
Old Belt
Make a circle
with belt
Y Drive Belt New Belt
New Belt
Tape
Follow the next procedure for reas- 1. Join new belt and old belt with 2. Run the new belt around
sembly. tape. Carriage.
Engage the toothed surface of

Y Drive Belt (M800885/6) belt with Belt Holder 1.
Lead belt behind Belt Holder 1

Carriage.
Belt holder 1 (M40060) Belt Holder (M400161)
3. Lead the belt behind Carriage 4. Engage the toothed surface at 5. Mount Belt Holders 1 (left and
after it ran around Carriage. both ends of belt with Belt Holder right) to Belt Holder.
1, and tighten screw after
mounting Belt Holder S.
3- 177
Put E-ring outside (upper/lower) Left

OK
Y-T Pulley Bracket Horizontal in middle Y-T SP Plate (M507262)
OK
NG
Shifted lower
NG B4x60 (x2) Y Drive Belt

Y-T Pulley (M205123) Slanting (M800885/6)
6. Assemble Y-T Pulley with Y-T * Put the belt horizontally as shown 7. Fix the Y-T SP Plate
Pulley Bracket. above.
* Loosen the screws alternately.
* Put upper and lower E-rings Loosening only a screw could
outside of each bracket. heavily burden the other to break
spring.
Y-T Bracket
Belt Holder (M400161) A 3 ± 2.0 mm
Screw Holes (x2)

Y-T Pulley Bracket
8a. Align Belt Holder so that screws 9a. Check Belt Tension Part 9b. Check Belt Tension Part 2
holes (x2) become in position, to
reassemble. * When A-line plate end of Y-T pul- The gap between Line A of the Y-T
ley shown in the picture touches to pulley and the Y-T BKT is 1 - 5mm,
Y-T BKT, return to 4 and move 1 as a target.
belt ridge to inward.
(If necessary, cut appropriately.)
OK NG
P4x12 SMW (x2)
5. Reassemble
Covers
cover. cover.
9c. ~ Tighten screws. ~ Put on covers after adjustment. * Put cover inside of washers for
3- 178
3-5-6. Wiper Motor
Behind
Power ON.
L.*> [JV5-01]
Wiper Motor ST.MAINTENANCE


pected move.
off the power.

Rear Cover R
Loosen (x2) (M507496)
P4x12 SMW (x2)
2. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 3a. Remove Right Cover and Rear 3b. ~Remove the Right Cover ~
Cover R.
Remove the screws shown in the
Loosen screws on lower side of the picture and remove the right cover
right cover and remove screws first.
shown in the picture. * Take care not to drop the cover.

Right

pin hole. * Take care not t o drop the cover.
Operation eith more than 2
persons.
3- 179
Station Back Cover (M507375)

Wiper Wash Holder
(M601841)
P4x12 SMW (x2)
P4x12 SMW
6a. Remove Station Back Cover. 6b. ~ Station Back Cover~ 7. Remove Wiper Wash Holder.
Behind
Disconnect connector. Wiper Unit
Assembly
P4x12 SMW (x2)
Disconnect connector.
8. Disconnect the connector from 9. Disconnect the connector from 10. Loosen the screws (x2) to remove
Wiper Sensor. Wiper Motor. Wiper Unit Assembly.
Wiper Motor (E300495)
Wiper Unit Assembly

P3x6 SMW (x4)
11a.Remove Wiper Motor. 11b.~ Remove Wiper Motor. ~
3- 180
OK NG
2. Reassemble
Wiper Motor
cover. cover.

3- 181
3-5-7. Station Motor
Behind
Power ON.
L.*> [JV5-01]
Station Motor ST.MAINTENANCE


pected move.
off the power.

Rear Cover R
Loosen (x2) (M507496)
P4x12 SMW (x2)
2. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 3a. Remove the Right Cover and Rear 3b. ~Remove the Right Cover ~
Cover R.
Remove screws shown in the picture
Loosen screws on back and front of and remove the right cover first.
lower side of the right cover and * Take care not to drop the cover.
remove screws shown in the picture.
Behind Station Motor (E300495)
P3x6 SMW (x3)
Disconnect P4x12 SMW (x2) Motor Bracket (M507250)

4. Disconnect connector from Station 5. Remove Motor Bracket. 6. Remove Station Motor.
Motor.
remove screws (x2) from back side Remove screws (x3) and remove the
of the printerand remove the motor station motor from the Motor BKT.
BKT.
3- 182
OK NG
2. Reassemble
Station Motor
cover. cover.

3- 183
3-5-8. Head UD Motor
Behind
1. Remove
Head UD
MOTOR
pected move.
Jumping Shaft
Loosen (x2)
P4x12 SMW (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)
3a. Remove Right Cover. 3b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~ 4. Confirm that Carriage Assembly
is capped.
Loosen screws on lower side right Right side face : 4
and left and remove the following Right top face : 3 * The Jumping shaft on the head
screws. unit protrudes at the position
Lower side : 2 shown in the picture.
Head UD Motor Bracket (M507210)
Head Up and Down

Motor Assembly
(M007178)
P4x12 SMW (x3)

P3x6 SMW (x2)
5. Remove the Head UD Motor 6. Remove the Head UD Motor

Remove the connector and remove
screws (x3) of the head UD motor,
and remove it with the motor.
3- 184
Lubrication
2. Reassemble
Head UD
Fitting hole
MOTOR
UD Jumping Shaft
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Lubricate UD Jumping Shaft Hole * To reassemble Head UD Motor
for reassembly. as appropriate. Bracket, tighten screw so that UD
Amount: 2 drops Jumping Shaft smoothly put in/
Lubricant: Slider Grease out the hole. Gear engagement
must have play.
Center deviance
0.5mm
Jumping Shaft
Jumping Shaft
Fitting Hole
(Head UD Motor BKT)
* At assembling the head UD motor ~ Jumping Shaft~
BKT, adjust the position so that
the jumping shaft on the head unit
can be inserted in the fitting hole
straight.
(Target :center deviance is within
0.5 mm)
3- 185
3-5-9. M Motor
Behind
P3x6 SMW
(x3)
Take-up Cover
1. Remove (M507538)
M Motor
pected move.
1. Shut off the main power. 2. Remove Take-up Cover.
P3x6 SMW
B4x10 (x2)
3a. Remove Winding Motor Unit 3b. ~Removing the Winding Motor 3c. ~Winding Motor Unit ~
Unit ~
Remove the left screw.
Remove lower side screws (x2)
C-10
C-10
Mini keeper
4. Remove the motor from the unit. 5. Remove the mini-keeper. 6. Remove the C-ring.
Remove the C-ring toremove the
mini-keeper.
3- 186
M Gear Holder Bracket

-B (M507329)
SSWP3x3 (x2)
Pin
M Gear Holder Bracket
-A (M507328)
7. Remove the pin from the motor 8. Remove M Gear Bearing BKT-A. 9. Remove Stopper Screws (x2).
shaft.
Remove the M gear bearing BKT-A Remove the stopper screws (x2)
including the BKT-B and bearing. from the motor shaft.
P4x10 SMW (x4)

M motor
M motor shaft M Motor Bracket

(M205137) (M507327)
10. Remove M Motor.
Pull out the motor shaft and remove
screws (x4) from the M motor BKT.
2. Reassemble
M MOTOR

for reassembly.
3- 187
3-6. Overhaul of Other Parts
The followings are other parts forming the JV5-130S/160S..

Part Reference page
3-6-1. Cutter Unit Assy. p. 3 - 189
3-6-2. A Heater Cover Assy. p. 3 - 193
3-6-3. P Heater Cover Assy. p. 3 - 198
3-6-4. R Heater Cover Assy. p. 3 - 204
3-6-5. Wiper Wash Solenoid p. 3 - 206
3-6-6. SSR p. 3 - 209
~ Head Assy ~
Cutter Unit Assy.
P Heater Cover Assy.

R Heater Cover Assy.
SSR (x3)
A Heater Cover Assy. Wiper Wash Solenoid
3- 188
Overhaul of Other Parts
3-6-1. Cutter Unit Assy.
Behind
Power ON.
L.*> [JV5-01]
Cutter Unit Assy. ST.MAINTENANCE


pected move.
off the power.
Right

Right Right
Assy.
Take out fulcrum pin on the left side Open the cover, move the fulcrum
Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and of cover from from frame to remove pin to inward and remove it from the
remove left side of the cover. open/close cover. pin hole.
Left P4x12 SMW (x6)

B3x6 (x2)

Remove the pin from the left shaft Remove the right and left screws Remove the right and left screws to
hole to remove the front cover. (x6) to remove the Y Cover F. remove the head cover.
sons.
3- 189
P3x10 SMW (x2)
Cutter Unit
Assembly
(M006952)
6. Remove the Cutter Assy
Content Adjust fixing position of cut-

ter unit (vertical, horizontal) Temp. joint (x2)
using a jig
Tools Height adjust jig (Media Jam/
2. Cutter Unit Cutter unit height position-
ing tool)
Positioning : OPT-J0108
Cutter Unit
* After assembling the cutter unit, * If the jig can not be arranged, 1. Set screws of the cutter unit at
execute the cutter unit positioning. using of an intervenient having temporary joint state.
height of 7.5mm in the cutter unit
side is allowed. * Temporary joint state is that the
unit is held lightly.
Down clamp lever
Notice: Keep clamp lever down at adjust-

ing.
PG setting should be 1.5mm Push to the end
2. Down the Clamp Lever 3. Set the Jig to the Platen 4. Push the jig to the end
Set 4 bosses of the jig in slots in After setting, slide the jig to head
slots back and front for platen media side to the end (to stop)
plate as shown in the drawing above.
3- 190
Push down Note : Cutter tool positioning slot has

cutter too width wider than that of the tool.
Adjust the position within the
range.
Cutter Unit Note : When there is no jig, push down
the cutter toolAssy to the platen
face and adjust using the cutter
slot of platen.
Slot for cutter tool

Height Adjust Jig Height Adjust Jig
5a. djust cutter unit height 5b. Adjust the cutter unit position 5c. ~ Cutter Position Adjust Supple-
back-front. ment ~
Decide the unit position so that the * Execute the following cutter tool
cutter tool meets the slot (with push position check manually before
down the cutter tool), anf fix it with turning the power ON.
a screw.
Note : On rare occasions, the tool comes

out of the slot because of assem-
Head Unit bling accident errors or deiffer-
ences of part accuracies.
In such a case, adjust again to the
back-front optimum position
where the tool always in whole
L end Center R end slot on the platen
6a. Check the Cutter Tool Position 6b. Re-adjusting of the Cutter Tool
back-front positioning
center and left end on the platen, and
push down the cutter tool Assy to
Content Measure each of media pres- [ REMOTE ] + [ FUNCTION] + Power ON
ence position and no presence (Start with Maintenance Open Mode)

position with downing.. L.*> [JV5-01]
Tools • Media [FUNCTION]
3. Encoder FUNCTION
[ ] / [] : SW
Test
SET UP <ENT>
FUNCTION
(to Next)
#TEST
* Execute “ENCODER TEST” of * f the media is too thin to read, use 1. Select “TEST ”
“TEST” (MAINTENANCE a media within the specifications Start with the Maintenance Open
MODE) range. Mode and select “TEST”.
3- 191
#TEST #CUTTER ENCODER

ENCODER TEST <ENT> [ENTER] : Set Result of a test.
THICK = 0.5mm
#ENCODER TEST Pr=-247 Mr=-231 [END] :End
LINEAR ENCODER <ent> [ ] / [] : SW
Pr : Measurement of Platen
#ENCODER TEST Mr: Measurement on Media
CUTTER ENCODER <ent> [ENTER] : Set
#CUTTER ENCODER
CHECK :ent [ENTER] : Exec.
2. Execute “CUTTER ENCODER”. 3. Confirm the test results and finish

the test when there is no error.
Select and execute “CUTTER
ENCODER” of “ENCODER
TEST”.
4. Reassemble
Cutter Unit Assy.

for reassembly.
3- 192
3-6-2. A Heater Cover Assy.
1. Remove
Drying fan
Assembly
Right
Remove connectors for drying fan Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and
BOX relay PCB.
Roll screen Notice: If a spring of roll screen is

released, winding becomes dif-
ficu-lut. Take care until it is
Loosen (x2) fixed with a pin.
Right Right Left

Left Right
Loosen (x2)
Exhaust cover L
(M507882)
CS 6x15 P4x12 SMW
Right
3- 193
Left
Loosen (x2) Exhaust cover R Drying fan Assy. 130/160
(M507881) Belt Screw x2 (M400140) (M007141/40)

(KS-15x16-A)
Belt Screw Right
6b. ~ Remove exhaust cover R. ~ 7a. Remove Dryer FAN Assy from 7b. ~ Remove Dryer FAN Assy ~
stayes in both sides.
exhaust cover R. Remove right and left mini-knobs drop the Dryer FAN Assy.
and remove the belt lock screw.
Left Left
P4x12 SMW (x2)

bracket (M507883) (M507879)
P4x12 SMW (x5)
Drying fan stay L

(M507880) Right
Behind
2. Remove
A Heater Cover
Assy. Warning:Electric Shock!!

shock.
3- 194
P4x12 SMW (x7) Right
P4x12 SMW (x11)

Rear Cover L
(M507494)
Loosen (x2) Move fulcrum pin to inward

Loosen (x3) and remove it from pin hole
3. Remove Left Cover. 4. Remove Rear Cover L. 5a. Remove Front Cover L.
Loosen lower side screws (x2) and Loosen lower side screws (x3) and Open the cover, move the fulcrum
remove the screw shown in the pic- remove the screw shown in the pic- pin to inward and remove it from the
ture to remove the cover. ture to remove the cover. pin hole.
Left P4x12 SMW (x6)

Right P4x12 SMW (x3)
H Harness Cover
(M507183)
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
5b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~ 6. Remove Y Cover F. 7. Remove H Harness Cover.
Remove the pin from the left shaft Remove the right and left screws
hole to remove the front cover. (x6) to remove the Y Cover F.
persons.
Maintenance Space
Body Color Qty

Heater PCB Assembly Black 4
Remove in arrow direction. (E104043)
8. Remove Maintenance Space 9a. Remove the connectors shown 9b. ~ Connector List ~
After Heater: Black Connector
arrow direction.
3- 195
Release clamps (x8)
P3x10 SMW (x4)
Loosen (x4)
P4x12 SMW (x4)
from falling.
10. Release cable clamps (x8). 11a.Loosen the screw for A Heater 11b. ~ A Heater Cover Assembly ~
Cover Assembly.
Upper: P3 x 10 SMW (x4)
Lower: P4 x 12 SMW (x4)
Release connector.
12a.Remove A Heater Cover Assem- 12b.Release Heater Connector. 12c. ~ A Heater Cover Assembly ~
bly.
* Be careful not to damage the 130S: A Heater Cover 130 Assembly
Take cable out of clamp. surface of A Heater Cover. (M006927)
(M006925)
3. Reassemble
A Heater Cover
Assy.
Red: Blue: Black:
Pre-heater Print heater After-heater
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Remove loosening of cables * Refer to the above illustration to
for reassembly. referring to the above to connect ensure right connection.
to Heater PCB.
3- 196
L: Exhaust duct OK NG Front Back

Assy side (White) Without fan label With fan label

R :DryerFAN is outside of the is inside of the
Assy side (Black) cover. cover.
* Connector connection of lower * Put cover inside of washers for * Check front side and back side at
side of the printer is as shown in loosened screws to tighten them. assembling the Dryer FAN Assy
the picture above. and set that front side comes top.
Operation with 2 persons.
Roll screen
Fix with pushing
Left Right
* Wind the spring and fix it with a * At fixing loosen roll screen hold
pin, and after fixing to hold fitting, fitting, fix the screw with pushing
take the pin out at assembling the the roll screen to inward.
roll screen.
4. Test・Confirm
* Check operation of
heater&dryer&exhaust FAN at
the final on-line test in repairing.
3- 197
3-6-3. P Heater Cover Assy.
1. Remove
Drying fan
Assembly
Right
Remove connectors for drying fan Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and
BOX relay PCB.
Notice: If a spring of roll screen is

Roll screen released, winding becomes dif-
ficu-lut. Take care until it is fixed
Loosen (x2) with a pin.
Right Right Left

Left Right
Loosen (x2)
Exhaust cover L
(M507882)
CS 6x15 P4x12 SMW
Right
3- 198
Left
Loosen (x2) Exhaust cover R Drying fan Assy. 130/160
(M507881) Belt Screw x2 (M400140) (M007141/40)

(KS-15x16-A)
Belt Screw Right
6b. ~ Remove exhaust cover R. ~ 7a. Remove Dryer FAN Assy from the 7b. ~ Remove Dryer FAN Assy ~
roght and left stayes.
exhaust cover R. Remove the right and left mini- drop the Dryer FAN Assy.
knobs and remove the belt lock
screw.
Left Left
P4x12 SMW (x2)

bracket (M507883) (M507879)
P4x12 SMW (x5)
Drying fan stay L

(M507880) Right
Behind
2. Remove
P Heater Cover
Assy. Warning:Electric Shock!!

shock.
3- 199
P4x12 SMW (x7) Right
P4x12 SMW (x11)

Rear Cover L
(M507494)
Loosen (x2) Move fulcrum pin to inward

Loosen (x3) and remove it from pin hole
3. Remove Left Cover. 4. Remove Rear Cover L. 5a. Remove Front Cover L.
Loosen screws (x2) on the lower Loosen screws (x3) on the lower Open the cover, move the fulcrum
side and remove the screws shown side and remove the screws shown pin to inward and remove it from the
in the picture to remove the cover in the picture to remove the cover. pin hole.
Left P4x12 SMW (x6)

Right P4x12 SMW (x3)
H Harness Cover
(M507183)
Y Cover F (M507498/7501)
5b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~ 6. Remove Y Cover F. 7. Remove H Harness Cover.
Remove the pin from the left shaft Remove right and left screws (x6) to
hole to remove the front cover. remove the Y Cover F.
persons.
Maintenance Space
Body Color Qty

Heater PCB Assembly Black 4
Remove in arrow direction. (E104043) Blue 4
Blue (Heater Side) 1
8. Remove Maintenance Space 9a. Remove the connectors shown 9b. ~ Connector List ~
Print Heater: Blue Connector
Loosen the screws (x4) to remove After Heater: Black Connector
arrow direction.
3- 200
Release clamps (x8)
P3x10 SMW (x4)
Loosen (x4)
P4x12 SMW (x4)
from falling.
10. Release cable clamps (x8). 11a.Loosen the screw for A Heater 11b. ~ A Heater Cover Assembly ~
Cover Assembly.
Upper: P3 x 10 SMW (x4) (M006927)
Lower: P4 x 12 SMW (x4) 160S: A Heater Cover 160 Assembly
(M006925)

P Heater Assembly
B3x10 Ni (x24)
Release connector.
Media Plate (M507157)
12a.Remove A Heater Cover Assem- 12b.Release Heater Connector. 13. Loosen the screws (x24) for P
bly. Heater Assembly.
* Be careful not to damage the
Take cable out of clamp. surface of A Heater Cover. * Slide Media Plate and certainly
loosen the lower screws.
Lead through bush after Release connector

releasing all clamps.
Put through bush Release clamps(x2)

Release clamp (x8)
Release connector and
clamps to lead through bush.
Lead through bush.
14a.Process Heater Cable. 14b. ~ Process Heater Cable. ~ 15. Process Thermistor Cable.
Release all clamps for Heater cable Release connector of Thermistor and
(Blue) on the left of printer to lead cable from clamps to lead through
through bush. bush.
3- 201
P Heater Assembly
16a.Remove P Heater Assembly. 16b.~ P Heater Assembly ~

* Carefully use both hands to
handle cables so as to prevent
them from hanging.
Fix screws with pushing

Media Plate
3. Reassemble (M507157)
P Heater Cover
Assy.
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Be sure to reassemble Media Plate 1. Tighten the upper screws pressing
for reassembly. on reassembling P Heater Plate against the back.
Assembly. Follow the next
procedure to smoothly reassemble.
Pull plate
Left
Move smoothly
Push slide bar Right
2. To tighten the lower screws, pull 3. Put on the other in the same way. * Run Heater Cables (Blue) around
Plate toward you and press Slide each clamp on each end in front of
Bar against the back. * After assembling, slide it to the printer.
right and left to confirm moving
smoothly.
3- 202

L: Exhaust duct
Assy side (White)
Lower:Connect to Thermostat of each Assembly

R :DryerFAN
Assy side (Black)
Red: Blue: Black:
* Remove loosening of cables * Caution: Refer to the above * Connector connection on the
referring to the above to connect illustration to ensure right lower side of the printer is as
to Heater PCB. connection. shown in the picture.
OK NG Front Back
Without fan label With fan label

cover. cover.
Left
* Put cover inside of washers for * Check front side and back side at * Wind the spring and fix it with a
loosened screws to tighten them. assembling the Dryer FAN Assy pin, and after fixing to hold fitting,
and set that front side comes top. take the pin out at assembling the
Operation with 2 persons. roll screen.
Roll screen
Fix with pushing
4. Test・Confirm
Right
* At fixing loosen roll screen hold * Check operation of
fitting, fix the screw with pushing heater&dryer&exhaust FAN at
the roll screen to inward. the final on-line test in repairing.
3- 203
3-6-4. R Heater Cover Assy.
Behind
1. Remove
R Heater Cover
Assy.

shock.
P4x12 SMW (x7)

Rear Cover L
Left Cover (M507497) PR-guide 130/160
(M507494) (M507425/7308)
Loosen (x2)
Loosen (x3)
3. Remove Left Cover. 4. Remove Rear Cover L. 5a. Remove the PR Guide 130/160
Loosen lower side screws (x2) and Loosen lower side screws (x3) and Remove the right and left screws
remove the screw shown in the remove the screw shown in the (x4).
drawing to remove the cover. drawing to remove the cover.
P4x12 SMW (x2)
Connector Color qty

Red 2
Heater PCB Assembly Red(heater side) 1
(E104043)
5b. ~ Remove PR Guide ~ 6a. Remove connectors descrived in 6b. ~ Connectors ~
the right from the heater PCB.
* Conduct with 2 persons not to
drop the cover. Remove connectors (CN7, CN15,
CN16).
3- 204
P4x12 SMW Loosen the screw
7. Remove the Relay Connector 8. Remove Screws on lower side of 9. Loosen Screws on upper side of
the R Heater Cover Assy the R Heater Cover Assy in front
Remove the relay connector of ther- side of the printer.
mistor at station side. 130S : 4
160S : 5 130S : 6
160S : 7

(M006926/M006924)
10. Remove Cables from the Frame 11a.Remove R Heater Cover 11b. ~ R Heater Cover assy. ~
Remove cables before the heater * Take care not to give damage on
cover replacing so that cables are not the cover or other parts in the
in mess at the replacing. vicinity.
Any of same colors will do. OK NG

2. Reassemble
R Heater Cover
Assy. Bottom:Connected to thermostat of heater Assy A screw washer A screw washer
Red: Blue: Black: cover. cover.
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Caution: See the above illustration * Put cover inside of washers for
for reassembly. for right connection. loosened screws to tighten them.
3- 205
3-6-5. Wiper Wash Solenoid
Power ON
#HD.MAINTENANCE
L.*> [JV5-01] FILL UP INK <ent> [ ]/[]
[ST.MAINTE]
1. Discharge MAINTENANCE
#HD.MAINTENANCE
Washing Fluid ST.MAINTENANCE <ent>
MAINTENANCE
[ ]/[]
MaintWashLiquid
FILLING UP <ent> [ ]/[]
MaintWashLiquid
DISCHARGE <ent> [ENTER]
1. Turn the power to the JV-5 On, 2. Select “DISCHARGE” of MAIN-

and get into the MAINTENANCE TENANCE Washiliquid.
MUENU.
Remove a maint.wash.
liquid cartridge.
There is a CARTRIDGE
Remove washing liquid cartridge
PLEASE WAIT
******--------------
3. Remove the washing liquid car-

tridge to discharge washing liquid.
Behind
2. Remove
Wiper Wash
Solenoid
pected move.
3- 206

Right

pin hole. * Take care not to drop the cover.
persons.
Left Right Left

Down Clamp Lever
P4x12 SMW
Loosen (x4) Tilt
Front cover
P4x12 SMW sensor R
KB Cover
(M601945)
Loosen
P4x12 SMW
5. Down the Clamp lever. 6a. Remove KB Cover. 6b. ~ Remove KB Cover 2 ~
Loosen the right 4 screws. Remove the screw on upper side of
the front cover sensor R, loosen
lower side screws and tilt to the
front, and remove the screw fixing
the KB cover shown in the picture.
Left
Wiper wash holder
Loosen (x3) (M601841)
P4x12 SMW
KB Cover
(M601945)
Not to contact
Release connector
P4x12 SMW
6c. ~ Remove KB Cover 3 ~ 7. Remove the Connector 8. Remove the Wiper Washi Holder
Loosen screws (x3) to remove the Remove the connector of wiper * Take care not to drop washing liq-
KB cover with taking care not to hit washing solenoid from the Relay uid in the tube on parts in the
the dryer unit. Connector. vicinity.
3- 207
Remove tube
P3x6 SMW (x2)
9a. Remove the Wiper Wash Solenoid 9b. ~ Wiper Wash Solenoid Assy. ~ 10a.Remove the Tube
Assy
* Take care not to drop washing liq-
Remove screws (x2) , remove the uid in the tube on parts in the
wiper wash solenoid while the tube vicinity.
is connected to.
3. Reassemble
Wiper Wash
Wiper Wash Solenoid
Solenoid
Assy. (E104400)
10b. ~ Wiper Wash Solenoid Assy. ~ Reverse the disassembly procedure

for reassembly.
Main Power ON (Back)

#HD.MAINTENANCE
Power SW ON FILL UP INK <ent> [ ]/[]
4. Wash Liquid L.*> [JV5-01]

[ST.MAINTE]
#HD.MAINTENANCE
Filling MAINTENANCE
ST.MAINTENANCE <ent> [ ]/[]
MaintWashLiquid
FILLING UP <ent> [ENTER]
MAINTENANCE Execute wash liquid filling

1. Turn the power to the JV-5 ON, 2. Fill Wash Liquid.

and get into the MAINTENANCE
MENU. * As for the detail of changing of
screens at filling, see the Instruc-
tion Manual.
3- 208
3-6-6. SSR
Behind
MF Cover C 160/130
Loosen (160:8 , 130:6)
1. Remove
SSR
Turn OFF the rear power P4x12 SMW (160:12 , 130:10)
switch.
1. Shut off the main power. 2. Remove MF Cover C

* As front switch does not cut the Remove the cover in the cap station
power to heater PCB, there is a side on the back of the printer.
fear of getting electric shock. 130S : MF Cover C 130 (M507418)
160S : MF Cover C 160 (M507165)
P2x10 SMW (x2)
SSR bracket (M507168) SSR x3
3. Pull out the Cables (x4) of SSR. 4a. Remove SSR 4b. ~ SSR ~
Pull out cables connected SSR. Remove screws (x2) to remove SSR
from the SSR BKT.
From IO PCB
(Either top or bottom)
2. Reassemble
SSR
From heater PCB
(Either top or bottom)
Reverse the disassembly procedure * Connect the connector referring to * If the cables have extra length,
for reassembly. the drawing above, and take care make a circle with a clamp not to
not to set wrong side. touch AC.
3- 209
OK NG

cover. cover.
* Put cover inside of washers for

3- 210
CHAPTER 4 Troubleshooting
Contents
4-1. Outline ......................................................................... 4-2
4-1-1. Rough identification of the source of the trouble 4-2
4-1-2. Checking procedure ............................................... 4-2
4-2. Troubles for which error messages are displayed .... 4-4
4-2-1. Error messages and corrective measures ............ 4-4
4-2-2. Warning messages and corrective measures ..... 4-15
4- 1
4-1. Outline
This chapter describes the troubleshooting for JV5-130S/160S. Before starting work, read and understand
thoroughly the instructions given below and also in “1-1. Precautions in Maintenance” ( p. 1- 2 ).
4-1-1. Rough identification of the source of the trouble

At the beginning of troubleshooting, it is necessary to identify roughly which functions the trouble relates
to.
Problems can be roughly classified into those that relate to the printer itself and those that involve the
connection between the printer and the host computer.
1. Problems with the printer itself
The cause of the trouble can be identified by executing appropriate functions or using test
functions.
2. Problems concerning the connection to the host computer
Hardware: Broken wire or faulty contact of cables

Software: Transmission by improper application setting
In the standard setting of JV5-130S/160S, priority is given to the host computer.
Check the settings on the host computer to see if there is any improper parameter setting.
4-1-2. Checking procedure

START
Refer to Precautions in
Maintenance ( P. 1- 2 )
Is there Yes 4-2. Troubles for which error messages are displayed (
error message? P. 4-4 )
No
Is the Yes
trouble related to print
quality?
No
Rough identification of error source
Execute appropriate functions or use test
functions of JV5-130S/160S ( See p.4- 4 )
Do the
above functions operate No
normally?
Yes
Troubles on the host computer side
If this troubleshooting cannot correct the trouble, check to see if the same trouble occurs
with another host computer (if possible).
4- 2
Outline
This section describes troubleshooting procedures for the problems for which error messages are
displayed.
1. Identifying the error category
The causes of errors can be classified into the following categories:
Handling error on the host computer side

Trouble on the host computer side
Trouble with the interface cable
Printer handling error
Printer mechanical trouble
Printer hardware trouble
Printer firmware trouble
2. Initial action
Refer to the error message, and judge whether the trouble lies on the host computer side or on the printer
side.
Has any of the interface conditions (Printer model setting, command, communication conditions,
etc.) been changed?
Does the trouble occur under specific conditions?
Does the same trouble occur repeatedly?
3. Failure on the printer side
Take the following steps to repair the printer.
Replace the defective part (sensor, etc.) or make the necessary adjustment.
Replace the main PCB.
4. Repair at the factory
If the error recurs even after the corrective measures specified here are taken, return the printer to the
factory of MIMAKI for repair.
4- 3
4-2. Troubles for which error messages are displayed

4-2-1. Error messages and corrective measures
<Error messages and corrective measures >
Display Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual)
ERROR Cause Descriptions in the manual
No. ERROR (for reference) Remedy
ERROR MAIN ROM An error occurred on the Turn the power OFF and turn the Replace the main PCB with a new one.
1.
01 control circuit board. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes.

(ROM) In a case of recurrence, contact your
local distributer to call for service.
ERROR MAIN RAM An error occurred on the Turn the power OFF and turn the
(RAM) In a case of recurrence, contact your
ERROR POWER +3.3V An error occurred on the Turn the power OFF and turn the Replace the power supply PCB with a new
1.
03 control circuit board. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. one.

(Power supply voltage In a case of recurrence, contact your Replace the main PCB with a new one.
2.
+3.3V) local distributer to call for service.

POWER +5V An error occurred on the
control circuit board.
(Power supply voltage
+5V)
+24V)
+42V)
ERROR FLASH ROM An error occurred on the Turn the power OFF and turn the After uploading parameters, initialize all
1.
04 control circuit board. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. parameters.

(Parameter ROM) In a case of recurrence, contact your * If the state is not restored, replace the main
local distributer to call for service. PCB with a new one.
ERROR SD-RAM An error occurred on the Turn the power OFF and turn the Replace the main PCB with a new one.
1.
06 control circuit board. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. Replace the memory PCB with a new one.
2.
(SDRAM) In a case of recurrence, contact your

ERROR HEAD (----) An error was detected in Turn the power OFF and turn the Reconfirm the head temperature with
1.
07 the head connection. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. #TEST>TEMPERATURE.CHK>NOZ-

(Abnormal temperature In a case of recurrence, contact your ZLE TEMP.
was detected) local distributer to call for service. In case of recurrence. execute the follow-
VOLTAGE (----) An error was detected in ings.
the head connection. Make sure that corresponding head FPC,
2.
(Abnormal voltage was head relay PCB are connected in the right
detected) way.
Replace the corresponding head with a
3.
new one.
Replace the slider PCB with a new one.
4.
4- 4
Troubles for which error messages are displayed
<Error messages and corrective measures (continued) >

ERROR LinearEN- An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the Make sure that linear encoder scale and
1.
08 CODER: SENSOR detection by the linear power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. encoder PCB are placed in the right posi-
encoder. In a case of recurrence, contact your tions.
(Counting impossible) local distributer to call for service. Replace the encoder PCB with a new one.
2.
LinearEN- An error occurred in

CODER: DIR. detection by the linear
encoder.
(Wrong orientation)
LinearEN- An error occurred in
CODER: COUNT detection by the linear
encoder.
(Read-out count error)
ERROR FPGA ERROR An error occurred on the Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
(FPGA PDC) In a case of recurrence, contact your
HDC ERROR An error occurred on the local distributer to call for service. 1. Replace the corresponding HDC PCB with
(----) control circuit board. a new one.
(FPGA HDC) 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
ERROR COMMAND The printer received Securely connect the interface cable in 1. When the state is not recovered even if
10 ERROR some data other than position. untreated data is cleared, execute the fol-
command data. Use an interface cable conforming to lowings.
the specifications. 2. Check the IF (USB/1394) cable. (specifi-
cations, cable length, etc.)
3. Replace the USB PCB with a new one.
4. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
ERROR PARAMETER Any parameter outside Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. When the state is not recovered even if
11 ERROR the range of acceptable power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. untreated data is cleared, execute the fol-
numeric values was In a case of recurrence, contact your lowings.
received. local distributer to call for service. 2. Check the IF (USB/1394) cable. (specifi-
ERROR MAINTENANCE – (This error does not occur on site.) 1. When the state is not recovered even if
12 COMMAND untreated data is cleared, execute the fol-
lowings.
2. Check the IF (USB/1394) cable. (specifi-
ERROR MRL COMMAND Received data does not Transmit data with the command sys- 1. Mak sure that the transmission data is in
16 follow the command tem corresponding to the system. MRL-III command system (data ripped for
system set in the device. JV-5).
2. Check the command system set with
[MACHINE SETUP] – [MRL COM-
MAND].
4- 5

ERROR I/F BOARD 01 An error occurred in the Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a
20 interface between the I/F power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. new one.
board and the control In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
board. local distributer to call for service.
I/F BOARD 02 An error occurred in the
interface between the I/F
board and the control
board.
board.
board.
ERROR I/F NONE No I/F board is attached Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a
21 to the control board. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. new one.
In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
ERROR HOST I/F Time out error occurred Make sure that the cables are con- 1. Make sure that the connection to the host
23 during communication nected correctly and there is no occur- PC is correct.
between the host com- rence of an error in the host PC. 2. Make sure that there is no occurrence of an
puter and the interface error in the host PC, or the application runs
board for IEEE-1394 normally.
connection.
ERROR I/F INITIAL An error occurred in ini- Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a
24 tial operation of the I/F power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. new one.
board and control board. In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
ERROR FULL-SPEED An error occurred in Check that the host PC supports the Make sure that the host PC and the USB
25 communication between USB2.0 interface. (Communication cable follow the USB2.0 interface standard.
the host computer and can be resumed without changing any
the interface board for setting. However, it is recommend to
USB2.0 connection. use the connection in High-Speed
(Full-Speed mode con- mode.)
nection)
PACKET SIZE An error occurred in Make sure that the cables are con- 1. Make sure that the connection to the host
OVER communication between nected correctly and there is no occur- PC is correct.
the host computer and rence of an error in the host PC. 2. Make sure that there is no occurrence of an
the interface board for error in the host PC, or the application runs
USB2.0 connection. normally.
USB PROTOCOL An error occurred in
communication between
the host computer and
the interface board for
USB2.0 connection.
USB ENVIRON- An error occurred in
MENT communication between
USB2.0 connection.
USB DATA An error occurred in
communication between
USB2.0 connection.
4- 6

ERROR OPERATION Improper operation was Perform correct operations. 1. It is notified that wrong operation is con-
30 ERROR conducted on the opera- ducted.
tion panel.
ERROR DATA REMAIN As received data which Change setting function after executing 1. Explain that any of the operating condi-
34 is not drawn remains, all received data or clearing the data. tions cannot be changed if data that have
setting of Function Fea- not been drawn remains.
ture can not be changed.
ERROR MOTOR ALARM The X-motor was over- Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check friction of X (Y)-axis motor.
40 X loaded. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the X (Y)-axis motor with a new
In a case of recurrence, contact your one.
local distributer to call for service. 3. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
ERROR MOTOR ALARM The Y-motor is over- Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check friction of X (Y)-axis motor.
41 Y loaded. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the X (Y)-axis motor with a new
local distributer to call for service. 3. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
ERROR X OVER CUR- Overcurrent in the X- Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check friction of X (Y)-axis motor.
42 RENT motor was detected. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the X (Y)-axis motor with a new
local distributer to call for service. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
ERROR Y OVER CUR- Overcurrent in the Y- Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check friction of X (Y)-axis motor.
43 RENT motor was detected. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the X (Y)-axis motor with a new
local distributer to call for service. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
ERROR CAPPING : SEN- An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check that the cap sensor functions prop-
45 SOR capping control. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. erly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST.
(Sensor trouble) In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the cap sensor with a new one.
local distributer to call for service. 3. Replace the slider PCB with a new one.
CAPPING : An error occurred in 1. Make sure that the adjusting value of
PARAMETER capping control. #ADJUST>CAPPING is set correctly.
(Improper parameter
adjusted value)
ERROR WIPER An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check that the wiper sensor functions
46 wiper control. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. properly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST.
In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Check that the wiper motor functions
local distributer to call for service. properly with #TEST>MOTOR TEST.
3. Make sure that there is no friction on the
guide rail caused by sticking of ink.
4. Replace the wiper sensor with a new one.
5. Replace the stepping motor with a new
one.
6. Replace the IO PCB with a new one.
ERROR STATION An error occurred in sta- Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check that the station sensor works prop-
47 tion control. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. erly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST.
In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Check that the cap motor works properly
local distributer to call for service. with #TEST>MOTOR TEST.
3. Check that up/down operation of the sta-
tion is smooth.
4. Replace the station sensor with a new one.
5. Replace the stepping motor with a new
one.
ERROR CUTTER SOLE- An error occurred in cut- Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check that up/down operation of the cutter
49 NOID ter control. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. is smooth.
In a case of recurrence, contact your
4- 7

ERROR MEDIA DETECT Paper could not be If the same error message appears 1. Make sure that there is no gap between the
50 detected. again even after setting the media prop- end faces of platen and platen rubber.
The media set position erly, contact your local distributor to 2. Execute #TEST>PAPER SENSOR to
or media itself is not call for service. obtain sensor values at the media exist
proper. position and media non-exist position.
When the difference of values is more than
±50, detection is allowed.
If the difference is smaller, execute the fol-
lowings.
3. Clean the paper width sensor or replace
with a new one.
4. Replace the slider PCB with a new one.
THICKNESS Media thickness could Input the media thickness or select the Make sure that operation of the cutter is
DETECT not be detected. END key and execute media detection proper at detection.
again. Or, make sure that the scale and the encoder
PCB are placed on the right positions.
At recurrence after checkings above men-
tioned, execute the followings.
1. Replace the encoder PCB with a new one.
* This error may occur when thin media is
used.
ERROR Y-ORIGIN Y-origin could not be Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check that the Y origin sensor works prop-
51 detected. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. erly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST.
In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the Y origin sensor with a new
local distributer to call for service. one.
ERROR HEAD HEIGHT Head height origin could Make sure that the scale and the encoder PCB
53 ORIGIN not be detected. are placed on the right positions. Check the
vertical operation of the head unit with man-
ual operation (smoothness of operation).
ERROR MEDIA JAM Paper jam was detected. Dissolve media jamming. 1. Check that the jam sensor works properly
54 If the error is still displayed after dis- with #TEST>SENSOR TEST.
solving, contact your local distributer 2. Check whether the error is detected at
to call for service. inversion in Y SERVO TEST. If it is
detected, check a spring in the unit.
3. Replace the jam sensor with a new one.
5. Replace the HDC PCB in slot 1 with a new
one.
ERROR POSITION An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the Make sure that the scale and the encoder PCB
58 ENCODER:DIR detection by the posi- power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. are placed on the right positions.
tion encoder. In a case of recurrence, contact your At recurrence after checkings above men-
(Wrong orientation) local distributer to call for service. tioned, execute the followings.
POSITION An error occurred in 1. Replace the encoder PCB with a new one.
ENCODER:CNT detection by the posi- 2. Replace the slider PCB with a new one.
tion encoder.
(Read-out count error)
4- 8

ERROR CUTTER An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the Make sure that the scale and the encoder PCB
59 ENCODER detection by the cutter power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. are placed on the right positions. Check the
encoder. In a case of recurrence, contact your vertical operation of the head unit with man-
(Wrong orientation) local distributer to call for service. ual operation.
ERROR TAKE-UP VOLT- An abnormal voltage of Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the wind-up PCB with a new one.
64 AGE the take-up motor was power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes.
detected. In a case of recurrence, contact your
E70 FPGA FPGA Configuration (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
fails. ported after the releasing, this error
does not arise on site i n the present.)
E71 SD-RAM Abnormal operation in (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Make sure that memory PCB is connected
SD-RAM ported after the releasing, this error properly.
does not arise on site i n the present.) 2. Replace the memory PCB with a new one.
E74 TRANS DATA Received data is not Ver- (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Make sure that the ROM file is transmit-
sion Up file ported after the releasing, this error ted.
E75 I/F NONE I/F board is not installed. (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a
ported after the releasing, this error new one.
does not arise on site i n the present.) 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
E76 I/F INITIAL Abnormal operation in I/ (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a
F board ported after the releasing, this error new one.
does not arise on site i n the present.) 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
E77 I/F BOARD An error occurred in the (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a
communication between ported after the releasing, this error new one.
the main PCB and the I/ does not arise on site i n the present.) 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
F board.
E78 HOST I/F A time out error occurs (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a
in the communication ported after the releasing, this error new one.
between the host PC and does not arise on site i n the present.) 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
the I/F board.
E80 ROM0 ERASE ROM0 Erase error (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
ported after the releasing, this error
E81 ROM1 ERASE ROM1 Erase error (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
E82 h'******** ROM0 Write error (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
E83 h'******** ROM1 Write error (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
E84 h'******** Verify error (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
E85 ROM HASH Hash check error (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
E90 h'******** ROM Erase error (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a
4- 9

E92 h'******** ROM Write error (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a
E95 MODE SHIFT Transition to the version (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a
up mode is not allowed. ported after the releasing, this error new one.
E98 I/F FORMAT Wrong version up data. (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Make sure that the ROM file is transmit-
ported after the releasing, this error ted.
E99 VERSION DATA Wrong version up data. (As the support functions will be sup- –––
E111 NCU ROM 00 Dot check F-ROM (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new
ERASE error ported after the releasing, this error one.
(at Version Up) does not arise on site i n the present.)
NCU ROM 01 Dot check F-ROM VER- (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new
IFY error ported after the releasing, this error one.
NCU ROM 02 Dot check F-ROM (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new
WRITE error ported after the releasing, this error one.
E114 NCU ROM HASH Hash check error (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new
(at Version Up) ported after the releasing, this error one.
ERROR NCU I/F 00 An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check the parameter upload, Using state
116 communication between power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. and report the result to the development
the NCU PCB and the If the error occurs frequently, contact department.
NCU I/F 01 control board. your local distributor to call for ser- 1. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new
vice. one.
(Operation can be resumed after turn- 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
ing off the nozzle missing detection
function.)
E119 NCU NONE NCU is not connected (As the support functions will be sup- 1. Make sure that the connection cables are
(at Version Up) ported after the releasing, this error connected properly.
ERROR ENVIRONMENT The ambient temperature Adjust the ambient temperature of the Operation under the temperature among the
120 TEMP(LO) is outside the permissi- printer. guaranteed operation temperature range is
ble temperature range To continue operation without chang- recommended.
(too low). ing the ambient conditions, press the
ERROR ENVIRONMENT The ambient temperature [ENTER] key.
121 TEMP(HI) is outside the permissi-
ble temperature range
(too high).
ERROR MEDIA An error occurred in Select NORMAL in [MediaFeed 1. Replace the media encoder with a new
134 ENCODER: SEN- detection by the media SETUP] – [FEED METHOD] one.
SOR encoder. Or turn the power OFF and turn the 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
(Counting impossible) power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes.
MEDIA An error occurred in In a case of recurrence, contact your
ENCODER:DIR. detection by the media local distributer to call for service.
encoder.
(Wrong orientation)
MEDIA An error occurred in
ENCODER: ORI- detection by the media
GIN encoder.
(Origin detection impos-
sible)
4- 10

ERROR MEDIA FEED An error occurred in 1. Check that the media has been set
135 UNUSUAL media feed. properly.
2. Using [SET UP] - [MediaFeed
SETUP] - [MOVEMENT TEST],
perform testing to see if the media is
compatible with direct feed.
If the state is not recovered with the
procedures above mentioned, execute
the followings. ←
• Select NORMAL in [SET UP] –
[MediaFeed SETUP] – [FEED
METHOD]
• Turn the power OFF and turn the
power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes.
ERROR INK LEAK Ink leakage was Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Make sure that there is no ink leaking both
142 detected. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. insides of bear and the station.
In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Check that the INK LEAK sensor works
local distributer to call for service. properly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST.
3. Wipe off stains on the ink leak sensor
PCB.
ERROR CARTRIDGE An abnormal voltage of Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the ink unit PCB with a new one.
143 SOLENOID the ink cartridge valve power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes.
solenoid was detected. In a case of recurrence, contact your
WASH CART. An abnormal voltage of local distributer to call for service. 1. Replace the IO PCB with a new one.
SOLENOID the cleaning cartridge
valve solenoid was
detected.
ERROR CARTRIDGE SET An ink cartrdge is not Set an ink cartridge. It is explained that leaving a state without set-
144 ! set. ting a cartridge may cause inability of ink
sucking because needles of the slot are dehy-
drated.
ERROR COM- (This error does not occur on site.) Confirm the IF (USB/1394) cable. (specifica-
MAND tions, cable length and so on)
ERROR PARAM- (This error does not occur on site.) Make sure that PRM file, parameter data cor-
ETER respond to version of the device.
ERROR DATA (This error does not occur on site.) Confirm the IF (USB/1394) cable. (specifica-
tions, cable length and so on)
ERR PRM. (This error does not occur on site.) Make sure that PRM file, parameter data cor-
SHORTAGE respond to version of the device.
4- 11

ERROR NCU DETECT 00 NCU detection error Printing can be resumed after turning There is a nozzle row that can not discharge
160 occurred. off the nozzle missing detection func- ink. Identify the row with the test drawing
(Improper parameter tion. and conduct cleaning of the row.
value) Turn on the nozzle missing detection
NCU DETECT 01 NCU detection error function again before starting to print Check the parameter upload, Using state and
occurred. the next and subsequent print files. report the result to the development depart-
(Improper parameter If the error occurs frequently, contact ment.
value) your local distributor to call for ser-
vice.
NCU DETECT 02 NCU detection error Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new
occurred. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. one.
(FPGA error) In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
NCU DETECT 03 NCU detection error Printing can be resumed after turning 1. Make sure that the Flushing fan works
occurred. off the nozzle missing detection func- properly.
(Reference position tion. 2. Replace the flushing box with a new one.
judgment) Turn on the nozzle missing detection
NCU DETECT 04 NCU detection error function again before starting to print Dust adhered around the head may cause the
occurred. the next and subsequent print files. NCU detection error. In such a case, instruct
(Reference position If the error occurs frequently, contact the operator to clean around the head fre-
judgment) your local distributor to call for ser- quently.
vice.
ERROR NCU LD consumption cur- Prolonged use is allowed. 1. Replace the nozzle detection sensor with a
161 EXCHANGE rent is close to the If the error occurs frequently, contact new one.
threshold value. your local distributer to call for service.
NCU CONSUMP- LD consumption current Turn the power OFF and turn the
TION is not below the thresh- power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes.
old value. In a case of recurrence, contact your
* Operation can be resumed after turn-
ing off the nozzle missing detection
function.
ERROR NCU LINE Power supply voltage Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the nozzle detection sensor with a
162 VOLTAGE error. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. new one.
In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new
local distributer to call for service. one.
* Operation can be resumed after
turning off the nozzle missing
detection function.
ERROR NCU SENSOR Sensor detection level Prolonged use is allowed. 1. Clean a lens cover of the nozzle detection
163 dropped. If the error occurs frequently, contact sensor.
your local distributer to call for service. 2. Replace the nozzle detection sensor with a
NCU SENSOR Sensor detection error. Turn the power OFF and turn the new one.
DETECT power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new
3.
detection function.
ERROR NCU FPGA FPGA configuration Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the nozzle sensor with a new one.
164 ERROR failure. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new
detection function.
4- 12

ERROR HEAD MEMORY An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check the head memory cable, head relay
200 (----) head unit memory. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. PCB.
In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. Replace the head memory with a new one.
local distributer to call for service. 3. Replace the slider PCB with a new one.
4. Replace the HDC PCB in slot 1 with anew
one.
ERROR BACKUP MEM- An error occurred in Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
201 ORY backup memory. power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes.
ERROR DEVICE CON- The system configura- Contact your local distributor to call 1. Identify a place where the error occurs
202 STRUCTION tion is not supported by for service. with [RESULTof DIAGNOSIS].
the model judgment at
system start. * Press the [ENTER] key to display
the details of the error.
* Press the [ENTER] key again to
enable the system to be started after
changing the configuration to a
supported one.
ERROR SDRAM SIZE SD-RAM with a size Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Make sure that 2 memory PCB are placed.
203 large enough for the power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the memory PCB with a new one.
printer has not been In a case of recurrence, contact your 3. Replace the main PCB with a new one.
mounted. local distributer to call for service.
* When there is available SD-RAM

mounted, the printer can be started
without expanding SD-RAM.
However, printing speed may drop
depending on the resolution.
ERROR INTERLOCK A short circuit of the Turn the power OFF and turn the Short-circuit of one of the following cable.
210 SENSOR interlock cable was power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. Replace the corresponding cable with a new
detected. In a case of recurrence, contact your one.
local distributer to call for service. • Front cover sensor R cable
(Keyboard)
• Maintenance cover sensor cable
(Keyboard)
• Cover sensor L cable
(Ink unit PCB)
ERROR HeaterTEMP An abnormal tempera- Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Replace the IO PCB with a new one.
211 (--/--/--) ture of the media heater power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Replace the corresponding SSR with a
is detected. In a case of recurrence, contact your new one.
HeadWARM. An abnormal tempera- local distributer to call for service. 1. Replace the slider PCB with a new one.
TEMP. (----) ture of the head heater 2. Replace the corresponding head heater
was detected. with a new one.
HeadWARM. The head heater is dis-
BREAK(----) connected.
HeadWARM. Trouble has occurred
THERM(----) with the thermistor of
the head heater.
ERROR WASTE INKtank An error in the sensor Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Check the state with sensor test.
212 SENSOR for the waste ink tank power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. 2. Make sure that the direction of waste ink
was detected. In a case of recurrence, contact your tank is correct,
local distributer to call for service. 3. Replace the sensor with a new one.
4- 13

ERROR Y COORDI- An error was detected Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Make sure that the position of media is
250 NATES during scanning opera- power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. correct.
tion. In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. make sure that there is no bend on the
local distributer to call for service. Paper width sensor.
3. When the state is not recovered, check
parameter upload and using state, and
report the result to the development
department.
ERROR SYSTEM ERROR A system error occurred. Turn the power OFF and turn the 1. Confirm the error with memory check
251 power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes. (Main.SRAM, Main.FROM).
In a case of recurrence, contact your 2. When the state is not recovered, check
local distributer to call for service. parameter upload and using state, and
report the result to the development
department.
4- 14
4-2-2. Warning messages and corrective measures

<Warning messages and corrective measures >
Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual)
Display Cause Descriptions in the manual
(for reference) Remedy
An open cover was detected. Check the front cover and maintenance 1. Make sure that the cover sensor works
covers. properly with #TEST>SENSOR
If the same error message appears TEST cover sensor.
again even after closing all the covers, 2. Make sure that the toggle pushes the
Close a cover. contact your local distributor to call for lever of the cover sensor firmly.
service. 3. Make sure that the cables are con-
nected properly.
4. Replace the cover sensor with a new
one.
No media was detected. Set media. 1. Check that the paper sensor R works
properly with #TEST>SENSOR
TEST.
** NO MEDIA ** 2. Make sure that connection of the
cables is correct.
3. Replace the paper sensor R with a new
one.
!EXCHANGE BAT- The battery of RTC has run Contact your local distributor to call 1. Replace the battery with a new one
TERY down. for service. having the same model number.
Time to replace the wiper in Replace the wiper with a new one. 1. Make sure that wiper replacement is
L.1> [JV5-01] the capping station with a new * Execute [ST.MAINTENANCE] - conducted with MAINTE-
one has come. [WIPER EXCHANGE]. NANCE>ST.MAINTENANCE.
!Replace a WIPER (The wiping count has reached
the specified value.)
The nozzle recovery cannot be Perform test printing. If nozzle missing
L.1> [JV5-01]
!Do TEST DRAW
expected because the printer is serious, execute [ST.MAINTE-
has been left standing for a NANCE] - [NOZZLE WASH] for ←
prolonged period of time. maintenance.
The power to the heaters is off. Turn on the power to the heaters. 1. Check that the heaters work properly
If the same error message appears with #TEST>HEATER TEST.
Heater Power OFF again even after turning on the power
to the heaters, contact your local dis-
tributor to call for service.
A heater is disconnected. Contact your local distributor to call 1. Check that the heaters work properly
(This example shows that pre- for service. with #TEST>HEATER TEST.
PRE PRT AFT heater is disconnected.) 2. Make sure that fuse of heater PCB is
BREAK **°C **°C not blown out.
3. Replace the SSR or IO PCB with a
new one.
The thermistor of a heater is Contact your local distributor to call 1. Check that the heaters work properly
defective. for service. with #TEST>HEATER TEST.
PRE PRT AFT
(This example shows that the 2. Make sure that connection of cables is
THERM **°C **°C thermistor of pre-heater is correct.
defective.) 3. Replace the IO PCB with a new one.
L.*> !NC [JV5-01] There is a problem with the
R.*> !NC [JV5-01]
NCU.
On the NCU>COND.INDICATION
display, check the current error in the
NCU.
←
*Media can't be CUT* high to permit media cutting. Cut the media by manual operation.
The heads are positioned too
←
4- 15
<Warning messages and corrective measures (continued) >

L.*> [JV5-01] Ink for one supply path has Replace the cartridge for the supply
NEAR END MCYK---- been nearly used up. path corresponding to the indicated
color.
R.*> [JV5-01]
* Printing is permitted without
replacing the cartridge (until INK ←
NEAR END MCYK---- END is displayed). However, the
printer returns to local mode every
completion of printing one file.
L.*> [JV5-01] Ink for one supply path has Replace the cartridge for the supply
INK END ----KYCM been completely used up.
R.*> [JV5-01]
path corresponding to the indicated
color. ←
INK END ----KYCM
L.*> !CAR [JV5-01] There is a problem with Check the content of the warning by
installed ink cartridges. displaying it using the guidance func-
(If this occurs together with
R.*> !CAR [JV5-01] any other warning, the display
tion.
←
shows [L.*> !CAR/TNK/
WSH/NC instead of [JV5-**].)
L.*> !TNK [JV5-01] There is a problem with the Check that the waste ink tank has been
waste ink tank. installed and it is not full.
R.*> !TNK [JV5-01] any other warning, the display
←
L.*> !WSH [JV5-01] There is a problem with the Check that the cleaning solution car-
installed cleaning solution cartridge has been set properly.
tridge.
R.*> !WSH [JV5-01] any other warning, the display
←
The ink of the ink cartridge has Replace the cartridge generating the If the error occurs frequently after
been nearly used up. warning with a new one. replacing cartridges or when the car-
tridge has sufficient ink, execute the fol-
lowings.
INK NEAR END 1. Check that the cartridge end sensor
MMCC ---- ---- ---- works properly with #TEST>INK
CARTRIDGE.
2. Check the end board of the cartridge.
3. .Replace the sensor with a new one.
The ink of the ink cartridge has Replace the cartridge generating the If the error occurs frequently after
been completely used up. warning with a new one. replacing cartridges or when the car-
INK END tridge has sufficient ink, execute the fol-
---- YYKK ---- ---- lowings.
1. Check the end board of the cartridge.
2. Replace the sensor with a new one.
The ink cartridge is not Replace the warned cartridge with a If the error occurs frequently after
MIMAKI genuin. MIMAKI genuine one, or insert the replacing cartridges or when the car-
Or, the ink IC chip can not be cartridge again. tridge has sufficient ink, execute the fol-
read. lowings.
NON-ORIGINAL INK
---- ---- KKYY ---- 1. Make sure that #TEST>INK CAR-
TRIDGE>INK-IC CHECK is per-
formed properly.
2. Replace the ID point of contact PCB
with a new one.
4- 16

The IC chip of the ink cartridge Remove the cartridge generating the If the error occurs frequently after
cannot be read normally. warning once and install it again. replacing cartridges or when the car-
If the same warning message still tridge has sufficient ink, execute the fol-
appears, contact your local distributor lowings.
WRONG INK IC to call for service.
---- ---- ---- CCMM 1. Make sure that #TEST>INK CAR-
TRIDGE>INK-IC CHECK is per-
formed properly.
2. Replace the ID point of contact PCB
with a new one.
Kind of INK
---- ---- ---- ----
The ink of the ink cartridge is Check the ink type
different in type from the ink generating the warning.
currently supplied.
of the cartridge
←
Color of INK
---- ---- ---- ----
The ink of the ink cartridge is Check the ink color of the cartridge
different in color from the ink generating the warning.
currently supplied.
←
WRONG CARTRIDGE There is trouble with an
---- ---- ---- ---- installed ink cartridge.
Check the cartridge generating the
warning. ←
An ink cartridge has not been Install an appropriate cartridge in the If the error occurs frequently after
installed in the slot. slot generating the warning. replacing cartridges, execute the follow-
ings.
NO CARTRIDGE 1. Check that the cartridge exist/non-
---- ---- ---- ---- exist sensor works properly with
#TEST>INK CARTRIDGE.
2. If it does not work properly, replace
the sensor or IO PCB with a new one.
The specified expiration date Replace the cartridge generating the
of an ink cartridge has passed. warning with a new one.
Expiration
---- ---- ---- ---- * The cartridge may be used until one
month passes after the specified
←
expiration date.
The expiration date of an ink The red LED blinks.
cartridge has passed (one Replace the cartridge generating the
Expiration:1MONTH month has passed after the
---- ---- ---- ---- specified expiration date).
warning with a new one.
* The cartridge may be used until two
←
months pass after the specified
expiration date.
The expiration date of an ink Replace the cartridge generating the
Expiration:2MONTH cartridge has passed (two
---- ---- ---- ---- months have passed after the
warning with a new one.
←
specified expiration date).
INK REMAIN ZERO Remaining amount of ink in an Replace the cartridge generating the
---- ---- ---- ---- ink cartridge is zero. warning with a new one. ←
The waste ink tank is full or Install a waste ink tank or replace with 1. Make sure that the waste ink tank is
has not been installed. a new one. installed properly.
!WasteTANK 2. Check that the waste ink tank sensor
works properly with #TEST>SEN-
FULL/NONE SOR TEST.
The waste ink tank is nearly Replace the waste ink tank with a new 1. Make sure that the waste ink tank is
full. one. installed properly.
2. Check that the waste ink tank sensor
!NearFULL WASTE works properly with #TEST>SEN-
TANK SOR TEST.
If it does not work properly, replace the
sensor or IO PCB with a new one.
4- 17

The cleaning liquid cartridge is Replace the cleaning solution cartridge 1. Check that the cartridge end sensor
empty. with a new one. works properly with #TEST>WASH
!Wash Liquid END CARTRIDGE.
The cleaning liquid cartridge Install the cleaning solution cartridge. 1. Check that the cartridge exist/non-
has not been installed. exist sensor works properly with
!WashLiquidCart.NONE #TEST>WASH CARTRIDGE.
There is trouble
!WRONG WASH CART. liquid cartridge. with cleaning Check the cleaning solution cartridge.
←
Cleaning solution has not been Supply the cleaning solution.
** Washing liquid ** supplied.
** un-filling up. **
Execute [MAINTENANCE] -
[HD.MAINTENANCE] - [FILL UP ←
INK].
4- 18
CHAPTER 5 Explanation of Electrical Parts
Contents
5-1. Outline ......................................................................... 5-2
5-1-1. Operation Explanation ............................................. 5-3
5-1-2. Power Supply ........................................................... 5-4
5-2. Circuit Board Specifications ...................................... 5-5
5-2-1. Main PCB ................................................................ 5-5
5-2-2. USB Board ............................................................... 5-6
5-2-3. I/F Connection Board .............................................. 5-6
5-2-4. HDC PCB ................................................................ 5-7
5-2-5. IO PCB ..................................................................... 5-7
5-2-6. Ink Unit PCB ........................................................... 5-8
5-2-7. Slider PCB ............................................................... 5-9
5-2-8. Heater PCB ............................................................ 5-10
5-2-9. Keyboard PCB ....................................................... 5-10
5-2-10. Dot Detection PCB ................................................ 5-11
5-2-11. Encoder PCB ......................................................... 5-11
5-2-12. Paper Width Sensor PCB ....................................... 5-11
5-2-13. Take-up PCB .......................................................... 5-11
5-2-14. Box Relay PCB ...................................................... 5-12
5-2-15. Side relay PCB ....................................................... 5-12
5-2-16. Head relay PCB ..................................................... 5-13
5-2-17. Head memory PCB ................................................ 5-13
5-2-18. LED PCB ............................................................... 5-13
5-2-19. Ink Leak Sensor PCB ............................................. 5-13
5-2-20. Memory PCB ......................................................... 5-13
5-3. Electronic block diagram ......................................... 5-14
5- 1
5-1. Outline
JV5-130S/160S is provided with the circuit boards shown below.

5-2-1. Main PCB p. 5 - 5 5-2-11. Encoder PCB p. 5 - 11
5-2-2. USB Board p. 5 - 6 5-2-12. Paper Width Sensor PCB p. 5 - 11
5-2-3. I/F Connection Board p. 5 - 6 5-2-13. Take-up PCB p. 5 - 11
5-2-4. HDC PCB p. 5 - 7 5-2-14. Box Relay PCB p. 5 - 12
5-2-5. IO PCB p. 5 - 7 5-2-15. Side relay PCB p. 5 - 12
5-2-6. Ink Unit PCB p. 5 - 8 5-2-16. Head relay PCB p. 5 - 13
5-2-7. Slider PCB p. 5 - 9 5-2-17. Head memory PCB p. 5 - 13
5-2-8. Heater PCB p. 5 - 10 5-2-18. LED PCB p. 5 - 13
5-2-9. Keyboard PCB p. 5 - 10 5-2-19. Ink Leak Sensor PCB p. 5 - 13
5-2-10. Dot Detection PCB p. 5 - 11 5-2-20. Memory PCB p. 5 - 13
~ Left ~ Ink Unit PCB

~ Head Assy ~ Slider PCB
Encoder PCB
Ink Leak Sensor PCB
Encoder PCB
Head memory PCB (x4)

ID point of contackt Encoder PCB
PCB (x16)
Head relay PCB (x4)
LED PCB (x2) Paper Width Sensor PCB
Ink Leak Sensor PCB
Keyboard PCB
Heater PCB
Ink Leak Sensor PCB
HDC PCB (x4)

ID point of contackt PCB
(Wash Cartridge)
Drying fan fork PCB (x2) Dot Detection PCB Side relay PCB
Power Supply PCB
Box Relay PCB
Take-up PCB
Memory PCB (x2)

IO PCB
I/F Connection Board
Main PCB USB Board
Fig.5-1
5- 2
Outline
5-1-1. Operation Explanation
The slider of JV5-130S/160S consists of four heads arranged staggered from each other, each of which
has nozzles arranged in eight rows, 180 nozzles (at 180-dpi intervals) per row.
Ink is ejected from the ink chamber by vibrating the piezoelectric elements of the heads. For this
vibration waveform, the printer uses variable waveform which can permit 4-step expressions (L, M, S
and none).
The heads are driven by the HDC PCB that are provided for the heads, respectively. The four HDC
PCB are connected to the main PCB in the electrical circuit box. One HDC PCB, which drives one
head, generates the drive signal (COM waveform) that is applied in common to all the piezoelectric
elements of one row of nozzles. The drive signal is generated for the eight rows of nozzles.
FPGA (HDC) is mounted on each HDC PCB. Each FPGA (HDC) applies the COM waveform in
synchronization with the scale interval of the linear scale and simultaneously sends the nozzle data to
the head. By adjusting the time for applying the COM waveform for each head, the print position in
the Y direction can be adjusted within the range of one dot. In addition, ink discharging performance is
different from head to head. Therefore, the COM waveform is automatically corrected based on the
registered head ID or the ID registered on the head memory, other information and the detected
ambient temperature. (There may be a case where no ink is ejected if the head ID is not registered
correctly.)
The main PCB has FPGA (PDC), which takes charge of image processing and controls the SDRAM
picture memory (PRAM). The PRAM is mounted on the memory PCB. One memory PCB has a
capacity of 512 MB and the printer permits mounting of a maximum of four memory PCB (2 GB). Of
the data output from the host PC, the command part is analyzed by the CPU and the image part is
transferred to the memory. The PRAM is a ring memory and when data for one scanning session has
been accumulated, the heads start scanning. One scanning session forms an image only in 180 dpi
(eight or six colors) or in 360 dpi four colors) in the X direction. Therefore, the printer completes the
image in the targeted resolution while feeding the media by a required distance.
JV5 has many devices (stepping motors and sensors) that require communication with the main PCB.
However, the routing of the wires and the replacement of the main PCB would be difficult if such
devices are all connected to the main PCB directly. To avoid such difficulty, the printer is equipped
with the IO PCB and ink unit PCB, which use serial communication with the main PCB, thus reducing
the number of signals. The signals are processed by the FPGA (PDC) mounted on the main PCB.
The missing nozzle detection unit (NCU) consists of the unit that emits a laser beam and detects an ink
drop and the dot detection PCB, which analyzes the data. By emitting a laser beam at an angle and at
fixed intervals, missing nozzles can be detected during printing.
Nozzle Arrangement of Head (Rear View)
HEAD
Paper feeding direction
Scanning direction
Fig.5-2
5- 3
5-1-2. Power Supply
Board name: Power supply PCB assembly (E300428)

The input value and output values of power supply are as follows:
Input AC100V - AC240V, 50/60Hz

Output +3.3V, 5.6 A
+5V, 15.5 A
+24V, 10.0 A
+42V, 10.5 A
+5VSB, 3.5 A
Note: Take care that the input specification for JV-5 is AC200V-AC240V thoug the input specification for the power PCB is
AC100V-AC240V.
<Connector pin assignment table and volume numbers>

PIN Voltage PIN Voltage
1 +42V 13 +42V
2 +42V 14 +42V
3 +24V 15 +24V
4 +24V 16 GND
5 GND 17 GND
6 GND 18 GND
7 GND 19 GND
8 GND 20 GND
9 GND 21 GND
10 GND 22 +5V
11 +5V 23 +5V
12 +3.3V 24 +3.3V
<Volume No.>
Voltage Volume No.
+42V VR4
+24V VR1
+5V VR2
+3.3V VR3
Note: Adjust to be 5% of power voltage.
<Auxiliary power connector>

PIN Voltage
1 +5VSB
2 GND
3 Remote control input
5- 4
Circuit Board Specifications
5-2. Circuit Board Specifications
5-2-1. Main PCB
Board name: Main PCB assembly (E104082)

The CPU is SH-3 (RISC, 200MHz) made by Hitachi.
A program for the CPU is written in flash memory. Version up of this program is easily executed on
site through I/F.
The CPU downloads the version up to PRAM to execute writing in the flash memory.
When receive data is read, The CPU write the data in picture memory. After execution of required
processes, the data is transmitted to the HDC PCB with 8 bit width.
Receiving the data, the HDC creates driving COM signals for head 1 ~ 4 and nozzle data, and
transmits each data to the slider PCB via HDC FPC cable.
X, Y-axis motor driving circuit and other IO circuits are also included.
<Block diagram around main PCB>
Fig.5-3
5- 5
Main PCB Connector Signals

<Main PCB connector signals>
CN No Pin Connected to: Silk display Notice
CN1 6 X-axis motor encoder X-ENC Color: Black

CN2 5 Y-axis motor encoder Y-ENC
CN3 3 X-axis motor X-MOT Color: Black
CN4 2 Y-axis motor Y-MOT
CN5 32 Keyboard PCB KEY
CN6 20 Dot detection PCB DOT
CN7 10 Option heater HEATER
CN8 28 Ink unit PCB INKUNIT
CN9 6 Media rotary encoder M-ENC
CN10 4 F/W debug F/W Not used
CN11 64 HDC PCB 1 HDC1
CN15 72 SDRAM memory 1 SDRAM1
CN16 72 SDRAM memory 2 SDRAM2
CN17 72 SDRAM memory 3 SDRAM3 Not used
CN18 72 SDRAM memory 4 SDRAM4 Not used
CN19 80 USB/1394I/F
CN20 24 Main power source POWER Main power
CN21 3 Main power source SUB-POW Sub-power
CN22 4 IO PCB IO-POW IO power
CN23 38 IO PCB IO IO signal
CN24 10 Auxiliary SUB Not used
CN25 100 Debug board Not used
CN26 8 G/A debug G/A Not used
* As for arrangement of each pin, see the tables below.
5-2-2. USB Board

Board name: USB PCB assembly (E103711)
USB PCB or 1394 board can be connected. Each of them has a CPU on I/F board and program is
written in flash memory of the CPU. Therefore, version up of the I/F-CPU is conducted with
download from the host computer. This board supports the duplex.
5-2-3. I/F Connection Board

Board name: I/F connection board assembly (E103701)
The main PCB and I/F board are connected together.
5- 6
5-2-4. HDC PCB

Board name: HDC PCB protection panel assembly (E104537)
A board to generate driving signals for head. One HDC can drive 1 head.
In order to remove heat generated at creating COM wave form, a cooling fan is used.
Installed to be vertical to the main PCB.
HDC PCB connector signals

<HDC PCB connector signals>
CN No Pin Connect to: Silk display Notice
CN1 40 Slider PCB

CN2 40 Slider PCB
CN3 40 Slider PCB
CN4 40 Slider PCB
CN5 64 Main PCB
CN6 2 Thermistor 1 Not used
CN7 2 Thermistor 2 Not used
5-2-5. IO PCB
Board name: I/O PCB assembly (E104085)
Controlling I/O of sensors, stepping motors and fans.
IO PCB Connector Signals

< IO PCB connector signals>
CN1 38 Main PCB MAIN BOARD

CN2 6 For CPLD Not used
CN3 4 Main PCB POW
CN4 30 Harness (Take-up, unreel) WIND/FEED
CN5 2 AUX. AD1 Not used
CN7 3 Paper sensor F F-PAPER Not used
CN8 28 Harness (Station) Harness1 Station harness
CN9 3 Cross paper sensor A-PAPER Color: Blue
CN10 3 AUX. Input 1 Not used
CN12 18 Side relay PCB SideRelay Board Color: Yellow
CN13 26 Box relay PCB BoxRelayBoard 1 Color: Red
CN14 12 Harness (SSR, HDC cooling fan) Harness 2 Color: Blue
CN15 16 Box relay PCB BoxRelayBoard 2 Color: Black
CN16 6 AUX. SSR Not used
Note: As for arrangement of each pin, see the tables below.
5- 7
5-2-6. Ink Unit PCB

Board name: Ink unit PCB assembly (E104086)
Arranged rear face of the ink cartridge.
Solenoid, ID, near end sensor, existence sensor and LED PCB and cover sensor of 16 ink cartridges
are connected. The main PCB is connected to with a cable.
Ink Unit PCB Connector Signals

<Ink unit PCB connector signals>
CN1 6 LED PCB LED BOARD

CN2 28 Main PCB MAIN BOARD
CN3 6 CPLD Not used
CN4 7 Cover sensor COVER
CN6 8 LED1~4 (1)
CN7 8 LED5~8 (2)
CN8 8 LED9~12 (3)
CN9 8 LED13~16 (4)
CN10 4 Ink cartridge 1 (1)
CN26 3 AUX. IN1 Not used
CN27 3 AUX. IN2 Not used
CN28 2 Ink solenoid 1 (1)
5- 8
5-2-7. Slider PCB

Board name: Slider PCB assembly (E104591)
Arranged in the head cover.
FFC from HDC is connected to relay signals to head. I/O and encoder PCB of each paper width sensor,
cutter solenoid are also connected.
Slider PCB Connector Signals

<Slider PCB connector signals>
CN1 3 Cap height sensor Cap HIGH Color: Red

CN2 3 Jam sensor 1 JAM1 Color: Blue
CN3 3 Jam sensor 2 JAM2 Color: Yellow (Not used)
CN4 4 Paper width sensor PAPER E.G Color: Black
CN5 4 Registry guide sensor TOMBO Color: White (Not used)
CN6 40 HDC PCB 1 (CN1)
CN18 80 Head relay PCB HEAD1
CN22 5 Linear encoder L-ENC Color: Red
CN23 5 Cutter solenoid CUT-ENC Color: Yellow
CN24 5 Position encoder POS-ENC Color: Blue
CN25 2 AUX. 1 SUB1 Color: White (Not used)
CN26 2 Cutter solenoid P-CUTTER Color: Green
CN27 2 Blow off fan 2 FAN2 Color: Orange (Not used)
CN30 2 Blow off fan 1 FAN1 Color: Orange (Not used)
CN31 2 LED LED Color: Red (Not used)
CN33 2 Driller solenoid Color: Gray (Not used)
CN34 2 AUX. 5 Color: White (Not Used)
5- 9
5-2-8. Heater PCB

Board name: Heater PCB assembly (E104043)
Arranged in the electric equipments.
Power from AC power source is relayed to each heater.
Heater PCB Connector Signals

<Heater PCB connector signals>
CN1 3 Power plug (Inlet) POW

CN2 3 Power supply PCB BOARD Not used
CN3 4 SSR (Print) SSR-P Color: Blue
CN4 4 SSR (Pre) SSR-R Color: Red
CN5 4 SSR (After) SSR-A Color: Yellow
CN6 4 Thermostat (Print) TMS-P Color: Blue
CN7 4 Thermostat (Pre) TMS-R Color: Red
CN8 4 Thermostat (After) TMS-A Color: Yellow
CN9 3 Wire heater -1 (1) Color: Blue
CN13 3 Wire heater -5 (5) Color: Blue (Not used)
CN14 3 Wire heater -6 (6) Color: Blue (Not used)
CN15 3 Pre aluminum foil heater R1-1 (1) Color: Red
CN16 3 Pre aluminum foil heater R1-2 (2) Color: Red
CN17 3 Pre aluminum foil heater R2-1 (3) Color: Red (Not used)
CN18 3 Pre aluminum foil heater R2-2 (4) Color: Red (Not used)
CN19 3 After aluminum foil heater A1-1 (1) Color: Yellow
5-2-9. Keyboard PCB

Board name: Keyboard PCB assembly (E104089)
Comprising 2 of 20 characters x 2 lines LCD and key switches for each, connected to the main PCB
with a keyboard cable.
Keyboard PCB Connector Signals

<Keyboard PCB connector signals>
CN3 32 Main PCB

CN4 3 Front cover sensor R
CN5 4 Remote switch
CN6 3 Maintenance cover sensor Color: Black
5- 10
5-2-10. Dot Detection PCB

Board name: Dot detection PCB assembly (E104091)
Arranged on back side of the keyboard cover.
Connected to the nozzle check unit (NCU) to detect nozzle missing and communicates with the main
PCB in serial.
Dot detection PCB Connector Signals

<Dot detection PCB connector signals>
CN1 100 Debug board Not used

CN2 9 NCU to NCU
CN3 8 AUX. power source Not used
CN4 20 Main PCB to MAIN
5-2-11. Encoder PCB

Board name: Encoder PCB assembly (E103961)
There are total 3 boards, namely a board for linear scale placed behind the slider, a board for head up/
down placed in the left side of the slider, and a board for paper thickness detection placed near the
cutter solenoid.
5-2-12. Paper Width Sensor PCB

Board name: Paper width sensor PCB assembly (E103960)
Placed near the cutter solenoid, and including a sensor for paper width detection.
5-2-13. Take-up PCB

Board name: Take-up PCB assembly (E104087)
Placed in the take-up device. M motor and Take-up switch are connected. Serial communication is
conducted with the IO PCB to control.
Take-up PCB Connector Signals

<Take-up PCB connector signals>
CN1 6 For CPLD Not used

CN2 16 IO PCB IO
CN3 3 SEN1 Not used
CN4 3 SEN2 Not used
CN5 4 STEP Not used
CN6 6 Take-up switch M-SW
CN7 2 Not used
CN8 5 L-ENC Not used
CN9 9 M motor MOT
CN10 3 Not used
5- 11
5-2-14. Box Relay PCB

Board name: Box relay PCB assembly (E104351)
Relaying the connection between pump motor, FAN etc. and the IO PCB. Placed in the electric
equipment box in the front.
Box relay PCB Connector Signals

<Box relay PCB connector signals>
CN1 26 IO PCB to IO
CN2 16 IO PCB to IO
CN3 9 Pump 1, 2 PUMP 1,2 Color: Black
CN4 8 Pump 3, 4 PUMP 3,4
CN5 4 Drying fan EXH-F2
CN6 8 Exhaust fan EXH-F3
CN7 2 Flushing box fan FB-FAN
CN8 14 Adsorption fan, Thermistor FAN
CN9 7 Wiper sensor, Solenoid WIPE
CN10 6 Waste tank sensor TANK
5-2-15. Side relay PCB

Board name: Side relay PCB assembly (E104352)
Relaying connection between the solenoid, sensors etc. and the IO PCB. Placed on the right side face
viewing from the front.
Side Relay PCB Connector Signals

<Side relay PCB connector signals>
CN1 18 IO PCB to IO
CN2 2 Cap valve solenoid CAP-SOL Color: Black
CN3 4 Head up/down motor HEAD-M
CN4 3 Y origin sensor Y-HOME
CN5 2 ID point of contact PCB WASH-ID
CN6 2 Cartridge solenoid WASH-SOL
CN7 4 Detection machine assembly I/C, Y WASH-CAT
CN8 2 Motor cooling fan M-FAN Not used
CN9 3 Ink leak sensor 1 ST-LEAK
CN10 3 Ink leak sensor 2 Y-LEAK1
CN11 3 Ink leak sensor 3 Y-LEAK2
5- 12
5-2-16. Head relay PCB

Board name: Head relay PCB assembly (E104237)
Relaying connection between the slider PCB and the head FPC.
Head Relay PCB Connector Signals

<Head relay PCB connector signals>
CN1 35 Head FFC

CN2 31 Head FFC
CN4 80 Slider PCB
CN3 11 Head memory PCB
CN5 2 Head memory PCB Not used
5-2-17. Head memory PCB

Board name: Head memory PCB assembly (E104428)
Head ID information is stored. Assembled to be integrated into the head.
Head memory PCB connector signals

<Head memory PCB connector signals>
CN1 3 Head warm thermistor

CN2 11 Head relay PCB
CN3 2 Head warm heater
CN4 2 Head warm heater
5-2-18. LED PCB

Board name: LED PCB assembly (E104088)
A control LED (green) and an error LED (Red) are equipped on each slot, and 2 LED PCBs are used.
LED PCB Connector Signals

<LED PCB connector signals>
CN1 6 Ink unit PCB ENTER

CN2 6 LED PCB EXIT
5-2-19. Ink Leak Sensor PCB

Board name: Ink leak sensor PCB assembly (E104534)
Three of the board are used, namely, on both sides in the cable bear guide and on the cap in the station.
5-2-20. Memory PCB

Board name: Memory PCB assembly (E104090)
1 board has the capacity of 512 MB, and 2 boards are mounted on the main PCB.
5- 13
5-3. Electronic block diagram

CN6 CN1
CN7 CN2
HDC
CN3 PCB CN11
CN8 CN4 1
*After the number of lots,
it absorbs it to the slider PCB.
5V PCB CN9 CN1
CN10
HDC
CN2
CN3 PCB CN13
Linear Cutter Position Bottom Paper Cutter CN11 CN4 3

Encoder Encoder Encoder Point Width actuator JAM
PCB PCB PCB Sensor Sensor assy. Sensor
CN12 CN1 HDC
N.C
CN13 CN2
CN3
PCB CN12
CN25 CN32 CN34 CN22 CN23 CN24 CN1 CN4 CN26 CN2 CN3
RED YELLOW BLUE RED BLACK GREEN BLUE YELLOW CN14 CN4 2
Slider PCB CN15 CN1 HDC
CN18 CN19 CN20 CN21 CN16 CN2
CN3
PCB CN14
CN27 CN30 Head Rekay PCB Head Rekay PCB Head Rekay PCB Head Rekay PCB CN17 CN4 4
CN1CN2 CN3 CN1CN2 CN3 CN1CN2 CN3 CN1CN2 CN3
N.C N.C
CN2 CN2 CN2 CN2 16 x 40- Conductor HDC FPCs
Head Memory PCB Head Memory PCB Head Memory PCB Head Memory PCB
Media Rotary CN9
Head Heater x2 Head Heater x2 Head Heater x2 Head Heater x2 Encoder
Thermistor Thermistor Thermistor Thermistor
INK HEAD 1 INK HEAD 3 INK HEAD 2 INK HEAD 4 Keyboard PCB
INK Cartridge
CN10: INK1 CN18: INK9
(x16) CN11: INK2 CN19: INK10 Remote switch CN5
Presence /Near End CN12: INK3 CN20: INK11
Sensor x16 CN14: INK5 CN22: INK13 Front Cover Sensor R
CN4
CN16: INK7 CN24: INK15 Maintenance Cover
CN17: INK8 CN25: INK16 CN6 CN5
Sensor R BLACK CN3
CN28: SOL1 CN36: SOL9 IF Connection
CN29: SOL2 CN37: SOL10
CN30: SOL3 CN38: SOL11 PCB
Solenoid Valve
CN31: SOL4 CN39: SOL12
x 16 CN32: SOL5 CN40: SOL13 USB2.0
CN33: SOL6 CN41: SOL14 CN19
INK Cartridge
Solenoid
CN34: SOL7
CN35: SOL8
CN42: SOL15
CN43: SOL16 USB PCB
CN4 Front Cover Sensor L
ID Point of CN6: ID1 BLACK
Contact PCB x4
Maintenance Cover Y-axis
INK Unit Sensor L Motor
PCB WHITE
CN2
ID Point of CN7: ID2
Contact PCB x4 WHITE
X-axis CN4
CN26 N.C Motor
BLACK
CN1
ID Point of CN8: ID3 BLACK
Contact PCB x4 BLACK
CN3
BLACK
CN2 CN8
ID Point of
Contact PCB x4
CN9: ID4 Power Supply PCB
CN3 DC3.3V
DC 5V CN4 CN20
DC24V
(For CPLD) DC42V
DC5VB CN5 CN21
LED PCB LED PCB CN1 CN1
CN2 CN1 CN2 CN1
After Heater
Power SSR
Heater PCB Thermostat Thermistor
CN4 RED CN19
Supply (Rear) BLACK
Switch CN3 BLUE CN20
SSR BLACK Print Heater
CN5 BLACK
(Print) CN21
CN1 BLACK
Power Supply Thermostat Thermistor
Socket SSR CN22
CN7 BLACK
(After) RED CN8
CN16 BLACK
RED
RY1 1 CN15 Rear Heater
2 RED CN6 CN12 CN11 CN10 CN9
BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE BLUE
6 3 Thermostat Thermistor
5 4
5- 14
Electronic block diagram
External Connector Group

Steel Plate OPTION
CN7 External Heater
Dsub9pin
Main
PCB
N.C CN3 CN5 N.C
SDRAM
Slot 4 N.C Take-up
CN18 N.C CN4 PCB CN9
Take-up
SDRAM N.C CN10 Motor
Slot 3 N.C
CN17 N.C CN7
Reel Out IF
SDRAM Memory CN6 Wind Roll SW ASSY
Slot 2 PCB (CW/CCW/OFF)
CN4 Dsub15 CN1
CN16 (512MB)
CN2 CN8
(For CPLD) N.C
SDRAM Memory Dsub15
Slot 1
CN15
PCB
(512MB)
IO PCB
CN2 N.C
CN12 CN1
CN22 CN3 CN8 N.C
Origin Sensor CN4 Head U/D

CN3
Motor
CN23 CN1
Station
Side Relay
PCB Wash Cartridge
INK Leak Sensor PCB CN9
Dot Detection CN5 ID Point of Contackt
PCB
PCB Bear Guide (L/R)
CN6 CN4
CN10 CN6 Solenoid Valve
INK Leak Sensor PCB
CN1
(For DEBUG BOARD) Presence Sensor &
INK Leak Sensor PCB CN11 CN7
(For single Near End Sensor
CN3 purpose
power supply)
Exhaust Fan L Exhaust Fan R
CN5 (For DEBUG)
CN2
CN2
(For CPLD)
MD8pin
NCU
CN13 CN6
OPTION CN1 Dry Fan Assy
Deodorization FAN x2
MD4pin
CN15 CN2
2pin 4pin
BLACK BLACK
CN5 Drying Fan Drying Fan
Fork PCB Fork PCB
2pin BOX
BLACK
CN5 N.C
Relay
Waste Tank Sensor 1
Clamp Sensor
PCB Steel Plate Relay
CN7 N.C CN10 Waste Tank Sensor 2
Paper Sensor
CN9 N.C FB FAN
BLUE Wiper Sensor
Bottom Point Sensor
CN7
CN8 Wiper Wash
Solenoid
Station CN9 䎕䏓䏌䏑䎃䎃䎥䎯䎤䎦䎮
Motor
CN25 Wiper Pump Motor 1

CN3
(For DEBUG Motor BLACK Pump Motor 2
BOARD)
CN10 To R Heater Thermistor Pump Motor 3
3pin WHITE CN4
(For F/W RS) Pump Motor 4
CN26 CN8
(For G/A) BLACK
CN14
HDC 2pin
Cooling Fan 2pin BLACK
3pin WHITE
To A Heater Thermistor
To RY1 To P Heater Thermistor 䎕䏓䏌䏑䎃䎃䎺䎫䎬䎷䎨

To SSR x3 Absorption Fan x3
5- 15
5- 16
A Ink Unit PCB ....................................
IO PCB ...........................................
3- 98, 5- 8
3- 78, 5- 7
A Heater Cover Assy. ............................... 3- 193
Adjust Head Stagger ................................... 3- 23
Adjustment of the head angle ........................ 3- 20 J
Adjustment tools .......................................... 1- 4 Jam Sensor ............................................. 3- 121
B K
BasisHEADheight ...................................... 3- 12 Keyboard PCB ................................ 3- 92, 5- 10
Bottom Point Sensor ................................. 3- 115
BOX Relay PCB ........................................ 3- 90
Box Relay PCB .......................................... 5- 12
L
LED PCB .....................................
C
3- 103, 5- 13
Cap Base 1H ............................................. 3- 38

M
Cap Head assy. .......................................... 3- 37 M Motor ................................................ 3- 186
Cap Sensor .............................................. 3- 117 Main PCB ........................................ 3- 70, 5- 5
Capping adjusting ....................................... 3- 14 Maintenance Cover Sensor L ..................... 3- 151
Clamp Sensor .......................................... 3- 113 Maintenance Cover Sensor R ..................... 3- 152
Cutter Unit Assy. ..................................... 3- 189 Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly .............. 3- 42
Media Rotary Encoder Assembly ................ 3- 139
D Memory PCB ............................................ 5- 13
Damper Assembly ...................................... 3- 57
Dot Detection PCB .......................... 3- 96, 5- 11
O
Drop Position Correction ............................. 3- 26 Origin Sensor .......................................... 3- 110
Drying Fan Fork PCB ............................... 3- 106
E P
P Heater Cover Assy. ............................... 3- 198
Electronic block diagram ............................. 5- 14 Paper Sensor ........................................... 3- 136
Encoder PCB ............................................. 5- 11 Paper Thickness Encoder .......................... 3- 125
Enter Head ID ........................................... 3- 18 Paper Width Sensor ................................. 3- 119
Paper Width Sensor PCB ............................ 5- 11
F Power PCB .............................................. 3- 85
Power Supply ............................................. 5- 4
Filling of Ink ............................................. 3- 19 Pump Motor Assembly ............................... 3- 35
Front Cover Sensor L ................................ 3- 147
Front Cover Sensor R ................................ 3- 149 R
H R Heater Cover Assy. ............................... 3- 204
HDC PCB ........................................ 3- 77, 5- 7

Head memory PCB ..................................... 5- 13
S
Head Relay PCB ........................................ 3- 81 S Pump Assembly ...................................... 3- 33
Head relay PCB ......................................... 5- 13 Side Relay PCB ........................................ 3- 99
Head UD Motor ....................................... 3- 184 Side relay PCB .......................................... 5- 12
Head Unit ................................................... 3- 7 Slider PCB ....................................... 3- 82, 5- 9
Head Up/Down Encoder ............................ 3- 132 Specifications of the main unit ....................... 1- 5
Heater PCB .................................... 3- 88, 5- 10 SSR ...................................................... 3- 209
Station Motor .......................................... 3- 182
I Sucker BOX ............................................. 3- 61
I/F Connection Board .................................... 5- 6
ID Point of Contact PCB ............................ 3- 101
T
Ink Leak Sensor PCB .................................. 5- 13 Take-up PCB ................................ 3- 105, 5- 11
Ink Leakage Sensor .................................. 3- 153 Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly 1- 4
1
U
USB Board ................................................. 5- 6
USB PCB ................................................. 3- 79
W
Wash Cartridge Assembly ........................... 3- 51
Waste Tank Sensor ................................... 3- 158
Wiper Motor ........................................... 3- 179
Wiper Sensor .......................................... 3- 112
Wiper Wash Solenoid ............................... 3- 206
X
X Belt .................................................... 3- 165
X Pulley ................................................. 3- 165
X-axis Motor Assembly ............................ 3- 162
Y
Y Drive Belt ........................................... 3- 175
Y Drive Pulley Assembly .......................... 3- 171
Y Encoder .............................................. 3- 129
Y-axis Motor Assembly ............................ 3- 167
Y-Drive Transmission Belt ........................ 3- 171
2
D500306-2.00-29092006 IG
© MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD. 2006 TM
FW1.20

Mimaki JV5 160S Service ID4589 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mimaki JV5 160S Service ID4589 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.

About this Maintenance Manual

In text Name of symbol Meaning

Operation Principle and Functions

3-2-4. Cap Head assy. ................................................................................ 3-37

Explanation of Electrical Parts

1-1. Precautions in Maintenance

Observe the following precautions in maintenance work.

1-1-2. Preliminary checks

1-2. Tools required for maintenance work

1-2-1. Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly

1-2-2. Adjustment tools

1-3. Specifications of the main unit

2-1-1. Sequence at Power-on .............................................. 2-2

2-2-1. ADJUST Function ................................................. 2-26

2-3-1. Outline ................................................................... 2-50

2-1. Operation Principle

2-1-1. Sequence at Power-on

The following is the sequence after power-on.

No. Item Process content

2-1-2. Origin Point Detection

Detection of each original point of the device

<Operation sequence at original point detection>

3. Detection of head top point (detection by the head height sensor)

4. Moving to the set height.

5 Cap 1. Returning the carriage to the Y-original point.

2. Upping the station (cap motor drive)

The following required resources are checked.

Diagnosis results Head (HDC) determined to have an error in 1 ~ 3 is displayed.

<Required RAM size>

I/F Board Detection

2-1-4. Media Detection

<Media detection operation sequence>

* Media thickness 0.0mm:ERROR50

* During carriage moving of the media width detection, the

2-1-5. Sequence of Maintenance Function

PUMP TUBE WASH

<CR.MAINTENANCE operation sequence>

Maintenance cleaning fluid fill/discharge

2-1-6. Ink System

Ink Supply Control

Fig.2-1 Ink Supply Path Diagrammic Illustration

Flow of the ink supply control

Error check of a cartridge

Selection/determination of a supply cartridge

a) When there is a cartridge having an error in 1 supply path.

b) When there are plural of effective cartridges in 1 supply path.

Occurrence timing of supply cartridge switching

The table below shows the switching timing of supply cartridges.

Open/close instruction for supply valve

<Cartridge states indicated by LED>

Switching of supply cartridges occurs under the conditions shown below.

*1 Transition to the LOCAL mode is executed after each completion of drawing.

Ink system error monitoring

Ink residual quantity control

Calculation of ink consumption quantity

b) At cleaning and filling (ink suction)

Updating of ink residual quantity

Errors related to ink residual quantity

* Arises at 220cc cartridge: 400cc, 440cc cartridge: 800cc.

Ink wear-up cleaning

Ink Suction and Discharge Control